Home

Jaguar VXG

Contents

1. Overload capability Overload capability 150 1 min 200 3 08 1 min 200 3 0 150 1 min 200 3 08 ee o E EN AONE Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 rolagenrequency Q ERSTER saa 10t0 15 o Braking transistor x Built in braking resistor ee Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR S Applicable safety o i UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Fan cooling Weight Mass kg 62 ea oa J o wo mlm ms mlm l mlesol 2 4 pole standard motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 4 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 5 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 6 Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 7 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in VT mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters MT Medium D
2. O y13 Timer y14 Baud rate 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y15 Data length y16 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 3 None 1 stop bit y17 Stop bits 0 2 bits 1 1 bit y18 No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 to 60 s y19 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s y20 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol 2 IMO general purpose inverter protocol y97 Communication Data Storage 0 Save into nonvolatile storage Rewritable times limited Selection 1 Write into temporary storage Rewritable times unlimited 2 Save all data from temporary storage to nonvolatile one After saving data the y97 data automatically returns to 1 Frequency command Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option Frequency command Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link JAGUAR Loader Follow H30 and y98 data aiin i Run command Y Y 5 105 Follow H30 data 5 149 Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option Via fieldbus option Run command i Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection y99 Loader Link Function Mode selection Via RS 485 link JAGUAR Loader Via RS 485 link JAGUAR Loader Via RS 485 link JAGUAR Loader 5 24 2 J D Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m
3. ro yy a Et E Output grounding Key At a gt Input grounding 5 F Input wires Output wires Figure 9 1 Wiring for EMC Filter Built in Type Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW 2 For connection to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 9 2 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the motor and panel Metal panel MCCB or Power RCD ELCB supply Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 9 2 Mounting the Inverter in a Metal Panel E In case an EMC compliant filter optional is externally used 1 Mount the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly clamp the shields to the metal plate to ground them Further connect the shielding layers electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor 2 For connection to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded pane
4. a It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Symbol of meter Note A Power supply Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters 7 5 Insulation Test Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment avoid making a Megger test at the customer s site If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit observe the following instructions otherwise the inverter may be damaged A withstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong When the withstand voltage test is necessary consult your IMO representative 1 Megger test of main circuit 1 Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail before measurement 2 If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 Value of 5 MQ or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state The value is measured on an inverter alone Inverter V TO U R1 P1 P N W RO Megger Figure 7 2 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test 2 Insulat
5. Running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format 325 Running status 2 N A Refer to E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3_23 on the next page 994 siamese T oC Temperature detected by the NTC thermistor built in the motor P If the NTC thermistor connectivity is disabled appears Not used ES ee Coa Wotued S S ie ana d Current position pulse for positioning control servo lock a Position deviation pulse for positioning control servo lock 5 D 2 Q9 adYdA3 AHL NISN NOILvVH3dO E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3 23 To display the running status and running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 3 7 and 3 8 Table 3 9 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 10 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Table 3 7 Running Status 3_07 Bit Assignment BUSY WBE AUN MOe One Agta aS ems 1 under voltage limiting control written Always 0 0 Always 0 EET 1 under torque limiting control a nan 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher pane Le ps Nov than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when 12 RL ready for run and frequency commands via 4 BRK _ 1 during braking communications link 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 when the inverter output is shut
6. 15 VXG4A4E a 2 2 WXGS5A4E 2 0 s 2 0 40 vxGoA4eE J 2 5 5 VXGI6ASL4E 75 VXG23A 4E VXGIOASL 4E 2 0 i oae VXG30A5L 4E ee a H Se a sce 2 eee e oone o a eee ee 2 ea a 3 a a aa F ona eee a 14 B 90 VXG2I0AL 4E_ VXG176AL 4E _ 60 VXG304AL 4E VXG253AL 4E VXG210AL 4E VXG377AL 4E VXG304AL 4E VXG253AL 4E VXG253AL 4E_ VXG210AL 4E_ VXG176AL 4E 22 250 XGA ISAL 4E 38 ago L VZG520AL4E 250 VXG650AL 4E 200x2 315 VXG740AL 4E VXGOSOAL 4E 150x2 EZS 450 VXG840AL 4E VXG960AL 4E 250x2 e 500 VXG1170AL 4E VXG960AL 4E 325x2 325x3 630 VXG1370AL 4E VXG1170AL 4E 3253 325x3 Ea 70 XGIZ70AL 4E 250x4 2 Use the crimp terminal model No 38 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 3 Use the crimp terminal model No 60 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 4 When using 150 mm wires for main circuit terminals of VXG282AL 2E VT mode use CB150 10 crimp terminals designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399 5 Use the crimp terminal model No 8 L6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent Terminals common to all inverters Recommended wire size mm_ Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO 5 1 5 KWorabove sd or above Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 ee a A y p p 400 V class series with 75 kW
7. 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code or the light alarm indication a is displayed on the LED monitor If neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication a appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation __ Y gt Go to Section 6 3 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time J O C W a m T O O Z Q lt Formatted Bullets and Numbering 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure 8 The motor abnormally heats up 9 The motor does not run as expected Problems with inverter settings Go to Section 6 3 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor _ Go to Section 6 4 I
8. 4E 16A5L 23AL 30A5L 37AL 45AL GOAL 75AL 91AL 112AL 150AL 176AL ht applied Loa 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 5 5 7 5 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 T 5 eee rating ca EM ONC Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function fan s 2s 10 ss oo es es ae a e e e e a mpm O Overload capability 150 1 min 200 3 0 s Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Allowable 0 o 0 21 voltage frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 2 Required capacity ROR WA T DCR kVA 7 1 2 2 1 3 2 52 7 4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 pTO 150 100 10 to 15 Built Coo a Braking time s DuyoyoeED 5 3 5 3 je EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR Option Applicable safety Pr f UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 IP20 UL open type IPOO UL open type Fan cooling Weigh Mase to 8 21 a7 2s 32 Oe oe Lee Ls spe ea Le Le e ut power Output ratings 90 to 630 kW Type VXG 4E 210AL 50a 304AL 377AL 415AL 520AL 650AL 740AL 840AL 960AL 1170AL 1370AL Pf fof Nominal applied me kW 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 Output rating gfemeorsors or ow we gt or oe om oe ow oe Pom om TT Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function rao ooo fio J l ratings
9. Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA F23 to F25 Starting Frequency 1 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time Stop Frequency F38 Stop Frequency Detection mode F39 Stop Frequency Holding time H92 Continuity of Running P H93 Continuity of Running I d24 Zero Speed Control Under V f control At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the inverter Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting gt l p Stop l l frequency l l l l F25 frequency 1 Time Inverter Out of running i Out of running running state Gate OFF A NDING seater Gate OFF Time E Starting frequency 1 F23 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter Under V f control even if the starting frequenc
10. memo cou onos teres Cerne Mmergd End f d End il is nd of r a oo Fr 5 l mas 2 Eri an T l l l l l I l l l i I I I l l I l Lary gt Erm End of write nee 1 Write error Incompatible or amp code DJO _ rr m a pid a J C _ LIL t Par x End of ak a ee Err verification x ia No data to be saved or Verification error E G amp S isin verification error ye End of read N shows Blinking Figure 3 6 Menu Transition in Menu 7 Data Copying 3 20 Basic keying operation 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display Data Copying epy 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of data copying functions e g read 4 Use the W and V keys to select the desired function then press the 9 key to execute the selected function e g read will blink 5 When the selected function has been completed end appears Press the amp key to return to the list of data copying functions Press the amp key again to return to the menu Table 3 17 below lists details of the data copying functions Table 3 17 List of Data Copying
11. Digital input common terminal E RS 485 COM port 1 RJ45 connectar for keypad DBR Dynamic Braking Resistor e p L m DCR DC Reactor E r E RCO Residual current opersied lt f l Protective device ee ELCE Earth Leakage Circuli Breaker a4 MC Magnetic Contactor a MOCE Mokted Case Circuit Breaker USE comector 2 10 MCCB or 2 VXGxxx 4E are set with SOURCE mode input by factory default i d Main circuit RCD ELCB 1 MC oe vee Power supply at OLUR Ue Motor 400 V class series TENS ee E E re OL2 S VO M 380 to 480 V w 4 er O 50 60 Hz m ae ee 2 foe i ag A PRO se Auxiliary control power input 3 TO Power switching connector CN UX 10 Auxiliary fan power input 4 i i Fan power supply switching connector CN R A CN W 10 Grounding terminal K ose G ce Grounding terminal 7 EA a aa i E ES A RE Ad A RY Pa E EE E EES a J i ae i EE oe oa a g Analog anput Control circuit r Potentiometer power supply 3 13 10 VDC ov 30C Contact outputs 9 Voltage input for 2 J42 30B Alarm output frequency setting i na Lof gt 30 30A for any alarm 0 to 10 VDC do dM 0 to 10 VDC n i a eae r pen i V2 Y5C Q A
12. Front cover Main nameplate Cooling fans base Front cover Main nameplate Top mounting Front cover fixing screw Wiring guide a ee Control circuit Main circuit terminal block a VXG30A5L 4E Internal air circulation fan Keypad enclosure openable Front cover b VXG520AL 4E Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters 2 Warning plates and label s WARNING BRISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Reter to the instruction manual before installation and operation Do not remove any cover while applying power and at wast Smin after disconnecting power Mare than ane live circuit Sae instruction manual Securely ground earth the equipment High touch current AES mA SAE S Aa ath T ok ANS EE BARET HER RUHR OPA RT SAAR HERRE AES ath GMs Eras SSO PATE ESCE AEUR oS EAE EAB Only type B f RCD is llow d See manual tor details a VXG30A5L 4E A WARNING A BRISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation Do nol remove this cover while applying power This cover can be removed after at least 10 min ol power off and after the CHARGE lamp turns off More than one live circuit See instruction manual Do not insert fingers or anything else into the inverter Securely ground earth the equipment High touch current A 8 EAA BE S ee Se hs a
13. O Z O O J m d41 d32 d33 Torque Control Speed limit 1 and Speed limit 2 Refer to H18 Application Defined Control The constant peripheral speed control is available as an application which suppresses an increase in peripheral speed line speed resulting from the increasing radius of the take up roll in a winder system In a winder system e g roving frames wiredrawing machines if the inverter continues to run the motor at a constant speed the take up roll gets bigger with materials roving wire etc and its radius increases so that the winding speed of the take up roll increases Under the application defined control to keep the peripheral speed winding speed constant the inverter detects the winding speed using an encoder and controls the motor rotation according to the encoder feedback E Application Defined Control d41 d41 specifies whether to enable or disable the constant peripheral speed control Data for d41 Function Disable Ordinary control 1 Enable Constant peripheral speed control Note This control is valid only when V f control with speed sensor or Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor is selected with F42 A14 b14 or r14 data 3 or 4 Mechanical configuration of a winder system and function code settings Shown below is a typical mechanical configuration of a winder system for which it is necessary to configure the function codes as listed below Wind
14. T O O a Z e Possible Causes 3 Noises superimposed on the PG wire 17 pg PG wire break What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Appendix A Problem The pulse generator PG wire has been broken somewhere in the circuit Possible Causes 1 The wire between the pulse generator PG and the option card has been broken 2 PG related circuit affected by strong electrical noise 18 er Memory error What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the pulse generator PG is correctly connected to the option card or any wire is broken gt Check whether the PG is connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any joint or connecting part bites the wire sheath gt Replace the wire Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 When writing data especially initializing or copying data
15. 2 23 Wiring for control circuit terminals For VXG350AL 2 VXG400AL 2 and VXG304AL 4E to VXG1370AL 4E 1 As shown in Figure 2 19 route the control circuit wires along the left side panel to the outside of the inverter 2 Secure those wires to the wiring support using a cable tie e g Insulok with 3 8 mm or less in width and 1 5 mm or less in thickness Cable tie Control circuit terminal block Wiring support Wiring for control circuit terminals Details of Section A Wiring for control circuit terminals Figure 2 19 Wiring Route and Fixing Position for the Control Circuit Wires Note Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires with a cable tie inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches A WARNING A Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has
16. 4 After an elapse of t3 0 2 sec time specified by H13 from when SW52 2 is turned ON the inverter harmonizes once the motor that has been freed from the commercial power to the commercial power frequency Then the motor returns to the operation driven by the inverter Inverter Commercial power Inverter operation operation operation p LJ Tamaa i i ISW50 60 E SW52 1 i h SW52 2 ER 4 i i swe oe B i 1 Inverter operation i Inverter drive at commercial power Commercial power frequency speed x eee a a Frequency set by inverter tl 0 2 sec Time specified by H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure t2 0 2 sec Time required for the main circuit to get ready t3 0 2 sec Time specified by H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure Selection of Commercial Power Switching Sequence J22 specifies whether or not to automatically switch to commercial power operation when an inverter alarm occurs Data for J22 Sequence upon occurrence of an alarm a Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm Automatically switch to commercial power operation Cote e The sequence operates normally also even when W352 1 is not used and the main power of the inverter is supplied at all times e Using SW52 1 requires connecting the input terminals RO and T0 for an auxiliary control power Without the connection turning SW52 1 OFF loses also the control po
17. 5 49 F23 Starting Frequency 1 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F24 Holding time 0 00 to 10 00 s F25 Stop Frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz ha The shaded function codes E are applicable to the quick setup The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above Drive control setting to PG PG control 5 53 Code Data setting range Change when Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 to 16 KHz CT mode inverters with 55 kW or below and VT mode ones with 18 5 kW or below 0 75 to 10 kHz CT mode inverters with 75 to 400 kW and VT mode ones with 22 to 55 kW 0 75 to6 kHz CT mode inverters with 500 and 630 kW and VT mode ones with 75 to 500 kW 0 75 to4 kHz VT mode inverters with 630 kW 0 75 to 2 KHz MT mode inverters with 90 to 400 kW F27 Level 0 Inactive Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 F29 Analog Output FM1 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Mode selection 1 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F30 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 F31 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Output frequency 1 before slip compensatio
18. F42 Drive Control Selection 1 E codes C codes O O P codes V f control with slip compensation inactive H codes Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Disable No current limiter works Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC Enable during ACC constant speed operation F44 Level 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated output current of the inverter for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal Overload 0 Braking resistor built in type 1 to 9000 kWs Protection for Braking Resistor OFF Disable Discharging capability F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 99 99 kW F52 Resistance 0 01 to 9990 F80 Switching between CT MT and VT 0 CT Constant Torque mode drive modes 1 VT Variable Torque mode A codes b codes F43 Current Limiter Mode selection r codes N gt O 0 aA 8B WBN O J codes d codes U codes O O y codes 2 MT Medium Torque mode The shaded function codes E7 are applicable to the quick setup 6 O for inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below OFF for those with 11 kW or above 5 4 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Code E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E10 Acceleration Time 2 ET E12 E13 E14 E1
19. If a large vibration or shock exceeding the specified level is applied to the inverter for example due to a carrier running on seam joints of rails or blasting at a construction site the inverter structure gets damaged Halogen compounds such as methyl bromide used in fumigation corrodes some parts inside the inverter Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel with IP6X or air purge mechanism Place the panel in a room free from influence of the gases Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel Place the panel in a room free from influence of the conductive dust Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel that shuts out dust Ensure a maintenance space for periodical cleaning of the heat sink in panel engineering design Employ external cooling when mounting the inverter in a panel for easy maintenance and perform periodical maintenance Put a heating module such as a space heater in the panel Insert shock absorbing materials between the mounting base of the inverter and the panel for safe mounting When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer lumber LVL Paper manufacturing sewage disposal sludge treatment ti
20. ia 5 N bl oO 3 a T ar O oO gt S lt e l sa ee rs Remarks 0 4 VXG1A5 4E 0 75 VXG2A5 4E 1 5 VXG4A 4E 2 1 2 1 3i 2 1 2 2 VXG5 5A 4E 21 D 2 1 2 1 4 0 VXG9A 4E VXGI16A5L 4E G3 1 1 7 3 3 5 3 m VXG23AL 4E i VXG30A5L 4E 8 4 8 4 6 13 3 2 33 6 1 0 N VXG37AL 4E 13 3 13 3 VXG45AL 4E Ww N TR Os oS P 75 C Cu wire Ne VXG60AL 4E 21 2 Oo VXG75AL 4E 2 3 nA aa 630 267 Go N N N N N a a NO NO O w A WD J N 09 Ne Ne oN NO NO Ne VXG91AL 4E gt wz V N 3 E V E cH 0 4 0 75 15 2 2 4 0 18 5 AK nn 33 6 VXG112AL 4E Nn 5 VXGI50AL 4E 53 5 alSlalSlalSlalSlalS a ce e Pah 3 2 s ala S N a N oS Nn Nn 09 09 N N N N S N Nn S N a 7a to Va S TE bo oy 5 53 5 VXG176AL 4E 2 0 4 0 67 4 107 2 VXG210AL 4E 110 Aa NR 1 0x2 53 52 2 VXG253AL 4E 53 5x2 2 0x2 14 re 67 4x2 VXG304AL 4E 160 3 0x2 3 0x2 9 85x2 85x2 VXG377AL 4E 200 4 0x2 250x2 107 2x2 250x2 127x2 127x2 300x2 1522 VXG4I15AL 4E 22 T N Ww N 09 W po oN X 09 x N _ _ ww Ll VXG520AL 4E 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connect
21. lt lt lt Z z Z lt lt a6 Filter time constant 0 62 Pulse count factor 1 1 to 9959 d63 Pulse count factor 2 1 to 9999 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start a Resev oowoo O O njro 469 Reseved 9 foomo v o a70 Speed Control miter o 0010 1000 v v onn a Resev pbo O O o o NV VT d67 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 12 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity 5 for inverters with a capacity of 4 0 kW or below 10 for those with 5 5 kW to 22 kW 20 for those with 30 kW or above U codes Application Functions 3 PG w o w Torque page VA V f PG PG control 5 D Drive control z Refer Code Name Data setting range oc 8 to c2 g 6 U02 Step 1 Frequency speed arrival signal RM Frequency speed detected FDT Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU Torque polarity detected Inverter output limiting B D IOL Auto restarting after momentary power failure Motor overload early warning Keypad operation enabled Inverter ready to run Switch motor drive source between Switch motor drive source between Swi
22. 2 J Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m E Torque limiter Operating conditions H73 H73 specifies whether the torque limiter is enabled or disabled during acceleration deceleration and running at constant speed Data for H73 During accelerating decelerating During running at constant speed Enable m Torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H76 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz H76 specifies the increment limit of the frequency in limiting torque for braking The factory default is 5 0 Hz If the increasing frequency during braking reaches the limit value the torque limiters no longer function resulting in an overvoltage trip Such a problem may be avoided by increasing the setting of H76 The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently Note o ee na they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters nder v r control with with nsor If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters F40 F41 E16 E17 and E61 to E63 the inverter controls the speed regulator s output torque command in speed control or a torque command in torque control in order to limit the motor generating torque To use the torque limiters it is necessary to configure the function codes listed in the table below Vector contro Y Related function
23. 5 27 Table C Motor Parameters Continued FUNCTION CODES onbi0 onausey anousepy snauseyy o osi een too izo err vso osz oost ols aoge oor ad oor Ceci cio c 9o osse oosoi 0c9 e60z moves cool 1868 PoE core 096 6 6z9 01 0 09S 8 6 6108 a a 00s 6 6SS 0000S p690 Lic seer vozi 6ol 6 ZL 9 58 L Z6 E0 1 O OLL Osr 6 66r 00st SL E890 S1r9 ay LOSI 0 09 00v 6 6rr 1 0 00r x 70 1s0 0 tLe gost seer ssu 8 6E EOS 1 sg L601 09 F rae 69 01 07 Z S 9H Lod ssa eza zza iza oza old 8id d 9d eld Zid 80d Lod 90d od zod p vV lw ew l e N 7 o 7 0 0 0 0 o Zam P omul won ez d ooa n AH oe yao eng zieg roon CO aoura y we ae a R O Spou Sunms Iepm mwmed sJapun a a e uoneines uopenyes uonemes UoLeINes uonemes S01 104 dijs wao med p rjdde e D JoJ quand douse IUBE oNsUBePY ONsUseY Ioue pory BUIWION K 5 28 5 2 Details of Function Codes This section provides the details of the function codes The descriptions are in principle arranged in the order of function code groups and in numerical order However highly relevant function codes are collectively described where one of them first appears 5 2 1 Fundamental Functions FOO Data Protection F00 specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital refere
24. 7 Maximum frequency A Current output from the inverter in RMS V Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 7 Motor output torque in Calculated value kW Input power to the inverter PID command feedback amount transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g temperature Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details 7 PID output in as the maximum 14 frequency F03 being at 100 OHz OA OkW 7 Load factor of the motor in as the rated output being at 100 kW Motor output in kW An analog input to the inverter in a format suitable for a desired scale Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details calculated torque current Magnetic flux command value Input watt hour kWh 100 OHz OA OkW 0 z 10x0 kWh Input watt hour Ql 86 E44 LED Monitor Display when stopped E44 specifies whether the specified value data 0 or the output value data 1 to be displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad when the inverter is stopped The monitored item depends on the E48 LED monitor Speed monitor item setting as shown below Data for Moni What to be displayed when the inverter stopped onitored item E48 E44 0 Specified value E44 Output value Output frequency 1 Output frequency before slip compensation a before slip compensation p p Output frequency 2 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation
25. E47 adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E47 0 4s 2 os 4 od 6 7 g 9 10 2 J Ql E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item Refer to E43 E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication SAdOO NOILONNA E50 specifies the coefficient that is used when the load shaft speed or line speed is displayed on the LED monitor Refer to the description of E43 Load shaft speed r min E50 Coefficient for speed indication x Output frequency Hz Line speed m min E50 Coefficient for speed indication x Output frequency Hz Data setting range 0 01 to 200 00 E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data E51 specifies a display coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ 0 in a part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Data setting range 0 000 cancel reset 0 001 to 9999 Note Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated E52 Keypad Menu display mode E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the standard keypad as listed below Ecodes Data for E52 Menu display mode Menus to be displayed a Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and 7 Function code data check mode Menus
26. J02 PID Control Remote command SV J02 sets the source that specifies the command value SV under PID control Keypad Specify the PID command by using the N keys on the keypad PID command 1 Analog input Terminals 12 C1 and V2 Voltage input to the terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC 100 PID command 10 VDC Current input to the terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 100 PID command 20 mA DC Voltage input to the terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC 100 PID command 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN Using the UP or DOWN command in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 with which the command value is transformed to virtual physical value etc you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control Command via communications link Use function code S13 that specifies the communications linked PID command The transmission data of 20000 decimal is equal to 100 maximum frequency of the PID command 1 PID command with the N Q keys on the keypad J02 0 factory default Using the N keys on the keypad in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control in an easy to understand converted command format For details of operation refer to JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 3 3 Setting up frequency and PID commands 2 PID command by analog inputs J02 1
27. O Z B phase advanced B phase delayed O O U m op E Pulse count factor 1 d62 Pulse count factor 2 d63 For the pulse train input function codes d62 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 1 and d63 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 2 define the relationship between the input pulse rate and the frequency command reference Frequency reference f Hz Pulse count factor 2 d63 Pulse train input rate 0 Np kp s Pulse count factor 1 d62 Relationship between the Pulse Train Input Rate and Frequency Command Reference As shown in the figure above enter the pulse train input rate into function code d62 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 1 and enter the frequency reference defined by d62 into d63 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 2 The relationship between the pulse train input rate kp s inputted to the PIN terminal and the frequency reference f Hz or speed command is given by the expression below Pulse count factor 2 d63 Pulse count factor 1 d62 f Hz Np kp s x f Hz Frequency reference Np kp s Input pulse rate In the case of A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference note that the pulse train rate is not the one 4 multiplied 5 34 F02 The pulse train sign forward reverse rotation pulse and A B phase difference define the polarity of the pulse train input Combination of the polarity of the pulse train input a
28. Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value which enables setting an arbitrary initial data to determine a parts or inverter replacement timing Specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor Even when a motor is driven by commercial power not by the inverter it is possible to count the cumulative run time of the motor by detecting the ON OFF state of the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor for switching to the commercial power line To enable this function assign CRUN M1 Commercial power driving status of motor 1 function code data 72 to one of the digital input terminals CNote e H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears however in decimal notation on the keypad e Cumulative motor run time 2 through 4 can also be counted by assigning CRUN M2 through CRUN M4 Commercial power driving status of motor 2 through 4 function code data 73 through 75 E Startup counter for motor 1 H44 H44 counts the number of inverter startups and displays it in hexadecimal format Check the displayed number on the maintenance screen of the keypad and use it as a guide for maintenance timing for parts such as belts To start the counting over again e g after a belt replacement set the H44 data to 0000 2 J Ql E Mainte
29. Y Tuning available unconditionally Y Tuning available conditionally N Tuning not available The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices 3 Tuning Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control Set function code P04 to 3 and press the amp amp key The blinking of 3 on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 75 s The moment a run command is entered the display of 5 lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Next the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 75 s Deceleration time Maximum tuning time Approx 20 to 35 s After the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped The motor is again a
30. d32 d33 Torque control controls the motor generating torque not the speed The speed is determined secondarily by load torque mechanical inertia and other factors To prevent a dangerous situation however the speed limit functions d32 and d33 are provided inside the inverter ee Ifa regenerative load which is not generated usually is generated under droop control or if function codes Note s are incorrectly configured the motor may rotate at an unintended high speed You can specify the overspeed level at any value to protect the mechanical system e Forward overspeed level Maximum frequency 1 F03 x Speed limit 1 d32 x 120 e Reverse overspeed level Maximum frequency 1 F03 x Speed limit 2 d33 x 120 5 103 Cnote Running stopping the motor Under torque control the inverter does not control the speed so it does not perform acceleration or deceleration by soft start and stop acceleration deceleration time at the time of startup and stop Turning ON a run command starts the inverter to run and outputs the commanded torque Turning it OFF stops the inverter so that the motor coasts to a stop At the startup in torque control under the Vector control without speed sensor the starting operation differs depending upon whether auto search is enabled or disabled by d67 as shown below 0 Disable At startup the inverter first starts at zero frequency Then it accelerates 1 Enable At restart after accor
31. ere wre cor icri ose sre zsoz I 66t 00 11 a S600 8771 T ri vezi cin ose res r9 oos zis cop est veer rep sro ferri se 6601 osZ o I soo 006 ossi veer eru siw czs oro coe 983 ser ovi eser oor ws fszu ss Looss lt 9 0 IS0 0 09 OST seel op rss les ost or sro zsz esr TT 69 E NOT a 1900 9z eerl Toz sz8 176 sss ooz osori ro si roe SI 6rzoosI a ozo cco vert coz om cer ses 699 eis Los oszi eez rozi ozi sso 990 TO 6 007 0 S roo oro sezi ssu ssor cos seo ee rog eee oori cet rezi erzi szco seo ro 610010 zoo oro gsi ezi esot oos szo ose ses see oori cet rsti oser iro ezo 900 600o too 9PH LSd Ssd td zzd zd ocd 6ld sid Lid 94 sa zia soa Lod soa oa 20d lt y A 2 samy ouo CAD g aum Aepap opynueul IOJOSDA wu TOWRPT wu 0798F Ey 101983 10138 psopey EC JOE Z108 10138 v v JOJOUL MY OG yoreos ony UOISUd1X9 UOTSIIA1 Xa UOISUJX JO ORJ x TH auno warns Ayoedeo Jejnonied sopun uoneinyes uonermnyes uoneanyes uoneanyes uonernyes pordde O pou Juns i uonemywes uorenqes uonemnws SSO UOJ peoj oN powy INOW D 104 judd IPPUBEWN Meuse NEUE IIUZEN UZE BUILUON 5 syouseyy suse N UZEN 5 onbio
32. gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command ON In 3 wire operation the power to the control printed circuit board control PCB has been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure time or the Enable 3 wire operation signal HOLD has been turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after the power has been restored 8 The motor abnormally heats up Possible Causes 1 Excessive torque boost specified 2 Continuous running in extremely slow speed 3 Overload What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 decreases the output current but does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 Check the running speed of the inverter gt Change the speed setting or replace the motor with a motor exclusively designed for inverters Measure the inverter output current gt Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase 9 The motor does not run as expected Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that function codes are correctly configured and no unnecessary configuration has been done gt Configure all the function co
33. xr x6 xs xe oa oa xr Rev rwo SSRs Bi ff peed wef va Binwy 0 ololotoftofo tofofofo tofolilo LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page 5 D 2 oO QVdAA AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted For details about input commands sent through the communications link refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual and the instruction manual of communication related options as well m Displaying control I O signal terminals on options The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional digital input and output interface cards just like the signal status of the control circuit terminals Table 3 14 lists the assignment of digital I O signals to the LED
34. 15 40 so VXG37AL 4E N 1 5 A WARNING If no zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise a fire could occur 6 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input primary circuit Avoid frequent ON OFF operation of the magnetic contactor MC in the input circuit otherwise the inverter failure may result If frequent start stop of the motor is required use FWD REV terminal signals or the keys on the inverter s keypad The frequency of the MC s ON OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes To assure 10 year or longer service life of the inverter it should not be more than once per hour Ciip From the system s safety point of view it is recommended to employ such a sequence that shuts down the magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals The sequence minimizes the secondary damage even if the inverter breaks When the sequence is employed connecting the MC s primary power line to the inverter s auxiliary control power input makes it possible to mon
35. 2 Trip after decelerate to stop the inverter enters the control sequence of the decelerate to stop when the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level specified by H15 Under the decelerate to stop control the inverter decelerates its output frequency keeping the DC link bus voltage constant using the PI processor P proportional and I integral components of the PI processor are specified by H92 and H93 respectively For normal inverter operation it is not necessary to modify data of H15 H92 or H93 e Continue to run If a momentary power failure occurs when F14 is set to 3 Continue to run the inverter enters the control sequence of the continuous running when the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level specified by H185 Under the continuous running control the inverter continues to run keeping the DC link bus voltage constant using the PI processor P proportional and I integral components of the PI processor are specified by H92 and H93 respectively For normal inverter operation it is not necessary to modify data of H15 H92 or H93 Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage Inverter s output frequency Power supply volage 22 kW or below 30 kW or above 200 V class series 400 V class series Note Even if you select Trip after decelerate to stop or Continue to run the inverter may not be able to do so when the load s inertia is small or the loa
36. 2 oO Shows the rotational direction currently specified f forward z reverse 6_05 Rotational direction Running status as four hexadecimal digits 6_06 Running status Refer to E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3_23 in Section 3 4 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Counter range 0 to 65 535 hours Display Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed alternately Example 0 lt 585h 535 hours 65 lt gt 535h 65 535 hours The lower 3 digits are displayed with hour 6_07 Cumulative run time When the count exceeds 65 535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO Shows the content of the motor startup counter 1 e the number of run commands issued Counter range 0 to 65 530 times Display range 0 to 9999 If the count exceeds 10 000 the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value When the count exceeds 65 530 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit DC link bus voltage Unit V volts Shows the temperature inside the inverter Temperature inside the inverter Unit C Shows the temperature of the heat sink 6 1l Max temperature of heat sink Unit C nit Terminal I O signal status E 12 displayed with the ON OFF of 6_08 No of startups LED segments Shows
37. A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes Code r09 r10 r11 r12 r13 r14 ris r16 r17 r18 r20 r21 r22 r23 r24 r25 r26 r27 r28 r29 r30 r31 r32 r33 r34 r35 r36 r37 r39 r40 r41 r42 Drive control Name Data setting range PG w o w Torque V f_ PG PG control Change when lt N A N E e EE E E EEEE EEE e e e e E E E rr E CEE Braking starting frequency Braking level Braking time Load Selection Variable torque load Ave ae aan iona Constant torque load eal aor Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC Drive Control Selection 4 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor No of poles 2 to 22 poles Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when r39 0 2 3 or 4 N 0 01 to 1000 HP when r39 1 Rated current 0 00 to 2000 A Auto tuning 0 olojo Zz lt N Disable Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency Tune while the motor is rotating
38. Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Note If F01 3 the sum of 12 C1 is enabled the bias and gain are independently applied to each of the voltage and current inputs given to terminals 12 and C1 and the sum of the two values is applied as the reference frequency F18 C50 C32 and C34 Reference frequency F18 C50 C37 and C39 In the case of unipolar input terminal 12 with C35 1 terminal C1 terminal V2 with C45 1 As shown in the graph above the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 can arbitrarily be determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 Cote e The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value F18 e Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C4
39. Category 3 Enable input 9 6 2 EN954 1 European Standard EN954 1 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control systems prescribes the basic safety requirements for machinery categorized according to the requirement level Category 3 represents the requirements that the machinery shall be designed with redundancy so that a single fault does not lead to the loss of the safety function Table 9 3 shows an outline of the category levels and their safety requirements For detailed requirements refer to EN 954 1 Table 9 3 Summary of requirements System behavior Safety related parts of control systems and or their safety The occurrence of a fault can lead to the devices and their components shall be designed loss of the safety function constructed selected assembled and combined in accordance with the relevant standards so that they can withstand the expected influence Requirements of Category B shall apply The occurrence of a fault can lead to the Well tried safety principles and well tried components shall loss of the safety function but the be used probability of occurrence is lower than for Category B 2 Requirements of Category 1 shall apply The occurrence of a fault can lead to the The safety function shall be checked at intervals suitable raat a Ny UTC On Dee ecnniie for the machinery Requirements of Category 1 shall apply When the single fault occurs the safety Safety related parts shall be designed s
40. F codes E codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes Table A Factory Default According to Shipping Destination Shipping destination Function code Name VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series F03 A01 b01 r01 Maximum frequency E31 E36 E54 Frequency detection Level ouo Tz ao Hz F05 A03 b03 r03 Rated voltage at base frequency F06 A04 b04 r04 Maximum output voltage AUN os Table B Factory Defaults Depending upon Inverter Capacity Auto restart after Inverter Torque boost 1 to 4 Auto restart after momentary power failure capacity momentary power failure Inverter Torque boost 1 to 4 F09 A05 b05 105 ae KW F09 A05 b05 r05 e capacity kW 0 4 0 75 e 2 2 4 0 5 5 T S 1 15 18 5 J2 30 37 45 5 25 Table C Motor Parameters The tables given below list the function codes dedicated to motor 1 For motors 2 to 4 replace the function codes with the ones dedicated to the respective motor Three phase 200 V class series for VXGxxx 2E FUNCTION CODES Se 8LC0 9 OCL vcrl 9cl clI LFA L 8S LOL 98 06 cL 99 0 09 8 O CPE OTT jsAoge JO O OI TE OLEO 6 LLT OST O E O SII O rt Ots 0 S9 06L 8 88 IET 08 0 6 06 O C8C 06 6601 93 00 06 el eero 9eee ozrl coer iri or oss 669 ees cle wwe col orc ere exo pee IL 66 F 00 11 90 0 ESF 6 cr roci t I COV 8s TL
41. For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Function Name Function code data Factory ea code VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series Base frequency 1 Motor ratings 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz printed on the nameplate of the F 05 Rated voltage at base motor 200 V class series 400 V class series frequency 1 220 V 400 V 0 Motor characteristics 0 Standard motors 0 Motor characteristics 0 3 Motor characteristics 3 standard motors Standard motors o Capacity of motor connected Nominal applied motor capacity 200 V class series 400 V class series f pa Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Motor 1 selection 07 Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer Deceleration time 1 than your machinery ezn A OE 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly Pedea o Pulse count of the target motor Encoder pulse resolution oe 0400 hex 0400 hex 1024 P R Pulse count factor 1 and the encoder Pulse count factor 2 Encoder speed x d17
42. High Performance Functions 5 99 5 2 6 A codes Motor 2 Parameters b codes Motor 3 Parameters r codes Motor 4 Parameters 00008 5 117 5 2 7 J codes Application Functions 1 5 120 5 2 8 d codes Application Functions 2 5 133 5 2 9 U codes Application functions 3 5 139 5 2 10 y codes Link Functions sicdcncsncieiiedscetscees 5 147 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING cc eeeeees 6 1 6 1 Protective Functions seseina 6 1 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 3 6 3 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor 6 4 6 3 1 Abnormal motor operation cccceeeeeee 6 4 6 3 2 Problems with inverter settings 000000000000 6 9 6 4 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 10 6 5 Ifthe Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED MONITOR 5 t10cseseenenesaarmeapseensanertnetanctenes 6 21 6 6 Ifan Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while Neither an Alarm Code nor Light Alarm Indication a is Displayed ccccccceeeeeees 6 22 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 PA Daily VSP CCUG sisri ranan EEEE Erens 7 1 Toe Pornodic Inspeccion ches osha csersreccsererdsctencedecenticunieantionsts 7 1 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts 0000000000000000 7 2 7 3 1 Judgment on service life scsscscicstscscssdeiciscceenenes
43. Output current 1 second intervals re J Item Bees Switching at approx 1 second intervals Speed detected value p T a i a gt taint List of alarm codes Same as above Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 23 2 5 D 2 oO QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO 3 6 USB Connectivity The keypad has a USB port mini B connector on its face To connect a USB cable open the USB port cover as shown below USS pon cover ae Connecting the inverter to a PC with a USB cable enables remote control from IMO Loader On the PC running IMO Loader it is possible to edit check manage and monitor the function code data in real time to start or stop the inverter and to monitor the running or alarm status of the inverter For the instructions on how to use the IMO Loader refer to the IMO Loader Instruction Manual In addition using the keypad as a temporary storage media allows you to store the running status information in the keypad detach the keypad from the inverter connect it to a PC running IMO Loader at an office or off site place For details on how to store data into the keypad refer to Section 3 4 8 Copying data 3 24 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Test run procedure Make a test run of the motor using the flowchart given below This chapter describes the test run procedure with
44. Peco cure oo o im Max Operation ON level A to voltage OFF level 27 V a Dawa Leakage current at OFF Figure 2 16 Transistor Output Circuit mete 2 17 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC YSALYSAN I AHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode Transistor Note across relay s coil terminals output 4 When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 100 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case Transistor output Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM and 11 s common ip E Connecting programmable logic controller PLC to terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 Figure 2 17 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the output Programmable logic controller lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt 4 ie logic controller Photocoupler Current Photocoupler Current PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 17 Connecting PLC to Control Circu
45. Protection for Motor 3 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan b07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor b08 Thermal time constant b09 DC Braking 3 Braking starting frequency b10 Braking level b11 b05 lt PERRE EE EE E E e e e E E E E E E EE lt E e E a e a a e E E e ee ee eee ee ee E E E oO N ep ied y J O Q G Co gt O lt oo oO O mbr O O O L N b13 Load Selection Variable torque load Ae a AN ee Constant torque load el an ere Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC b14 Drive Control Selection 3 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor b15 Motor 3 No of poles 2 to 22 poles b16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when b39 0 2 3 or 4 N 0 01 to 1000 HP when b39 1 0 00 to 2000 A 0 Disable 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated
46. action An operation in which the change rate of the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I action which outputs the MV that integrates the deviation Therefore I action is effective in bringing the feedback amount close to the commanded value For the system whose deviation rapidly changes however this action cannot make it react quickly SAdOO NOILONNA The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter that is J04 data The longer the integral time the slower the response The reaction to the external disturbance also becomes slow The shorter the integral time the faster the response Setting too short integral time however makes the inverter output tend to oscillate against the external disturbance Deviation Time MV Time mE D differential time J05 Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 s 0 00 means that the differential component is ineffective JOS specifies the differential time for the PID processor D Differential action An operation in which the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the differential value of the deviation is called D action which outputs the MV that differentiates the deviation D action makes the inverter quickly react to a rapid change of deviation The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter that is JOS data Setting a long differential time will quic
47. after slip compensation Reference frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency Reference motor speed Load shaft speed Reference load shaft speed Load shaft speed Display speed Reference display speed Display Speed E45 LCD Monitor Item selection E45 specifies the LCD monitor display mode to be applied when the inverter using the multi function keypad is in Running mode Data for E45 Function a Running status rotational direction and operation guide Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque Example of display for E45 0 during running LED monitor indicators Hz A V r min m min kw X10 min sec PID Running status Rotational direction Operation guide lt 4 FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND Indicators for running status and source of operation Example of display for E45 1 during running Hz A v Yo r min m min kW X10 min sec PID mm l mz i Bar charts Output frequency Output current Calculated torque FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND Full scale values on bar charts Item displayed Full scale Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 Inverter rated current x 200 Calculated torque Motor rated torque x 200 5 87 E46 LCD Monitor Language selection E46 specifies the language to display on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E46 Language OP KP LCD TS Spans English E47 LCD Monitor Contrast control
48. are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Use crimp terminals covered with an insulation sheath or with an insulation tube The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using a single HIV wire JIS C3317 for 75 C at a surrounding temperature of 50 C Table 2 5 Screw Specifications Inverter type Screw specifications Auxiliary control Auxiliary fan Main circuit power input power input Grounding terminals terminals terminals terminals Three phase Three phase Refer to RO TO Ri Ti 200 V 400 V Toh Toh 7 Thien TR ightening Garen ightening STEE Tightening Sata Tightening a torque sige torque os torque ae torque N E ES m E m N m VXG3A 2 VXGIA5 4E Figure A M3 5 2 fms 5 VXGSA 2 VXG2A5 4E VXG8A 2 VXG4A 4E VXGIIA 2 VXG5 5A 4E Figure B VXGI8A 2 VXG9A 4E VXG30AL 2 VXGI6A5L 4E VXG46AL 2 VXG23AL 4E Figure C 3 3 M5 VXGS9AL 2 VXG30A5L 4E VXG74AL 2 VXG37AL 4E Figure D M4 r M4 VXG88AL 2 VXG45AL 4E VXGIISAL 2 VXG60AL 4E oa 1AL 4E VXGI146AL 2 oa DALE Figure E VXGIS0AL 4E 1 VXG150AL 4E OAL 4E VXGI80AL 2 M8 NER 2 VXGI76AL 4E Figure F VXG283AL 2__ 27 o i vona Figure G Yess RGAE VXG377AL 4E ce 48 M10 VXG415AL 4E VXG400AL 2 Figure I VXG520AL 4E VXG650AL 4E M12 Figure J VXG740AL 4E VXG840AL4E ok VXG960AL 4E wad VXGUT0AL 4E VXGI370AL 4E 87S AWARNINGA When the inverter power is ON a high voltage
49. hold PID integral component select local keypad operation protect the motor from dew condensation enable internal sequence to commercial lines pulse train input pulse train sign cancel constant peripheral speed control hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory switch to commercial power operation select droop control servo lock command cancel PG alarm cancel customizable logic clear all customizable logic timers Inverter running frequency arrival signal 1 3 frequency detected 3 points undervoltage detected inverter stopped torque polarity detected inverter output limiting auto restarting after momentary power failure motor overload early warning keypad operation inverter ready to run switch motor power between commercial line and inverter output inverter input output commercial power select the AX terminal function primary side MC inverter output limiting with delay cooling fan in operation auto resetting universal DO heat sink overheat early warning service lifetime alarm reference loss detected inverter output on overload prevention control current detected 3 points low level current detected PID alarm under PID control PID control stopped due to slow flowrate low output torque detected torque detected 2 points switched to motor 1 to 4 run forward signal run reverse signal inverter in remote operation PTC status detection enabled brake signal analog frequency reference
50. i BX ON i COM mere Iines faguengy Motor speed ER Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 Inverter s reference frequency Inverter s output J QO J D Ql Inverter starts at commercial line frequency e When the motor speed decreases significantly during coast to stop with the current limiter activated Switch to commercial i power 50 Hz SW50 1 ON FWD FWD ON Coast to a stop ON i BX r Commercial line s frequency SAdO9 NOILONNA Motor speed t i Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 we eee el eee Pea Se Inverter s e p reference outpu frequency i frequency Inverter starts at commercial line frequency e Secure more than 0 1 second after turning ON the Switch to commercial power signal before turning ON a Chote run command e Secure more than 0 2 second of an overlapping period with both the Switch to commercial power signal and run command being ON e If an alarm has been issued or BX has been ON when the motor drive source is switched from the commercial power to the inverter the inverter will not be started at the commercial power frequency and will remain OFF After the alarm has been reset or BX turned OFF operation at the frequency of the commercial power will not be continued and the inverter will be started at the ordinary starting frequency If you wish to switch the moto
51. the equipment is possible 9 126 For the pressurization control see the chart below Output frequency A Pressurization starting frequency J08 Restart frequency slow flowrate level Bp Pressurizing t stop latency J16 PID output MV A time JO3 Starting frequency J1 Sr ot Stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 by Hold gt t A Run command ON f oO gt PID STP signal ON ZZ J10 PID Control Anti reset windup J10 suppresses overshoot in control with the PID processor As long as the deviation between the feedback and the PID command is beyond the preset range the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration operation Data setting range 0 to 200 PID feedback PV In this range integration does not take place PID command set value SV In this range integration takes place In this range integration does not take place Time J11 to J13 PID Control Select alarm output Upper level alarm AH and Lower level alarm AL The inverter can output two types of alarm signals absolute value and deviation alarms associated with PID control if the digital output signal PID ALM is assigned to any of the programmable output terminals with any of E20 through E24 and E27 data 42 J11 specifies the alarm output types J12 and J13 specify the upper and lower limits for alarms E Select alarm output J11 J11 specifies one of the following a
52. the power failure occurred for general loads Restart at the starting frequency As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm u and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm lu The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm 7u is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure decelerate to shop control is invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm 7u is issued As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Even if the F14 data is set to 3 the Continue to run function is disabled If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the motor speed detect
53. 00 s for those with 30 kW or above 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 8 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See the table under E Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Voltage in the description of F04 NOOB WN CO D serach Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range L setting 5 vi w o Flies nen 6 a PG control H61 UP DOWN Control 0 00 Hz 5 29 Initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing the run 5 109 command H63 Low Limiter Mode selection 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to 5 49 run 5 109 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR oe voltage for act V glans series H68 Slip Compensation 1 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or Operating conditions above Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above H69 Automatic Deceleration Disable Mode selection 2 Torque limit control with Force to stop if actual
54. 10 to ensure simultaneity 2 Logical operations are performed in the order of steps 1 to 10 3 If an output of a particular step applies to an input at the next step the output of the step having processing priority can be used in the same processing 4 The customizable logic updates all of the five output signals at the same time 2 ms cycle Latch Logical operations ane gnals Latch input signals Step 1 gt 2 gt 3 10 simultaneously input signals When configuring a logic circuit take into account the processing order of the customizable logic Otherwise a delay in processing of logical operation leads to a signal delay problem resulting in no expected output slow processing or a hazard signal issued ACAUTION Ensure safety before modifying customizable logic related function code settings U codes and related function codes or turning ON the Cancel customizable logic terminal command CLC Depending upon the settings such modification or cancellation of the customizable logic may change the operation sequence to cause a sudden motor start or an unexpected motor operation An accident or injuries could occur E Customizable logic timer monitor Step selection U91 The contents of the timer in a customizable logic can be monitored using the monitor related function code or the keypad Selecting a timer to be monitored 1 to 10 Specifies the step number whose timer or counter is to be monitored Monit
55. 12 and the figure below each of segments a to dp on LED1 and LED2 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 to X7 is closed it goes OFF when it is open Each of segments a to e on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 and terminal CMY or between terminals YS5A and Y5C is closed respectively it goes OFF when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C and lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and goes OFF when it is open Gi p If all terminal signals are OFF open segments g on all of LED1 to LED4 will light Table 3 12 Segment Display for External Signal Information o ome ew o wo C gt i ew E y oeo vey E d LED4 LED3 LED2 LEDI TEE EEE Lil A Ca vec w e oeo o e a o o S o S o a ef ys Co Pers xe No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 13 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits 0 to each On the JAGUAR VXG digital input terminals FWD and REV are assig
56. 2 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place CTip Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment E Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz or 60 Hz SW50 and SW60 Function code data 15 and 16 When an external sequence switches the motor drive power from the commercial line to the inverter inputting the terminal command SW50 or SW60 at the specified timing enables the inverter to start running the motor with the current commercial power frequency regardless of settings of the reference output frequency in the inverter A running motor driven by commercial power is carried on into inverter operation This command helps you smoothly switch the motor drive power source when the motor is being driven by commercial power from the commercial power to the inverter power For details refer to the following table the operation schemes and an example of external circuit and its operation time scheme on the following pages ae Do not tly assien both SW50 and SW60 n ncurren ien SW60 Starts at 60 Hz o not concurrently assign bo a 5 69 Operation Schemes e When the motor speed remains almost the same during coast to stop gt 0 15s 20 25 Bete Switch to commercial voa i power 50 Hz SW50 ion FWD 2 Coast to a stop
57. 2 1 2 1 21 1 VXGI1A 2 15 9 1 8 10 10 1 12 12 it iia 5 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 8 75 5 8 4 m 8 VXG46AL 2 A 8 4 o a 3 5 6 3 3 13 3 VXG59AL 2 m 4 6 3 21 2 33 VXG74AL 2 26 7 21 2 l 3 3 4 175 150 a 513 42 4 26 7 26 7 21 2 VXG88AL 2 33 6 33 6 26 7 E m 33 6 33 6 26 7 a VXG115AL 2 i 2 0 33 6 2 67 4 42 4 TaN 1 2 250 200 119 4 VXGI146AL 2 13 5 a 1 0 53 5 350 250 85 33 5 VXG180AL 2 400 300 n x 107 2 3 4 0 2 VXG215AL 2 107 2 3 2 0x2 D 67 4x2 3 0x2 85x2 4 0x2 107 2x2 300x2 1522 14 2 1 VXG283AL 2 VXG350AL 2 3 0x2 85x2 4 0x2 107 2x2 300x2 152x2 za 50 350 500 l 2 400 424 7 48 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 The wire size of UL Open Type and Enclosed Type are common Please contact us if UL Open Type exclusive wire is necessary VXG400AL 2 110 R a 4 CIN Tied 35 on N r Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION Required torque lb in Wire size AWG mm N m Main terminal Aux control power supply L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter type Class J fuse size A oO oN isc gt P or or N rl oO z aS Nominal applied motor Aux Fan power supply Aux fan power supply
58. 5 Set priority flip flop General purpose timer Flip flop Previous OFF OFF Hold previous General purpose timer OFF value 6 Reset priority flip flop General purpose timer Input 1 elp iop Output 7 Rising edge detection 8 Falling edge detection 9 Both edges detection Rising edge detection General purpose timer i i i Both edges detection General purpose timer A Le ety B Input 2 Input 2 10 Hold 11 Increment counter 12 Decrement counter General purpose timer Increment counter Decrement counter 0 5 Loe Output Clear counter Initialize the counter 13 Timer with reset input OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF Input 1 OFF ON OFF Output Timer e Timer period 5 143 E General purpose timer U04 etc The table below lists the general purpose timers available Co Nome O SSS 1 On delay timer Turning an input signal ON starts the on delay timer When the period specified by the timer has elapsed an output signal turns ON Turning the input signal OFF turns the output signal OFF Off delay timer Turning an input signal ON turns an output signal ON Turning the input signal OFF starts the off delay timer When the period specified by the timer has elapsed the output signal turns OFF Ea Pulses 1 shot Turning an input signal ON issues a one shot pulse whose length is specified by the timer Retriggerable timer Turning an input signal ON issues a one sh
59. 6 01 2J ltem Error sub code Switching at approx 1 second intervals z O_O i Li sen uoo Figure 3 5 Menu Transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the G and V keys to display Alarm Information 6a D 3 Press the G9 key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g O In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the C or key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed beginning with the most recent one in the order of Z 2 3 and 4 5 Press the amp key with an alarm code being displayed The item number e g 6_00 and the inverter status information e g Output frequency at the time of the alarm occurrence alternately appear at approx 1 second intervals Pressing the N and keys displays other item numbers e g 6_0 and the status information e g Output current for that alarm code 6 Press the amp key to return to the list of alarm codes Press the amp key again to return to the menu 3 18 Table 3 16 Display Items in Alarm Information LED monitor shows Item Description item No 2 5 D
60. 8 C8 C6 SSS 00 C 9L 95 S S I 61791 0 T CECO Ce v 8rl ATA YII VIP 8 IS 9 C9 ELL 88 or L EEC ike 6C SLO 6P T OF C40 ccoo z900 v8 toc O I Cty Svs 6 99 6 I8 L 68 09 C Eee 60 STI co 6 0 91 070 y Coa Sed Pace uu 1079 ua 101985 wa 10194 a Ao ae oe oe aa y Vv wy MA pow Jem nwed spun 0150314x UOISU3 X9 00180391X Yorermes uorjemnges uonemyes uonernyes uonernjes 2018 digs X Lae ee y padde eee BUIVIEIS IO quanno foo ee JOHEINIES onousey oyausey onduen onouseypy onousepy ERE rel Pey PEoTON Peta BUTWION TOW onbio J Suse IIUZEN IYJIUZEN 5 26 Table C Motor Parameters Continued ae 09S1 8601 260 ico sser oso sooe orif or aroge oor soel 8 EL6 ect Lio ewn ero 89 orzor oe9 e6oLoooe9 sa 19t ozo covet eso 6116 09S 6679 01 009s 86 6 TLL ost sro esii sro LOSZ F118 00S 6655 00 005 t690 9569 seet vozi gosg Lz sl eTo ez sro 6rL Osh 6 66r 0 00st x 1680 8 8bS owi ero ossi o 69er Eros sce 666 0 0 SSE Z980 698 ist sro 9sst 820 Sp7l E EOS SIE 6PSE NOSTE S S 6850 8zEr Ti tso sgi ci ice Lope osz erieoroosz o s ILS0 sose ser zzzi soo sa ors ze cet vso ogzi oft ozis rior OSZ 66LT 1 0 0SZ m oso rore eosi ssu rog ree sci sso srei ori ore ozse Ozz 6 6rZ
61. Based on the rated Based on the rated current level for current level for MT mode VT mode 150 for 1 min 200 for 3 s 120 for 1 min 150 for 1 min 2 F Ql SAdOO NOILONNA In the MT VT mode a value out of the range if specified automatically changes to the maximum value allowable in the MT VT mode Switching the drive mode between CT MT and VT with function code F80 automatically initializes the F44 data to the value specified at left In the MT VT mode if the maximum frequency exceeds 120 Hz the actual output frequency is internally limited to 120 Hz Switching to the VT mode does not automatically change the motor rated capacity P02 to the one for the motor with one size higher capacity so configure the P02 data to match the applied motor rating as required 5 66 5 2 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions E01 to E07 Terminal X1 to X7 Function E98 Terminal FWD Function E99 Terminal REV Function Function codes E01 to E07 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON The de
62. Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum Models VXG rated for 400V class input Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer All circuits with terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T RO TO R1 T1 must have a common disconnect and be connected to the same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are connected to the power supply MCCB Disconnect or Mc ROD ELCB etc Power supply Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION 7 Install UL certified fuses or circuit breaker between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Required torque lb in Wire size AWG mm N m 60 50 VXG30AL 2 ol 5 3 A a R 2 S Inverter type E E z z a g m 81 E a eB g 2 2 2 a 2 E s z e Bye 2 F 8B amp aJ Yl si s s e 5 6 2 O 5 a 8 S z 2 2 21 P lP P el els S a N N sj z lt O O lt VXG3A 2 io 5 106 0 75 VXGSA 2 1 2 4 14 4 14 VXG8A 2
63. C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR a Option Applicable safety Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type n Goolngmethod O Famos OoOO SSS Weight Mass SS 70 TOG o HY a 2 43 a 105 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 To use the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3 kHz or more at the surrounding temperature of 40 C or higher manage the load so that the current comes to be within the rated ones enclosed in parentheses in continuous running Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V ratings Input power E Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in VT mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters 8 1 2 oe SNOILVOlsIOAdS Three phase 400 V class series CT High Duty mode inverters for heavy load 0 4 to 75 kW P tem OE Specifications ____ VXG
64. CM and the run reverse switch between REV and CM 4 To start running the inverter rotate the potentiometer to give a voltage to terminal 12 and then turn the run forward or reverse switch ON short circuit For precautions in wiring refer to Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER 4 17 2 F es P YOLOW JHL ONINNOAY Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the JAGUAR VXG series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter 1s an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into 13 groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Motor 1 Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Motor 2 3 and 4 Parameters A b and r codes Application Functions 1 2 and 3 J d and U codes Link Functions y codes and Option Functions o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on the following pages E Changing validating
65. Customizable Logic Step 2 Customizable Logic Step 3 Customizable Logic Step 4 Customizable Logic Step 5 Logic circuit Type of timer Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer 2008 3008 2009 3009 2010 3010 Terminal X1 input signal Terminal X2 input signal Terminal X3 input signal 4001 5001 During deceleration 6005 7005 6006 7006 6007 7007 Data setting range Output of step 8 Output of step 9 Output of step 10 Terminal X4 input signal Terminal X5 input signal Terminal X6 input signal 4007 5007 4010 5010 4011 5011 6000 7000 6001 7001 Final REV run command During acceleration Terminal X7 input signal Terminal FWD input signal Terminal REV input signal Final run command Final FWD run command FL_RUN FL_FWD FL_REV DACC DDEC REGA DR_REF ALM_ACT Under anti regenerative control Within dancer reference position Alarm factor presence Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic output to a terminal True if OFF 22 oo a e eS SS timer No function assigned Through output General purpose
66. Digital input terminal commands Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that Forward rotation this run command enables only the forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotational direction Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that Reverse rotation this run command enables only the reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotational direction e When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively e When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed e When changing terminal command assignments to terminals FWD and REV from commands other than the FWD and REV to the FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate 3 wire operation with external input signals digital input terminal commands The default setting of the FWD and REV are 2 wire Assigning the terminal command HLD self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the HLD assigned terminal and CM 1 e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV at its rising edge Turning the HLD OFF releases the self holding When no HLD is assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect LL For details about HLD refer to E01 to E07 data 6 5
67. During accelerating decelerating During running at constant speed _ The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently Note rae ane they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters F42 Drive Control Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 specifies the motor drive control V f control with slip compensation inactive Frequency control Dynamic torque vector control Disable J Ql with slip compensation and auto torque boost Frequency control with slip compensation V f control with slip compensation active V f control pe V f control with speed sensor Frequency control Enable with automatic speed Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor regulator ASR Vector control without speed sensor Estimated speed Speed control Vector control with automatic speed Vector control with speed sensor Enable regulator ASR m V f control with slip compensation inactive SAdO9 NOILONNA Under this control the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip compensation so no unpredictable output fluctuation enabling stable operation with constant output frequency E V f control with slip compensation active Appl
68. FREITZ BARRERA AH BE Ria HR PAR AFAGSE mE PHL Raa ATA RS FF BATE H eSB A CTA Ta th aT MET eM ES TM RRR RASTA BA ha WERE A 4 alti BOSSA SES ROA So ORS ee eo cote ST EL eld Beeld e e320 t Aaa BL ae loa bee Fp SISA LEO REELT POTD T Ee F0 iA Be ROTO RT a H LeRLEL o e AREL CIAT DE PAEKAN Reo TE MOME OS BYR fa PSSA SRE CREAR CMICSe Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details b VXG520AL 4E Figure 1 3 Warning Plates and Label 1 2 ins AES rr TE terminal block aI S Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block AA AY V EAP fz i D e yE Hh oe SS Re Be eae yy A Ei Br A WARNING Front cover Sub nameplate A RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK AS A A n BE SI ite fk FB 2 a Q EN dJLHYJANI 3HL NISN 3440444 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1 3 1 Precautions in introducing inverters This section provides precautions in introducing inverters e g precautions for installation environment power supply lines wiring and connection to peripheral equipment Be sure to observe those precautions E Installation environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 in Chapter 2 IMO strongly recommends installing inverters in a panel for safety reasons in particular when
69. If the cabling between the inverter and the motor is long generally 20 m or longer or a reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter however the apparent motor parameters are different from the actual ones so auto tuning or other adjustments are necessary For the auto tuning procedure refer to Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR When using a motor made by other manufacturers or a non standard motor obtain the datasheet of the motor and specify the motor parameters manually or perform auto tuning To specify the motor parameters correctly select the motor type with P99 Motor 1 Selection specify the motor rated capacity with P02 and then initialize the motor parameters with H03 This procedure also applies when the inverter is switched to the MT VT mode and a motor with one rank higher capacity is used When switching the motor between the Ist to 4th motors specify the corresponding function codes Refer to the description of A42 The motor parameters to be specified in P13 through P56 such as iron loss factors and magnetic saturation factors are usually not shown on the motor nameplate or in the test report If auto tuning P04 2 or 3 is not performed it is not necessary to change the motor parameters from the ones for a standard motor P01 Motor 1 No of poles POI specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED
70. LALM signal turns OFF If not e g DC fan lock the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking and the LALM signal remains ON 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 4 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode shows Ani r Section Eg Quick Setup Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation F codes Fundamental functions f Extension terminal functions T H codes ai High performance functions Selecting each of these l Ola A CoO Molor 2 Parameters function codes enables its data ni T a b codes Motor 3 parameters to be displayed changed _ O O r codes Motor 4 parameters Ca J codes Application functions 1 5 D 2 oO Data Setting QVdAA AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO d codes Application functions 2 U codes Application functions 3 y codes Link functions Mala heels ee Displays only function codes tha
71. O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 11 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 4 QVdAA AHL NISN NOILvVH3dO List of I O check items I O data 7 q By LED segment ON OFF LIL I O status in binary format Input status in hex format Output status in hex format By LED segment ON OFF I O status in binary format Input status in hex format ria LiLiLiti 24 Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking 3 11 Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display I O Checking 47_o 3 Press the G3 key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g 4_00 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired I O check item then press the 9 key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 4 00 or 4 01 using the W and keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 12 and hexadecimal display for I O signal st
72. P04 1 or Tuning with the motor running P04 2 For the latter tuning adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery P04 Select under the Tuning type Motor parameters subjected to tuning followinsiconanions Primary resistance R1 P07 haa Leakage reactance X P08 Tuning with the motor saps Rated slip frequency P12 stopped X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X No load current P06 with the motor stopped Can rotate the motor Cannot rotate the motor l Primary resistance R1 P07 Tuning the no load current Provided that it is safe pei Leakage reactance X P08 and magnetic saturation Note that little load the motor is rotating under V f control Rated slip frequency P12 factor with the motor should be applied Magnetic saturation factors to 5 running at 50 of the base during tuning Tuning Magnetic saturation extension factors frequency with load applied a to c P16 to P23 Tuning the rated slip decreases the tuning X correction factor and 2 P53 and P54 frequency with the motor accuracy stopped The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparat
73. Refer to Section 3 4 4 Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the G key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display Maintenance Information Sche 3 Press the G amp key to proceed to the list of maintenance items e g 5_00 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the amp 9 key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of maintenance items Press the amp key again to return to the menu 3 14 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad consists of a four digit LED monitor six keys and five LED indicators LED monitor The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor NN monitor the running status specify the function code data and monitor I O signal states maintenance segment LED indicators UP key j i j Q information and alarm information _ Pewee mt Program a I O 7 RUN ke Reset key E tag y Function a STOP key Data key N USB port DOWN key Cote When using a multi function keypad instead of a remote keypad read the Multi function Keyp
74. Section 4 1 9 Shorter quiput lines Function code basic settings lt 1 gt see Section 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 2 gt See Section 4 1 7 See Section 4 1 11 See Section 4 1 8 Run the inverter for operation check Gradually accelerating from low to high speed See Section 4 1 12 Adjust motor contral functian coda data Set up application ralated function codes See Section 4 7 13 Check interfacing operations with peripherals End Proceed to practical aperatian Figure 4 1 Test Run Procedure 4 1 2 Checking prior to powering on Check the following before powering on the inverter 1 Check that the wiring is correct Especially check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T and output terminals U V and W Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals GG correctly See Figure 4 2 A WARNING e Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so and turning the power ON breaks the inverter e Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise an electric shock could occur 2 Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults OQ F D ies iN YOLOW AHL ONINNOAY 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws Inverter 4 Check tha
75. Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 oni a i Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting a keypad a communications link ia the terminals DX DX and SD on the control PCB Fieldbus option Via fieldbus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP Command sources specified by H30 Communications link function Mode selection C o o meoo O menre 1 S 485 communications ink pom 1 Inverter iseit E0 2 f nenesot RS 485 communications Tink pot 3 RS 485 communications Tink port 1 RS 485 communications link port 1 4 R485 communications link port 2 Inverter itself E02 _ s_____ RS 485 communications link port 2 RS 485 communications Tink pot 1 6 nverteritselF FO C30 RS 485 communications Tink port2 8 RS 485 communications link port 2 RS 485 communications link port2 Command sources specified by y98 Bus link function Mode selection 0 Follow H30data Follow B30data o Combination of command sources Frequency command Via RS 485 Via RS 485 ae ms Via fieldbus Inverter itself communications communications option link port 1 link port 2 p arek Inverteritselt Inverteritselt H30 0 H30 1 H30 4 H30 0 1 or 4 y98 0 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications H30 2 H30 3 H30 5 H30 2 3 or 5 link port 1 y98 0 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 Via RS 485 communicatio
76. When any analog input voltage input to terminals 12 and V2 or current input to terminal C1 for PID command 1 J02 1 is used it is possible to arbitrary specify the PID command by multiplying the gain and adding the bias The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted In addition to J02 setting it is necessary to select PID command 1 for analog input specified by any of E61 to E63 function code data 3 For details refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63 Adjustable elements of PID command oni Bias Gan Filter ti npu iulter time terminal Input range Bias Base Gain oe Polarity constant Offset point point Tapa le gt es a Dares es ae Deo ow os ce ca m Offset C31 C36 C41 C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment E Filter time constant C33 C38 C43 C33 C38 and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input Choose appropriate values for the time constants considering the response speed of the mechanical system as large time constants slow down the response If the input voltage fluctuates because of noise specify large time constants m Polarity C35 C45 C35 and C45 specify the input range for analog input voltage Data for C35 and C45 Terminal input specifications 0 to 10 V negative value of voltage i
77. a RRR OO l fx xf KIKI lt N N factor c Motor 4 Selection Motor characteristics 0 Standard motors Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 2 Not used Motor characteristics 3 Not used Other motors Slip Compensation 4 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above Operating conditions 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Gain for Motor 4 Motor Parameter Switching 4 0 Motor Switch to the 4th motor Mode selection 1 Parameter Switch to particular r codes lt A E E TT a A AT T A a T T Ec 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C Refer to page 5 117 Drive control Refer Data setting range to be w o Torque page O J Ss Q r43 Speed Control 4 Speed command filter Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 S P Gain Integral time Output filter Notch filter resonance frequency Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB Cumulative Motor Run Time 4 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of 10 hours Startup Counter for Motor 4 Indication of cumulative startup count 0000 to FFFF hex Motor 4 X c
78. and V2 to be used for bipolar input 10 V to 10 V respectively When both F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point are set to 0 the negative and positive voltage inputs produce reference frequencies symmetric about the origin point as shown below Reference frequency Point Boo a Terminal 12 input Gain 10 V Terminal V2 input base point C34 Note Configuring F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point to specify an arbitrary value Points Al A2 and A3 gives the bias as shown below Reference frequency Terminal 12 input 10V 40y Terminal V2 input Point As Note A reference frequency can be specified not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items depending on the setting of function code E48 3 to 5 or 7 3 Using digital input signals UP DOWN F01 7 When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the terminal command UP or DOWN ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below To enable the UP DOWN control for frequency setting it is necessary to set FO1 data to 7 and assign the UP and DOWN commands to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV with any of E01 to E07 data 17 or 18 DOWN Function Keep the current output frequency Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently speci
79. any of E20 through E24 and E27 data 44 enables the signal to output when the inverter stops due to the slow flowrate stopping function under PID control For the slow flowrate stopping function see the chart below Output frequency l Preset deceleration Preset acceleration five time Restart frequency Slow flowrate level MV increases stop latency J16 again as pressure decreases PID output MV EE aaa aa fa DE EE i E E E s AE EE EE a E EAE EE E Feedback value ii Pressure inside pipe Paa OE E o een eee eee te ae Ao pp ee Pressure starts decreasing when the faucet is opened Pressure increases as the inverter resumes operation Run command ON PID STP signal Specifying J08 Pressurization starting frequency and J09 Pressurizing time enables pressurization control when the frequency drops below the level specified by J15 Stop frequency for slow flowrate for the period specified by J16 During the pressurization the PID control is in the hold state Pressurization before slow flowrate stopping J08 and JO9 This function prolongs the stopping time of equipment with a bladder tank by pressurizing immediately before the frequency drops below the level at which the inverter stops the motor thus enabling energy saving operation Because the pressurization starting frequency JO8 can be specified with a parameter pressurization setting suitable for
80. any problem arises understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in Sections 6 2 and onwards for troubleshooting Protective function Description Related function code This function detects an abnormal state displays the corresponding alarm code and causes the inverter to trip The heavy alarm codes are check marked in the Heavy alarm object column in Table 6 1 For details of each alarm code see the sd Heavy alarm detection corresponding item in the troubleshooting The inverter retains the last four alarm codes and their factors together with their running information applied when the alarm occurred so it can display them This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a light alarm displays l al and lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping It is possible to define which abnormal states should be categorized as a light Light alarm detection alarm using function codes H81 and H82 The light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 1 For how to check and release light alarms see Section 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor When the output current exceeds the current limiter level F44 during Stall prevention acceleration deceleration or constant speed running this function decreases the output frequency to avoid an overcurrent trip Overload prevention Before the inv
81. arrow in Figure 2 22 When mounting it put the keypad back into place in the reverse order of removal Figure 2 22 Removing a Keypad 2 26 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad consists of a four digit LED monitor six keys and five LED indicators LED monitor The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor NN monitor the running status specify the function code data and monitor I O signal states maintenance segment LED indicators UP key j i j Q information and alarm information _ Pewee mt Program a I O 7 RUN ke Reset key E tag y Function a STOP key Data key N USB port DOWN key Cote When using a multi function keypad instead of a remote keypad read the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Item LED Monitor Keys Functions and LED Indicators Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes E In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency current LED nn and voltage Monitor When a light alarm occurs a is displayed E In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data E In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor when the protective
82. as listed below P Initial frequency for UP DOWN control Frequency command source Switching command zA aA Other than UP DOWN Select frequency Reference frequency given by the frequency F01 C30 command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 command source used just before switching PID control Cancel PID control Hz PID Reference frequency given by PID control PID controller output Select multi frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency at Multi frequency SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 given by the frequency the time of previous E T conn estou tak command source used UP DOWN control via RS 485 or fieldbus LE _ St before switchine 4 Using pulse train input F01 12 mM Selecting the pulse train input format d59 A pulse train in the format selected by the function code d59 can give a frequency command to the inverter Three types of formats are available the pulse train sign pulse train input the forward rotation pulse reverse rotation pulse and the A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference If no optional PG interface card is mounted the inverter ignores the setting of the function code d59 and accepts only the pulse train sign pulse train input The table below lists pulse train formats and their operations Pulse train input format Gace ETRE en selected by d59 P 0 Pulse train sign Frequency speed command according to the pulse train rate is given to the inverter Pulse train input The pulse train sign specifies the polarity of t
83. at the stop of the inverter Based on acceleration time Speed Stop frequency 1 Holding time Starting frequency 1 F39 Holding time Starting Vig Stop frequency frequency 1 CT F25 F23 N VW Time 0 5 51 E Starting Frequency 1 F23 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter E Starting Frequency 1 Holding time F24 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 E Stop Frequency F25 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter E Stop Frequency Holding time F39 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency mM Zero Speed Control d24 To enable zero speed control under vector control with speed sensor it is necessary to set the speed command frequency command at below the starting and stop frequencies If the starting and stop frequencies are 0 0 Hz however the zero speed control is enabled only when the speed command is 0 00 Hz d24 specifies the operation for the zero speed control at the startup of the inverter Even setting the speed command at below the starting and stop frequencies and turning a run command ON does not enable the zero Not allowed at startup speed control To enable the zero speed control set the speed command at above the starting frequency and then start up the inve
84. be assigned to this terminal dJLHJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW 3 Hardware specifications e Input impedance 250Q e The maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC PTC NTC 1 Connects PTC Positive Temperature thermistor Coefficient NTC Negative Temperature input Coefficient thermistor for motor lt Control circuit gt protection Ensure that the slide switch EEN SW5 on the control PCB is turned to the PTC NTC position see Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches 5 oF on fae S lt The figure shown at the right illustrates ikemistor the internal circuit diagram where SW5 switching the input of terminal C1 between Cl and PTC NTC is turned to the PTC NTC position For details on Figure 2 10 Internal Circuit Diagram SWS refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up SW5 Selecting PTC NTC the slide switches In this case you must change data of the function code H26 V2 Analog setting 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external voltage input voltage input e 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation e 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal 3 Hardware specifications e Input impedance 22kQ e The maximum input is
85. been any excess surge or noise coming from outside gt Take measures against surges and noise gt Have the inverter repaired Problem The magnetic contactor for short circuiting the charging resistor failed to work Possible Causes 1 The control power was not supplied to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that in normal connection of the main circuit not a connection via the DC link bus the connector CN R on the power printed circuit board power PCB is not inserted to NC gt Insert the connector CN R to FAN Check whether you quickly turned the circuit breaker ON and OFF to confirm safety after cabling wiring gt Wait until the DC link bus voltage has dropped to a sufficiently low level and then release the current alarm After that turn ON the power again Do not turn the circuit breaker ON and OFF quickly Turning ON the circuit breaker supplies power to the control circuit to the operation level lighting the LEDs on the keypad in a short period Immediately turning it OFF even retains the control circuit power for a time while it shuts down the power to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor since the contactor is directly powered from the main power Under such conditions the control circuit can issue a turn on command to the magnetic contactor but the contactor not pow
86. below Data for E61 E62 or E63 Analog torque limit value A Use the analog input as the torque limit value specified by 7 E ae function code data 7 or 8 E Analog torque limit value B Input specifications 200 10 V or 20 mA If the same setting is made for different terminals the priority order is E61 gt E62 gt E63 E Torque limiter levels specified via communications link S10 S11 The torque limiter levels can be changed via the communications link Function codes S10 and S11 exclusively reserved for the communications link respond to function codes F40 and F41 Switching torque limiters The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command TL2 TLI Select torque limiter level 2 1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals To assign the TL2 TLI as the terminal function set any of E01 through E07 to 14 If no TL2 TL1 is assigned torque limiter levels 1 1 and 1 2 F40 and F41 take effect by default Torque limiter 1 1 F40 S10 Analog torque limit value A Torque limiter 2 1 E16 Q ON Torque limiter A TLA E61 to E63 TL2 TL1 Torque limiter 1 2 F41 S11 O Analog torque limit value B O Torque limiter B TLB Torque limiter 2 2 E17 O ON E Torque limiter Operating conditions H73 H73 specifies whether the torque limiter is enabled or disabled during acceleration deceleration and running at constant speed Data for H73
87. can be changed via the communications link F01 Frequency Command 1 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C30 Frequency Command 2 C31 to C35 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 C36 to C39 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C41 to C45 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point H61 UP DOWN Control Initial frequency setting d59 d61 to d63 Command Pulse Rate Input F01 or C30 sets the command source that specifies reference frequency or reference frequency 2 respectively Data for F01 C30 ee Enable keys on the keypad N keys on the keypad 1 VDC Enable the current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC SW5 on the control PCB should be turned to the C1 side factory default a Ea Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies SW5 on the control PCB should be turned to the C1 side factory default Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC SW5 on the control circuit board should be turned to the V2 position factory
88. capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment on page 7 4 85 or lower of the reference During ordinary 5_05 capacitance under ordinary operation Capacitance operating conditions at the user H98 Bit 3 1 site See 2 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions on page 7 5 ON time counting Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary 5_26 Counts the time elapsed when the 19 years operation Elapsed time voltage is applied to the DC link 57 bus capacitor while correcting it Time remaining according to the capacitance before the end of life measured above Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed when the Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary 5_ 06 capacitors on voltage is applied to the 10 years operation Cumulative run time printed circuit capacitors while correcting it boards according to the surrounding temperature Cooling fans Counts the run time of the cooling Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary 5_ 07 fans 10 years operation Cumulative run time E Notes for the judgment on the service life of the DC link bus capacitor The service life of the DC link bus capacitor can be judged by the measurement of discharging time to or ON time counting The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter s internal load conditions e g options attached or ON OFF of digital I O signals If act
89. communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Turn the run command OFF before releasing the alarm Check that turning the STOP OFF decelerated the inverter to stop gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E07 for terminals X1 through X7 What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter Check whether the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 H65 H66 P02 and P03 matches the motor specifications Check whether the wiring length between the inverter and the motor exceeds 50 m Small capacity inverters are greatly affected by the wiring length gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the wiring length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 J O C W m m T O O Z GQ Possible Causes 4 5 6 The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor A tuning operation involving motor rotation P04 2 or 3 was attempted while the brake was applied to the motor What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the rated capa
90. compensation inactive o conte Ol Dynamic torque vector control Disable Frequency control 2 Sette V f with slip compensation with slip compensation active contol oo Frequency control Maximum ith d laid idee alae Enable PG V f with automatic speed frequency regulator ASR 200 Hz Maximum frequency 4 Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control Estimated 120 Hz without speed sensor speed Speed control Not available with automatic speed for MT mode regulator ASR inverters TAN mol Maximum Ta se a Enable w PG frequency with speed sensor 200 Hz E f control with slip compensation inactive Vector control Under this control the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip compensation so no unpredictable output fluctuation results enabling stable operation with constant output frequency E f control with slip compensation active Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is t
91. connected 2 ____ under bar appears What to Check and Suggested Measures Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is not set to 10 PID command or 12 PID feedback amount gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID feedback amount JO1 PID control is not set to 0 Disable gt Set JO1 to 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation or 3 Enable Dancer control Prior to proceed check that pressing the key does not change the display on the LED monitor Check continuity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable Problem Although you pressed the key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV the motor did not start and an under bar _____ appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 2 3 3 Problem Parentheses The voltage of the DC link bus was low The main power is not ON while the auxiliary input power to the control circuit is supplied Although power is supplied not via the commercial power line but via the DC link bus the main power down detection is enabled H72 1 E 3 appears Possible Causes 1 The display data overflows the LED monitor What to Check and Suggested Measures Select 5_0 under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming
92. dJLHYJANI 3HL NISN 340444 E Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occurs take an appropriate measure against them An earth leakage circuit 1 Decrease the carrier frequency breaker that is connected 2 Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter to the input primary side 3 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker with lower sensitivity than the one currently used has tripped 4 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency With overcurrent protection current component An external thermal relay 1 Decrease the carrier frequency was activated 2 Increase the current setting of the thermal relay 3 Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter instead of the external thermal relay E Selecting inverter capacity 1 To drive a general purpose motor select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor rating listed in the standard specifications table When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration is required select an inverter with one rank higher capacity than the standard 2 Special motors may have larger rated current than general purpose ones In such a case select an in
93. data such as the frequency commands and PID commands which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was turned OFF Possible Causes 1 During data saving performed when the power was turned OFF the voltage fed to the control PCB dropped in an abnormally short period due to the rapid discharge of the DC link bus What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when the power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus voltage After pressing the amp key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID commands specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation 6 18 Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 2 Inverter operation affected by Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct strong electrical noise when the grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires power was turned OFF gt Implement noise control measures After pressing the amp key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID commands specified through the keypad or the
94. deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one DC link bus voltage control with Force to stop if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one TINN Torque limit control with Force to stop disabled DC link bus voltage control with Force to stop disabled H70 Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow the deceleration time selected 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s k angel H73 Torque Limiter Enable during ACC DEC and running at constant speed aad ae 5 57 Operating sete 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable during running at 5 111 constant speed Enable during ACC DEC and disable during running at constant speed H74 Control target 0 Motor generating torque limit Torque current limit Output power limit H75 Target quadrants 0 Drive brake Same for all four quadrants Upper lower limits H76 Frequency increment limit 0 0 to 500 0 Hz 5 0 5 109 for braking 5 111 H77 Service Life of DC Link Bus 0 to 8760 in units of 10 hours 5 111 Capacitor Remaining time H78 Maintenance Interval M1 0 Disable 1 to 9999 in units of 10 hours 5 108 H79 Preset Startup Count for 0000 Disable 0001 to FFFF hex Y N Yo Yo Yel ey Y 5 111 Maintenance M1 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 0 20 5 111 for Motor 1 10 Hi ry fy Do viv y y Jer Haz Light Alam Selocion 2 0000 6 FFFF hee vo te Hea Pre oxcaton arava 00 we a00 ee H85 Time 0 00 Disable 001103000 v v oofu r
95. default Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command any of E01 to E07 17 and DOWN command any of E01 to E07 18 should be assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 Enable N keys on the keypad balanceless bumpless switching available Enable a digital input interface card option For details refer to the Digital Input Interface Card Instruction Manual Enable the Pulse train input PIN command assigned to digital input terminal X7 E07 48 or a PG interface card option 5 29 E Setting up a reference frequency 1 Using the keypad F01 0 factory default or 8 1 Set FOI data to 0 or 8 This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the N key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit on the LED monitor will blink 3 To change the reference frequency press the N key again To save the new setting into the inverter s memory press the key when E64 1 factory default When the power is turned ON next time the new setting will be used as an initial reference frequency Gip In addition to the saving with the key described above auto saving is also available when E64 0 e If you have set FOl data to 0 or 8 but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 1 e frequency command 2 frequ
96. down 1 during deceleration 1 during DC braking lo wee 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction os m 1 under current limiting control o FWD 1 during running in the forward direction Table 3 8 Running Status 2 3_23 Bit Assignment Le Speed limiting under torque control a Not used Motor selection 00 Motor 1 01 Motor 2 10 Motor 3 11 Motor 4 Inverter drive control 0000 V f control with slip compensation inactive Not used 0001 Dynamic torque vector control 0010 V f control with slip compensation active 0011 V f control with speed sensor 0100 Dynamic vector control with speed sensor 0101 Vector control without speed sensor 0110 Vector control with speed sensor 1010 Torque control Vector control without speed sensor 1011 Torque control Vector control with speed sensor NO w A Table 3 9 Running Status Display o e fJisjujsje ujofofsjf6e sjafs 2fifo Binay 1 o0o ojojofjo fojof o o jojofi LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 E Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 10 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 10 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion 2 5 D 2 Q9 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I
97. enables the inverter to connect with a PC with a wiper USB cable 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes JAGUAR VXG features the following three operation modes Table 3 2 Operation Modes Operation mode Description After powered ON the inverter automatically enters this mode This mode allows you to specify the reference frequency PID command value and etc and run stop the motor with the fo 6 keys It is also possible to monitor the running status in real time If a light alarm occurs the a appears on the LED monitor Programming This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the mode inverter status and maintenance If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode in which you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm mode Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition For details first see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects in Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective and then read the troubleshooting of each alarm Running mode Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON Configuration of function code data and monitor of maintenance alarm info and various status Detection of m Release of a light alarm paty a light alarm f I 1 I 4 I
98. errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your IMO representative Error due to limitation 4 10 t If a filter other than the IMO optional output filter is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 1 9 Function code basic settings lt 4 gt For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting i F fault a Name Function code data ALON CEN code VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E 2 Motor characteristics 2 0 Motor characteristics 0 x Motor 1 selection VG motors standard motors Motor 1 Same as that of the applied motor l Rated capacity dapacity PP Nominal applied motor capacity 3 Enable when NTC thermistor h 26 Thermistor for motor Also turn SW5 on the control 0 Disable Mode selecti
99. f f I 7 J I OTS Press this key if i an alarm has H occurred I 4 S Release of Fi Occurrence of a heavy alarm N N a heavy alarm i Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes B Tip Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression keys stands for pressing the 9 key with the 6 key held down 3 2 3 3 Running Mode 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the fourteen items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the amp key to switch between these monitor items Table 3 3 Monitoring Items Display sample on the LED indicator Function Monitor items Unit Meaning of displayed value code data LED monitor W ON O OFF for E43 Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED Speed monitor ae een Output frequency 1 before slip 5x00 M HzO AOkW Hz Frequency actually being output compensation Output frequency 2 after slip 5 00 M HzO AOUkW Hz Frequency actually being output compensation B HzOAUkW Reference frequency being set E48 2 frequency 120 Motor speed 1500 E Hz E AO kW r min Output
100. fluctuates 2 An external potentiometer is used for frequency setting 3 Frequency switching or multi frequency command was enabled What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals Check whether the external frequency command potentiometer is malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt Ifthe relay contact is defective replace the relay 6 6 Possible Causes 4 The wiring length between the inverter and the motor is too long 5 The machinery is hunting due to vibration caused by low rigidity of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether auto torque boost auto energy saving operation or dynamic torque vector control is enabled gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Disable th
101. for long time may shorten the life of electrolytic capacitors on the PCBs due to local high temperature inside the inverter Be sure to check with the LIFE signal etc and replace the broken fan as soon as possible Braking transistor error detection Bit 6 dba 22 kW or below Upon detection of a built in braking transistor error this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm dba Set data of this bit to 0 when the inverter does not use a braking transistor and there is no need of entering an alarm state Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure Bit 7 for basic type of inverters onl Mounting an IP40 option to inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below enables them to conform to IP40 In such a case switch Bit 7 to 1 for the protection coordination For details refer to the instruction manual of the IP40 option To set data of function code H98 assign the setting of each function to each bit and then convert the 8 bit binary to the decimal number 5 116 2 F Ql T C Z O Z O O J m Refer to the assignment of each function to each bit and a conversion example below Factory default Lower the carrier frequency Disable Enable 1 Enable automatically processing Detect output phase loss Enter alarm processing 0 Continue to run Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Factory default User defined setting 0 Factory default capacitor processing processing 6 Detect braking
102. frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C vi Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued A WWARNINGA Main power input 2 LIR LAS L3 T Inverter type Rated current Inverter s grounding BG W W o W W o DCR DCR DCR DCR VXGIA5 4E VXG2A5 4E 5 10 CT MT VT mode DC reactor PL P oO oN isc O gt Ea 2n ior 5 N oO z A Nominal applied motor Braking resistor P DB 2 N 5 jor 5 fema O Sarl oO gt g pet he 30 Et VXG16A5L 4E fee itt VXG23AL 4E VXG30A5L 4E seen ing EH a Hoos VXG75AL 4E i pp EE EE gt lt D n ise lt S T D D a VXG112AL 4E VXGIS50AL 4E oe N 175 VXG176AL 4E 200 VXG210AL 4E T VT 110 250 VXG253AL 4E 70x2 T VT 132 300 VXG304AL 4E T VT 160 es 350 185 Q VXG377AL 4E T VT 200 300 120x2 Q 4 N Q Q QAQI lt SIQI lt S pp eee eee eee ee o w x x N Nn lt lt VXG415AL 4E 500 300 T VT C 220 150x2 150x2 VXG520AL 4E Recommended wire size mm MCCB or RCD ELCB 1 Control circu
103. frequency 16 steps 16 bit parallel Pulse train input standard Pulse input X7 terminal Rotational direction One of the digital input terminals except X7 Frequency command Link operation Various buses option Reference frequency switching Remote local mode switching Auxiliary frequency setting Proportional operation setting and Inverse operation Acceleration 0 00 to 6000 s deceleration time Linear S curve curvilinear Acceleration deceleration time settings 1 to 4 switchable 8 5 Control N O gt fae R O lt O Stop control e Running continued at the stop frequency coast to stop or force to stop e DC braking Braking starting frequency up to 60 Hz time up to 30 0 s and operation level up to 100 e Zero speed control under vector control with speed sensor Auto restart after e Trip immediately trip after recovery from power failure trip after deceleration to stop e Continue to run restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred restart at the starting frequency restart after searching for idling motor speed Hardware current limiter e Current limiter operation level 20 to 200 e Overcurrent limiting by hardware This can be canceled Torque limiter bs Torque limit value 3 00 e Torque limiter 1 2 torque limiter enabled disabled analog torque limit value Control functions e Analog input adjustment gain offset filter time constant frequency l
104. generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter s power wires Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For inverter s control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any 1 6 B a Q EN
105. installing the ones whose enclosure rating is IP0O When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements it is necessary to derate the inverter or consider the panel engineering design suitable for the special environment or the panel installation location For details refer to the IMO technical information Engineering Design of Panels or consult your IMO representative The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the panel installation location Highly concentrated sulfidizing gas or other corrosive gases A lot of conductive dust or foreign material e g metal powders or shavings carbon fibers or carbon dust A lot of fibrous or paper dust High humidity or dew condensation Vibration or shock exceeding the specified level Fumigation for export packaging Corrosive gases cause parts inside the inverter to corrode resulting in an inverter malfunction Entry of conductive dust into the inverter causes a short circuit Fibrous or paper dust accumulated on the heat sink lowers the cooing effect Entry of dust into the inverter causes the electronic circuitry to malfunction In an environment where a humidifier is used or where the air conditioner is not equipped with a dehumidifier high humidity or dew condensation results which causes a short circuiting or malfunction of electronic circuitry inside the inverter
106. is applied to the following terminals Main circuit terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P N DB U V W RO TO R1 T1 AUX contact 30A 30B 30C Y5A Y5C Insulation level Main circuit Enclosure Basic insulation Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 Main circuit Control circuit Reinforced insulation Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 Relay output Control circuit Reinforced insulation Overvoltage category H Pollution degree 2 An electric shock may occur 2 5 Grounding terminal for input line provided only on the EMC filter built in type lt QO Z 3 Z G gt Z D A Z G I Z lt za za Refer to Section 2 3 3 9 2 6 Table 2 6 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size mm 3 Sp Inverter type Inverter Braking 53 L1 R L2 S output ic eani wo DCR 0 vw PPO pe pe 04 WXG3A2 o 0 75 WXGSA 2 oo 1S WxXG8A2 2 0 2 0 2 0 22 WXGHA2 a a a 5 5 VXG30AL 2 0 pat pe a a A a rr 2 0 a Ce a Se a 8 0 80 2 Cis vxonar2 vxossa2 S 185 _ VXG88AL 2 VXG74AL 2 8 a E o a ee ee ee ee en a e a e eee Eom 45 VXG21SAL 2_ VXGI80AL 2_ 60 Eee 55 VXG283AL 2 VXG215AL 2 10 22 100 75 VXG350AL 2 VXG283AL 2 150 90 VXG400AL 2__ WXG3S0AL 2_ 150 uoj VXG400AL 2_ 20 04 VXGIAS4E 0 75 VXG2AS4E
107. kW or below the wiring guide separates the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 22 kW it separates the upper and lower main circuit wires and control circuit wires Be careful about the wiring order Control circuit wires Upper main circuit wires Control circuli A JEFE rif a Wiring guide iti fee a or 4 F a Ninami T WOmToORTOONEND Lower man orcun Main circuli wires VXG9A 4E VXG30A5 4E E Preparing for the wiring guide Inverters with a capacity of 11 to 22 kW three phase 200 V class series are sometimes lacking in wiring space for main circuit wires depending upon the wire materials used To assure a sufficient wiring space remove the clip off sections see below as required with a nipper Note that the enclosure rating of IP20 may not be ensured when the wiring guide itself is removed to secure a space for thick main circuit wiring Clip off sections Clip off sections Before removal of clip off sections After removal of clip off sections Wiring Guide VXG37AL 4E 2 8 2 gt 73 D z NO dJLHJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW 8 In some types of inverters the wires from the main circuit terminal block cannot be straight routed Route such wires as shown below so that the front cover is set into place PU PANO 9 For inverters with a capacity of 500 kW or 630 kW two L2 S input terminals are arrange
108. level voltage specified by H27 lt Control circuit gt 10 VDC Operation level External alarm Note When using the terminal V2 for PTC NTC thermistor input also turn SW5 on the control printed circuit board to the PTC NTC side For details refer to Chapter 2 SPECIFICATIONS H28 Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance Data setting range 60 0 to 0 0 Hz 0 0 Disable Motor speed Output frequency Speed command Reference frequency Speed Output frequency Droop characteristics Load 100 Motor load torque E Select droop control DROOP E01 to E07 data 76 This terminal command DROOP is to switch enabling or disabling the droop control DROP Note To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor beforehand The droop control under V f control applies the acceleration deceleration time to the frequency obtained as a result of the droop control to prevent the inverter from tripping even at an abrupt change in load As a result reflecting the frequency compensated by the droop control on the motor speed may be delayed due to the influence of the acceleration deceleration t
109. link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a starting frequency momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverter at the power performs auto search for idling motor starting frequency specified by function speed and restarts running the motor at the code F23 frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Auto search is enabled by turning ON the digital terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting or setting the H09 data to 1 or 2 For details about the digital terminal command STM and auto search refer to the description of H09 Starting Mode Auto search 5 43 e Under vector control without speed sensor Data for F14 0 Trip immediately Trip after recovery from power failure Trip after decelerate to stop Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads Restart at the starting frequency Auto search disabled Auto search enabled As soon a
110. mode on the keypad then check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V class series and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V class series gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications Check whether the main power is turned ON gt Turn the main power ON Check the connection to the main power and check if the H72 data is set to 1 factory default Correct the H72 data appeared on the LED monitor during speed monitoring on the keypad What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient E50 exceeds 99999 Correct the E50 data 6 22 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspections to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a long time When performing inspections follow the instructions given in this chapter A WARNINGA e Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Mai
111. motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters e Rated slip frequency Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Rated slip frequency Hz YYXYY x Base frequency Synchronous speed LL For details about the slip compensation control refer to the description of F42 P13 to P15 Motor 1 Iron loss factors 1 to 3 P13 to P15 compensates the iron loss caused inside the motor under vector control with speed sensor in order to improve the torque control accuracy The combination of P99 Motor 1 selection and P02 Motor 1 rated capacity data determines the standard value Basically there is no need to modify the setting P16 to P20 Motor 1 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 P21 to P23 Motor 1 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c These function codes specify the characteristics of the exciting current to generate magnetic flux inside the motor and the characteristics of the magnetic flux generated The combination of P99 Motor 1 selection and P02 Motor 1 rated capacity data determines the standard value Performing auto tuning while the motor is rotating P04 2 or 3 specifies these factors automatically P53 P54 Motor 1 X corre
112. ne 11 C FWD Me3 T2 Bx Run command Driven by inverter Driven by commercial line Note 1 Emergency switch Manual switch provided for the event that the motor drive source cannot be switched normally to the commercial power due to a serious problem of the inverter Note 2 When any alarm has occurred inside the inverter the motor drive source will automatically be switched to the commercial power 5 71 Example of Operation Time Scheme Drive source is switched to commercial line because of Driven by alarm condition detected while inverter Driven by commercial line Driven by inverter the motor is driven by inverter Run SW 35 Stop SW i i i 55 H l Run command OPX Alarm 30 Inverter Select commercial line 43 Inverter primary MC1 Inverter secondary delay timer T3 ON delay gt D Ql Inverter secondary MC2 Switch to commercial line delay timer T1 OFF delay Run forward FWD Switch to commercial line T2 OFF delay Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 Coast to a stop BX SAdO9 NOILONNA Commercial line power supply MC3 Inverter output and motor rotation I Motor driven Motor coast to stop Motor coast to stop Motor coast to stop Inverter output coast to stop Lead in Gp Alternatively you may use the integrated sequence by which some of the actions above are automatically P performed by the inverter itself F
113. number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 2 9 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals This section shows connection diagrams with the Enable input function used 1 VXGxxx 2 are set in SINK mode input by factory default O D Q D CM DcR S z O MCCB or Main circuit Power supply RCD ELCB MC Pi 200 V class series _ Z 200 to 240 V oT i TAR ee a aad Motor Q 50 60 Hz a a a a roe g 400 V class series o T ae ca FOL2 S 4 AIVO M a 380 to 480 V N oi ee ee UO 50 60 Hz x Ae oe amet LIT W cs aiT EE Book i S Auxiliary control power input 3 TO Power switching connector Tt CN UX 10 Auxiliary fan power input 4 OR1 Fan power supply switching connector TI CN RCN W 10 Grounding a E of G cO l Grounding terminal T es es ee ee a ee ee J Anabari Control circuit 8 gt r Potentiometer power supply 3 T 2 i us 10 vDC ov 30C i Contact outputs 9 V
114. o 0 07Z peso cooe roel Lei sss ol6 91 990 99 81 9i sre orze 00 6 61Z 01 0 007 Sb zero elec ori soci ort oor oss vic ses zz osi 990 orgi esl z699 ze9z 091 6661 0 091 Vt reco oroz srei oszi oz vor ses s69 ots eoe ost 990 sozi cot ores oziz ZEI 66ST NOZE S E sco oosl rel rozi zz ge ces Loe ozs sos ei 990 6l 981 iezt ozgi OIL EIET 0011 TE oreo ezti ospi vosi osu ore ors oso oo sss iez oso oost zor sis sosi 06 6601 00006 g z ZETO SZZ orl gezi ri oz zrs ero osL rsg eez oso zssi ssi over cozi SL 66 68 01 00 SL 97 Loro woe susi zoei cu ver oes cro coe zes sez reo orsi ocz oroe 97 ss 66 PL 1 00 SS SZ ZLTO soez gibt ozi EZI rrr vss goo se oes srz oso cist zez 69rz erst Sb 66tS 0 00 St S7 oszo 9509 geri vozi 68L ces oez oso zest ssz ssiz ores LE 66 tt 1 00 LE ET zozo over eesi ezer grg zos ore ogo rori srz ezoz eszs 0 669 0000 szco 1o9e sisi zogi cig Los sce 060 seri esz Losi ose zz 6667 1 00 CZ 07 ETO svoe SLri 6Lz oes 206 vee exo est ez orir evee f ssi feetzoos st isto sspz szei eizi osor ser coo ra ses soe zee eri zest soe seor f coz SI 681 0100 S 1 EI zero ovsi ezi cosi reu ow oss e69 ees
115. of the digital output terminals function code data 84 Cnote e After the current setting has expired set a value for the next maintenance in H78 and press the key so that the output signal is reset and counting restarts e After the current setting has expired set a value for the next maintenance in H79 and press the key so that the output signal is reset and counting restarts This function is exclusively applies to the 1st motor 5 108 H45 Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm err on the LED monitor It also issues alarm output for any alarm ALM if assigned to a digital output terminal by any of E20 to E24 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of key GN key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of key N key H97 data automatically returns to 0 after clearing the alarm data A mock alarm can be issued also by simultaneous keying of S0 key key on the keypad for 5 seconds
116. of the rated operation level the JD ID2 or ID3 turns OFF The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Output Current Timer i i E Low current detected IDL This signal turns ON when the output current drops below the level specified by E37 Low current detection Level for the period specified by E38 Timer When the output current exceeds the Low current detection level plus 5 of the inverter rated current it goes OFF The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Output current Level 5 Level IDL E36 Frequency Detection 2 Refer to E31 E37 E38 Current Detection 2 Low Current Detection Level and Timer Refer to E34 E40 E41 PID Display Coefficient A B These function codes specify PID display coefficients A and B to convert a PID command process command or dancer position command and its feedback into mnemonic physical quantities to display Data setting range 999 to 0 00 to 9990 for PID display coefficients A and B m Display coefficients for PID process command and its feedback J01 1 or 2 E40 specifies coefficient A that determines the display value at 100 of the PID process command or its feedback and E41 specifies coefficient B that determines the display value at 0 The display value is determined as follows Display value PID process command or its feedback 100 x Display coefficient A B B Value displayed PID display coefficient A E40 2 F Ql PID display
117. or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Not available for MT mode inverters Vector control with speed sensor with an optional PG interface card mounted V f characteristics Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum frequency AVR control ON OFF selectable Non linear V f pattern with three arbitrary points Torque boost Auto torque boost for constant torque load Manual torque boost Desired torque boost 0 0 to 20 0 can be set e Select application load with function code F37 Variable torque load or constant torque load Starting torque 22 kW or below 200 or over 30 kW or above 180 or over Reference frequency 0 3 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque boost Start stop operation e Keypad Fur and 0 keys external signals run forward run reverse command etc Digital setting 0 5 of base speed at 10 to 50 C Constant torque range Constant output range SNOILVOlsIOAdS Communications link RS 485 fieldbus option e Remote local operation Y Enable input Opening the circuit between terminals EN and PLC stops the inverter s output transistor Safety stop function coast to stop Compliant with EN954 1 Cat 3 e Keypad A and Q keys Analog input Analog input can be set with external voltage current input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 terminals 12 V2 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 terminal C1 UP DOWN operation Multi
118. output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation 3 The control circuit failed Check if erfoccurs each time the power is turned ON gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your IMO representative 27 erh Hardware error Problem The LSI on the power printed circuit board malfunctions Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter capacity setting on It is necessary to set the inverter capacity correctly the control printed circuit board Contact your IMO representative is wrong 2 Data stored in the power It is necessary to replace the power printed circuit board printed circuit board memory is Contact your IMO representative corrupted 3 The control printed circuit It is necessary to replace the power or control printed circuit board q board is misconnected to the gt Contact your IMO representative power printed circuit board m 28 ere Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation n Problem An excessive deviation appears between the speed command and the detected speed 5 Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Incorrect setting of function Check the following function code data P01 Motor No of poles d15 code data Feedback encoder pulse count rev and d16 and d17 Feedback pulse correction factor 1 and 2 gt Specify data of functio
119. po VXGI112AL 4E F 315 IEC60269 4 EN VXG180AL 2 vr je IEC60269 4 400 IEC60269 4 VXG215AL 2 wr IEC60269 4 oi VXGISOAL 4E 350 IEC60269 4 cx VXG283AL 2 cs VXG176AL 4E 350 IEC60269 4 75 cr VXG350AL 2 500 IEC60269 4 VXG210AL4E T a E IEC60269 4 Ea ene VXG253AL 4E a 400 IEC60269 4 Three phase 200 V Nn N SINT VT VXG304AL 4E MT ER 450 IEC60269 4 xa377AL 4e ET 500 ae VXG377 pari atv 50 C60269 4 VXG415AL 4E 250 VXG520AL 4E 280 315 VXG650AL 4E 355 315 355 VXG740AL 4E 400 355 a VXG840AL 4E IEC60269 4 VXG960AL 4E VXG1170AL 4E 2000 VXGI370AL 4E O BC60269 4 710 Three phase 400 V 550 IEC60269 4 Disconnect or MC RCD ELCB etc Fuses 630 IEC60269 4 Power supply 900 IEC60269 4 1 JAGUAR VXG Q Q Q Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued A WARNINGA 3 When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards 4 When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD ELCB on the input primary of the inverter if the power supply is three phase 200 400 V 5 The inverter should be used in an environmen
120. re secese 4 1 4 1 2 Checking prior to powering on 0000008 4 1 4 1 3 Powering ON and checking c0cceeeeee 4 2 4 1 4 Switching between CT MT and VT drive TAN E gt o tec E E E A A A EE 4 2 4 1 5 Selecting a desired motor drive control 4 3 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 1 gt 4 5 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt 4 6 4 1 8 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 3 gt 4 8 4 1 9 Function code basic settings lt 4 gt 4 11 4 1 10 Function code basic settings lt 5 gt 4 12 4 1 11 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 6 gt 4 12 4 1 12 Running the inverter for motor operation COTE Oe a succor N E T T EN 4 14 4 1 13 Preparation for practical operation 4 16 d2 Special Uperaions sorasa aA 4 16 42 1 Jogging OperatiONn 2 2c0ncedadeeccn 4 16 4 2 2 Remote and local modes eects 4 16 4 2 3 External run frequency command 4 17 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES sccccccoxssasianiannninciaaninneiansineand 5 1 Sek P nction Code TADIeS sccs stoccnsscnanswmiveiusoonosawagaananaancans 5 1 xiii 5 2 Details of Function Codes saveiteiessrearvacrrasiniovenveas 5 29 5 2 1 Fundamental Functions sssisssesiocsevescssvsecccarsees 5 29 5 2 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions 5 67 5 2 3 C codes Control functions 5 92 5 2 4 P codes Motor 1 Parameters 00000000000000 5 95 5 2 5 H codes
121. remarkable rust 3 4 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte Visual inspection leaks and deformation Control circuit Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and 1 Auditory and visual 1 Smooth rotation excessive vibration inspection or turn 2 3 2 Check for loose bolts manually be sure to turn No abnormalities 3 Check for discoloration caused by the power OFF overheat 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection Ventilation Check the heat sink intake and exhaust Visual inspection No abnormalities path ports for clogging and foreign materials Remove dust accumulating on the inverter with a vacuum cleaner If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth Cooling system 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals When the replacement is necessary consult your IMO representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals See Note below DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fans 10 years Fuse 10 years 90 kW or above Note These replacement intervals are based on the inverter s service life estimated at a surrounding temperature of 40 C at 100 CT mode inverters or 80 MT VT mode inverters of ful
122. result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 1 8 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 3 gt Driving a motor under vector control without speed sensor F42 5 requires auto tuning regardless of the motor type Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them J For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Function Factory default Name Function code dat 200 V class series 400 V class series Base frequency 1 60 0 Ez 50 0 Hz Rated voltage 200 V class series 400 V class series x Le E A nameplate of the ea WAY Motor 1 p P p02 Raed capaci motor Nominal applied motor capacity aa ae Rated current of nom
123. risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range 2 Ventilation path is blocked 3 Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the service life expired or failure 4 Overload What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Three phase 200 V class series inverters with 37 kW or above and three phase 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped with not only a cooling fan for heat sink but also an internal air circulation fan Check the following gt Check the connection of the fan power switching connectors CN R and CN W gt Correct the connection Refer to Switching connectors in Chapter 2 Section 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the hea
124. route them together in parallel WARNING When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Otherwise a fire could occur Z deyo 6 DC link bus terminals P and N Capacity Braking Built in DC kW resistor DBR Optional devices Devices and terminals 30 to 630 None Nore a eee unit P and N DC braking resistor DBR Braking unit DBR P and DB 1 Connecting an optional braking unit or DC braking resistor DBR For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above both a braking unit and DBR are necessary Connect the terminals P and N of a braking unit to those on the inverter Arrange the inverter and the braking unit so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel Next connect the terminals P and DB of a DBR to those on the braking unit Arrange the braking unit and DBR so that the wiring length comes to 10 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel For details about the wiring refer to the Braking Unit Instruction Manual 2 Connecting other external devices YSLYsAN I JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW A DC link bus of other inverter s or a PWM converter is connectable to these terminals Note When you need to use the DC link bus terminals P and N consult your Fuji Electric representative Switching connectors m Power switching connectors C
125. selected appears Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for ae Li d pa speed indication 7 al ale MN Tf the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Not used PE Not usod A a Not usod CA Notwedy i a s Notwedy E PID output value in 100 at the maximum frequency Ca PID output value If PID control is disabled appears 3 22 Flux command value Flux command value in Running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format 325 Running status 2 N A Refer to E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3_23 on the next page 994 siamese T oC Temperature detected by the NTC thermistor built in the motor P If the NTC thermistor connectivity is disabled appears Not used ES ee Coa Wotued S S ie ana d Current position pulse for positioning control servo lock a Position deviation pulse for positioning control servo lock 5 D 2 Q9 adYdA3 AHL NISN NOILvVH3dO E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3 23 To display the running status and running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 3 7 and 3 8 Table 3 9 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 10 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to
126. setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency or reference frequency respectively The object to which the limit is applied differs depending on the control system N Object to which the limit is applied Frequency Limiter V f control Vector control without with speed sensor Frequency Limiter High Output frequency Reference speed reference frequency Frequency Limiter Low Reference frequency Reference speed reference frequency Note When the limit is applied to the reference frequency or reference speed delayed responses of control may cause an overshoot or undershoot and the frequency may temporarily go beyond the limit level m Low Limiter Mode selection H63 H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows a The output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 The inverter decelerates to stop the motor Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 Frequency limiter High F15 eee ee ee eee ee ee eee ey Frequency limiter Low F16 Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 Frequency limiter High F15 aA Frequency limiter Reference HOMAR tO Reference 0 100 frequency 0 100 frequency H63 0 H63 1 Cote e When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the reference fre
127. signal on that terminal upon occurrence of a light alarm For details of the light alarm objects refer to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6 1 E How to check a light alarm factor When a light alarm occurs a appears on the LED monitor To check the current light alarm factor enter Programming mode by pressing the amp key and select 5_56 on Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms 5_ 37 last to 5_39 3rd last For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information refer to Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information E How to remove the current light alarm After checking the current light alarm factor to switch the LED monitor back to the running status display e g output frequency from the a indication press the amp key in Running mode If the light alarm factor has been removed the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking and the LALM signal turns OFF If not e g DC fan lock the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking and the LALM signal remains ON 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 4 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indica
128. sy to U85 IEC Eee ai E pE on a fl dd Ph ai Some negative logic Active OFF commands cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip data 1009 and Force to stop data 1030 are fail safe terminal commands In the case of Enable external alarm trip when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON when data 9 Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF No 5 68 Terminal function assignment and data setting E Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms E Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence Inverter No alarm displayed Turning alarm display on and running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run Aim ON aim LON e mt el Reset alarm RST OFF E Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 0
129. terminals EN and PLC use safety components such as safety relays and safety switches that comply with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher Be sure to use shielded wires exclusive to terminals EN and PLC Do not put them together with any other control signal wire in the same shielded core Ground the shielding layer For details refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 When not using the Enable input function keep the terminals between EN and PLC short circuited with the jumper wire factory default 2 12 2 gt 73 D z NO YSALYSAN I JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW Primary grounding terminal G for inverter enclosure Two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed for use with safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters The grounding terminal for inverter enclosure should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Note An EMC filter built in type of inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW both 200 V and 400 V class series has three grounding terminals For effective noise suppression connect grounding wires to the speci
130. this product as well as the motor This instruction manual has been prepared for the inverter versions to be destined for the EU Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the JAGUAR VXG Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e JAGUAR VXG User s Manual e RS 485 Communication User s Manual These materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual AN W ARN N G Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries AC AU TI O N Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance
131. through the display returns to the first menu item 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and function code data changing procedure Programming mode Function code data Save data and go to the next function code Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and Function Code Data Changing Procedure Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation in Quick Setup following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 2 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data Frequency command source from the factory default N V keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selectio
132. to run with a run command entered by the fuy key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes however pressing the uy key cannot CONTROL LED run the inverter even if this indicator lights These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them LED Wait LEDs Unit Hz A kW r min and m min Indicators 3 LEDs Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light MHz UA kw Lights when the data to display exceeds 9999 When this LED lights the displayed value x 10 is the actual value x10 LED Example If the LED monitor displays 7234 and the x10 LED lights it means that the actual value is 1 234 x 10 12 340 Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Continued LED Monitor Keys The USB port with a mini B connector enables the inverter to connect with a PC with a wiper USB cable 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes JAGUAR VXG features the following three operation modes Table 3 2 Operation Modes Operation mode Description After powered ON the inverter automatically enters this mode This mode allows you to specify the reference frequency PID command value and etc and run stop the motor with the fo 6 keys It is also possible to monitor the running status in real time If a light alarm occurs the a appear
133. to the factory defaults disable gt Set the TL2 TL1 correctly Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring to the motor is incorrect 2 Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction commands FWD and REV 3 Arun command with fixed rotational direction from the keypad is active but the rotational direction setting is incorrect 4 The rotation direction specification of the motor is opposite to that of the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the U V and W terminals of the motor respectively Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function codes and the connection Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 gun 6 keys on keypad forward or 3 uy 0 keys on keypad reverse The rotation direction of IEC compliant motors is opposite to that of incompliant motors gt Switch the FWD REV signal setting 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command
134. transistor error Enter alarm processing processing Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure IP20 IP40 0 IP20 An example of conversion from binary to decimal for the number configured by the factory default setting shown above Decimal Bit 7 x 2 Bit 6 x 2f Bit 5 x 2 Bit 4 x 24 Bit 3 x 2 Bit 2 x 27 Bit 1 x 2 Bit 0 x 2 Bit 7 x 128 Bit 6 x 64 Bit 5 x 32 Bit 4 x 16 Bit 3 x 8 Bit 2 x 4 Bit 1 x 2 Bit 0 x 1 0x128 1x64 0x32 1x16 0x8 0x4 1x2 1x1 64 16 2 1 83 5 2 6 Acodes Motor 2 Parameters b codes Motor 3 Parameters r codes Motor 4 Parameters The JAGUAR VXG can switch control parameters even when it is running so that a single inverter can drive four motors by switching them or turn the energy saving operation ON or OFF for the setup change e g gear switching that causes the moment of inertia of the machinery to change F E P and other codes Including function codes commonly applied to motors to 4 Acodes Moor o O pbeodes Motor preodes Moors o O Note This manual describes function codes applied to motor 1 only For ones applied to motors 2 to 4 except A42 Of b42 and r42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 to 4 refer to the corresponding function codes prepared for motor in Table 5 5 on the next page A42 b42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 3 and 4 Mode selection d25 ASR Switching Time r42 The combination of digital input terminal commands M2 M3 and M4 Select motor 2 3 and 4 swi
135. unbalance 2 or less 4 Frequency 5 to 5 n D cC p o os J Q w J at 10 O os ed J Q C 4 Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 5 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 6 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 7 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in VT mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters 8 3 2 F D oe SNOILVOlAIOAdS VT Low Duty mode inverters for light load 5 5 to 75 kW Item Specifications Type VXG 4E 16A5L 23AL 30A5L 37AL 45AL GOAL 75AL 91AL 112AL 150AL 176AL Nominal applied motor kW 7 5 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Output rating nhac felts fo els poe Rated voltage V ef Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function lovelies capability 120 1 min Allowable Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less voltage frequency Frequency 5 to 5 a Required T with DCR kVAJ 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 Torque o E e D Braking transistor Braking transistor Built in Built in braking resistor g 37s 34s Braking time s Dutycycle WED A 2 PP OOOCOC CTOCOCOC NSNNNNNCCCS EMC fiter filter Compliant with EM
136. under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled ee O 00 to 2000 A 00 to 50 00 00 to 50 00 0 to 200 0 01 to 10 00 s 0 to 200 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 00 to 20 00 00 to 20 00 00 to 20 00 0 to 300 0 No load current R1 X Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation response time Slip compensation gain for braking Rated slip frequency Iron loss factor 1 Iron loss factor 2 Iron loss factor 3 Magnetic saturation factor 1 O E lt N N ol oljlojlojojojojo lt o lt N g O eee Sr S S SA SNA ee CT TT TS el NN lt lt lt N N Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y v7 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 0 to 300 0 Y WW1 2 7 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y 7 O 0 to 300 0 0 to 300 0 Magnetic saturation factor 5 Magnetic saturation extension factor a Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 factor b Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 lt E lt N N lt N 7 7 S 2 N N N SIR A lt s
137. were short circuited 2 Ground faults have occurred at the inverter output lines 3 Overload 4 Excessive torque boost specified when F37 0 1 3 or 4 5 The acceleration deceleration time was too short 6 Malfunction caused by noise 2 ef Ground fault What to Check and Suggested Measures Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V and W and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring Check if the resistance is too low gt Remove the short circuited part including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current trend Then use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy reduce it or increase the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load fluctuation smaller or increase the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 decreases the output current but does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the torque boo
138. with a capacity of 45 kW or above on 400 V class series inverters with a capacity of 75 kW or above has been detected 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit contain harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and use the following formula E hree phase input Power factor B Electric power W x 100 3 x Voltage V x Current A 2 gt 73 D gt N NOILOAdSNI ANY JONYNALNIYIN Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit DC link bus D Input primary side Output secondary side voltage T P N z Voltage Current Voltage Current ne D 2 2 Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC clack S E AR AS AT VR VS VT WR WT AU AV AW VU VV VW WU WW Oo Gy er u Moving iron Rectter or Digital Digital AC DigitalAC DigitalAC Moving coil ao moving iron AC power g type type cee power meter power meter power meter type e
139. with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident CAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measures to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur E Connecting disconnecting wires to from a control circuit terminal Strip the wire end by 8 to 10 mm as shown below Strip length of wire end 8 to 10 mm fi 4 Type of screwdriver tip shape Flat 0 6 x 3 5 mm Note For strand wires the strip length specified above should apply after twisting of them If the strip length is out of the specified range the wire may not be firmly clamped or may be short circuited with other wires Twist the end of the stripped wires for easy insertion and insert it firmly into the wire inlet on the control circuit terminal If the insertion is difficult hold down the clamp release button on the terminal with a flat screwdriver When disconnecting the wires from the terminal hold down the clamp release button on the terminal with a flat screwdriver and pull out the wires Connecting wire to terminal Disconnecting wire from terminal Flat screwdriver Wire inlet Table 2 7 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the u
140. with the function code settings e g when the user starts up the inverter for the first time it is recommended that the frequency limiter high F15 and the torque control speed limit 1 2 d32 d33 be used At the startup of the inverter to ensure safer operation specify small values to those function codes at first and gradually increase them while checking the actual operation The speed limiting function serves as an overspeed level barrier or as a speed limiter under torque control For details of the speed limiting function refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual lt Modification of motor control function code data gt Modifying the current function code data sometimes can solve an insufficient torque or overcurrent incident The table below lists the major function codes to be accessed For details see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Functi Drive control a re Name Modification key points w We PG If the current limiter is activated due to a short acceleration time Acceleration time 1 and large drive current prolong the acceleration time If an overvoltage trip occurs due to a short deceleration time Deceleration time 1 prolong the deceleration time Torque boost 1 If the starting motor torque is deficient increase the torque boost NIN If the motor with no load is overexcited decrease the torque boost Current limiter If the stall prevention function is activated by the current limite
141. 0 hex resolution 0400 hex 1024 P R d 16 Feedback input Reduction ratio between the motor Pulse count factor 1 and the encoder 117 Feedback input Motor speed Pulse count factor 2 Encoder speed x d17 d16 When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Note E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the situation of the machinery and select Tuning with the motor stopped P04 1 or Tuning with the motor running P04 2 For the latter tuning adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery P04 Select under the Tuning type Motor parameters subjected to tuning io e conden Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Tuning with the motor Rated slip frequency P12 stopped X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X No load current P06 with the motor stopped Can rotate the motor Tune while the motor Stops Cannot rotate the motor l Primary resistance R1 P07 Tuning the no load current Provided that it is safe Tune while Leakage reactance X P08 and magnetic saturation Note that little load the motor is rotating under V f control Rated slip frequency P12 factor with the mo
142. 0C and 30A is short circuited ON and goes OFF when it is open Gi p If all terminal signals are OFF open segments g on all of LED1 to LED4 will light Table 3 12 Segment Display for External Signal Information o ome ew o wo C gt i ew E y oeo vey E d LED4 LED3 LED2 LEDI TEE EEE Lil A Ca vec w e oeo o e a o o S o S o a ef ys Co Pers xe No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 13 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits 0 to each On the JAGUAR VXG digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bits 0 and 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X7 are assigned to bits 2 through 10 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and it is set to 0 when the terminal is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON short circuited and all the others are OFF open 0005 is displayed on LED4 to LED 1 Digital output terminals Y 1 through Y4 are assigned to bits 0 through 3 Each bit is set to 1 when the output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 is shor
143. 1 E55 E56 Current Detection 3 Level Timer Refer to E34 5 89 E61 to E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function Terminal V2 Extended Function E61 E62 and E63 define the function of the terminals 12 C1 and V2 respectively There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources Data for E61 tat assigned to Description E62 or E63 C1 and V2 i Oo 0 Noe a frequency input to be added to the reference frequency Auxiliary frequency given by frequency command 1 F01 This is not added to any other command 1 reference frequencies given by frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands etc Auxiliary frequency input to be added to all reference frequencies given by frequency command 1 frequency command 2 multi frequency commands etc Command sources such as temperature and pressure under PID 3 PID command 1 control It is also necessary to configure function code J02 Pmiedekamnoni e amounts such as temperature and pressure under PID This is used to multiply the final frequency command value by this Ratio setting value for use in the constant line speed control by calculating the Auxiliary frequency command 2 winder diameter or in ratio operation with multiple inverters Ambos torn lanitwalie A This is used when analog inputs are used as torque limiters ai LL Refer to F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 anlos torowe imiten This is used wh
144. 1 d16 a x c Pulse count factor 2 d17 b x d 5 135 d21 d23 d24 d25 Not When enabling the vector control with speed sensor mount the sensor encoder on the motor output shaft directly or on a shaft with the rigidity equivalent to the motor output shaft A backlash or deflection being on the mounting shaft could interfere with normal control d22 Speed Agreement PG Error Hysteresis width and Detection timer PG Error Processing These function codes specify the detection levels of the speed agreement signal DSAG and PG error detected signal PG ERR Speed agreement signal DSAG E20 to E24 and E27 data 71 mM Speed Agreement PG Error Hysteresis width d21 Data setting range 0 0 to 50 0 100 at the maximum speed Detection timer d22 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s If the speed regulator s deviation between the reference speed and detected one is within the specified range d21 the signal DSAG turns ON If the deviation is out of the specified range d21 for the period specified by d22 the signal turns OFF This signal allows the user to check whether the speed regulator works properly or not PG error detected signal PG ERR E20 to E24 and E27 data 76 mM Speed Agreement PG Error Hysteresis width d21 Data setting range 0 0 to 50 0 100 at the maximum speed Detection timer d22 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s O o Cominco rk Stop running with alarm 1 ere a ae Stop runni
145. 1030 Active ON Pre excitation EXITE Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Hold PID integral component PID HLD Select local keypad operation LOC Select motor 3 M3 Select motor 4 M4 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 Servo lock command LOCK Pulse train sign SIGN Cancel constant peripheral speed control Hz LSC Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 CRUN M71 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 2 CRUN M2 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 CRUN M3 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 CRUN M4 Select droop control Cancel PG alarm Cancel customizable logic Clear all customizable logic timers lt ii lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Zixix lt lt lt Z lt z Run forward Run reverse No function assigned NONE lt lt lt lt lt Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 5 8 2 F Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA F codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes C codes Control Functions of Frequ
146. 11 H12 E Starting Mode Auto search delay time 1 H49 Data setting range 0 0 to 10 0 s Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 Using H49 therefore eliminates the need of the run command timing control when two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately allow the motor to coast to a stop and restart it under auto search control at each time of inverter switching 2 E Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 H46 Data setting range 0 1 to 10 0 s At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the terminal command BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H46 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H46 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied Power failure Recovery 7 x DC link bus voltage Motor speed Output frequency a Output frequency gt e e ee Under auto search control the inverter searches the motor speed with the voltage applied at the motor start and the current flowing in the motor based on the model built with the motor parameters T
147. 13 Lower level alarm AL yy Eades J15 Stop frequency for slow flowrate 0 0 Disable 1 0 to 500 0 Hz Fy Y N 5 126 J16 Slow flowrate level stop latency 0 to 60 s aaa 5 128 C codes J17 Starting frequency 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y N J18 Upper limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 Depends on setting of F15 5 128 P codes J19 Lower limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 Depends on setting of F16 lt tert J21 Dew Condensation Prevention 1 to 50 Duty J22 Commercial Power Switching 0 Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm Sequence 1 Automatically switch to commercial power operation H codes KASAR Y N J56 PID Control Speed command filter 0 00 to 5 00 s N 5 129 J57 Dancer reference position 100 to 0 to 100 b codes J58 Detection width of dancer 0 Disable switching PID constant position deviation 1 to 100 Manually set value J59 P Gain 2 0 000 to 30 000 times J60 Integral time 2 0 0 to 3600 0 s ry Ty 00 J61 D Differential time 3 0 00 to 600 00 s Baa ee J62 PID control block selection 0 to 3 bit 0 PID output polarity 0 Plus add 1 Minus subtract bit 1 Select compensation factor for PID output 0 Ratio relative to the main setting 1 Speed command relative to maximum frequency 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for
148. 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC e Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal V2 requires setting function code C45 to 0 11 Analog Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 V2 FM1 and FM2 commen Isolated from terminals CM and CMY 2 18 Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Name Functions Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 11 be sure to ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal the external device may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as
149. 2 450 304x2 VXG960AL 4E 400x3 500 2033 VXG1170AL 4E 6003 304x3 500x4 253x4 630 2000 1400 VXG1370AL 4E 710 N 4 It is showing the wire size for UL Open Type xii Table of Contents PCE E E E ER E E 1 E Salety PRC CANTONS sieisatensiavaievate volsnonanadidcesn eedaceiseesioeisoecdseceosass 1 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection 2 50 22etsaceseceseansecasennentess 1 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 2 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3 1 3 1 Precautions in introducing inverters 1 3 1 3 2 Precautions in running inverteTS c ee 1 7 1 3 3 Precautions in using special motors 0 1 8 Chapter2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER corre vie tuesetiguiisotetaneiduntereieu veussccencesecd 2 1 2 1 Operating Environment oj cccscaaisnenseccectectenccceceanactecatens 2 1 2 2 Installing the Inverter rocana 2 1 2o W ea TEE 2 3 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the Winne Pide eee i 2 3 2 3 2 Screw specifications and recommended wire BIZ N 2 4 233 Wiring PRECAUTIONS secese merenie 2 7 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding e AL E A A ETET ETTA 2 9 2 3 5 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 16 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches 00000000000000000 2 23 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 0008 2 25 Chapter 3 OP
150. 2 DC braking 1 Braking time Interval T is determined so that the ratio of the duration of the DC power to T is the value Duty set for J21 2 Duty for condensation prevention J21 x 100 T DC Braking 1 Braking Time F22 i DC Applied DC Applied fot 1 Braking Level Condensation Prevention Cycle J22 Commercial Power Switching Sequence Refer to E01 through E07 J56 PID Control Speed command filter J57 PID Control Dancer reference position J57 specifies the dancer reference position in the range of 100 to 100 for dancer control If J02 0 keypad this function code is enabled as the dancer reference position It is also possible to modify the PID command with the N keys If it is modified the new command value is saved as J57 data For the setting procedure of the PID command refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 3 3 Setting up frequency and PID commands J58 PID Control Detection width of dancer position deviation J59 to J614 PID Control P Gain 2 Integral time 2 and D Differential time 2 The moment the feedback value of dancer roll position comes into the range of the dancer reference position detection width of dancer position deviation J58 the inverter switches PID constants from the combination of J03 J04 and JOS to that of J59 J60 and J61 respectively in its PID processor Giving a boost to the system response by raising the P gain may
151. 2 and 7 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 5 88 The menus available on the standard keypad are described below shows po Quick Setup Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Motor parameters H codes High performance functions Selecting each of 1 b b codes Motor 3 parameters codes enables its r codes Motor 4 parameters data to be displayed changed J codes Application functions 1 d codes Application functions 2 U codes Application functions 3 y codes Link functions Data Setting Displays only function codes that have been changed from Data Checking 2FEP their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Drive Monitoring 3oPE Displays the running information required for maintenance or test running I O Checking Displays external interface information via icnance Iniomaion 5 CHE aed maintenance information including cumulative run n _ Displays the recent four alarm codes You can refer to the Alarm Information 6 aa i running information at the time when the alarm occurred Data Copying 7 CPY Allows you to read or write function code data as well as verifying it For details of each menu item refer to Chapter 3 KEYPAD FUNCTIONS o codes Optional function AL E54 Frequency Detection 3 Level Refer to E3
152. 30 Data setting range 0 0 to 10 0 Hz The operation timings of each signal are shown below Frequency Spend Frequency arrival A hysheresis width Reference ireguniy Output frequency 2 F Ql Reference speed 0 Frequency arrival hysteresis widih Run command Frequency speed arrival signal FAR Frequency speed arrival signal 3 FAR3 SAdOO NOILONNA E31 E32 Frequency Detection Level and Hysteresis width E36 E54 Frequency Detection 2 and 3 Level When the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 the FDT signal comes ON when it drops below the Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width specified by E32 it goes OFF Three levels of setting are available with Frequency Detections 2 and 3 Operation level Hysteresis width N Output l A d dat Range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Frequency Detection Frequency Detection 2 FDT2 a re B6 ee E36 Frequency Detection 3 FDT3 Output frequency Reference frequency Detection level E31 E36 E54 Hysteresis width E32 Release level Time detected ae i Ime 5 82 E34 E35 Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level and Timer E37 F38 Current Detection 2 Low Current Detection Level and Timer E55 E56 Current Detection 3 Level and Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early
153. 35 Output frequency In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including remote and local mode see Section 7 3 6 and communications link are provided For details refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 6 in JAGUAR VXG User s Manual F03 Maximum Frequency 1 OQ J Ql F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit the output frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment rating Data setting range 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Cote e For MT and VT mode inverters set the maximum frequency at 120 Hz or below e Under vector control with speed sensor set the maximum frequency at 200 Hz or below and under vector control without speed sensor at 120 Hz or below e If a setting exceeding the maximum setting value e g 500 Hz is made the reference speed and analog output FMA will be based on the full scale reference value 10V 500 Hz However the frequency is internally limited Even if 10 V is inputted the frequency 500 Hz will be internally limited to 200 Hz T C Z O Z O O J m A WARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur ie Modify
154. 4 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 60 Hz follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 an frequency command 1 Reference frequency Hz Assuming the maximum frequency F03 60 Hz as 100 Gain C32 60 Hz 100 Po Point B Point A Bias F18 0 Hz 0 Analog input voltage 1V 5V 10V LAL i H Analog input o 9 9 10 ae WOO Assuming the full scale 10 VDC shes m of analog input as 100 point point C50 C34 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale of terminal 12 set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale of terminal 12 set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 Note Tbe setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base points is the same as that of IMO standard inverters of VXM amp VXSM series etc 5 31 In the case of bipolar input terminal 12 with C35 0 terminal V2 with C45 0 Setting C35 and C45 data to 0 enables terminal 12
155. 5 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above Name Terminal X1 Function Terminal X2 Function Terminal X3 Function Terminal X4 Function Terminal X5 Function Terminal X6 Function Terminal X7 Function Data setting range Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals X1 to X7 as listed below Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps Enable 3 wire operation Coast to a stop Reset alarm Enable external alarm trip 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON Ready for jogging Select frequency command 2 1 Select motor 2 Enable DC braking Select torque limiter level 2 1 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz Switch to commercial power 60 Hz UP Increase output frequency DOWN Decrease output frequency Enable data change with keypad Cancel PID control Switch normal inverse operation Interlock Cancel torque control Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option Universal DI Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting Force to stop 30 Active OFF 1030 Active ON Pre excitation Reset PID integral and differential components Hold PID integral component Select local keypad operation Select motor 3 Select motor 4 Protect motor from dew condensation Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz Enable integrated sequence to switch to
156. 5 0 C42 Gain C43 Filter time constant 0 05 c44 Gain base point 100 00 C45 Polarity aa TETE Bias base point 5 95 G51 Bias PID command 1 Bias value 100 0 101000 v v GO TV Y SO 052 Bias base point v oo fy ty fy y y_ C53 Selection of Normal Inverse 0 Normal operation Y Y YIYJIJYIY Y 5 67 Sprain Freaceroy command merse operon EYL s P codes Motor 1 Parameters Drive control 2 a Default b o setting S PG w o w Torque se Vif A V f PG PG control Code Name Data setting range D gt pe c ab t Oo D Pa O P01 Motor 1 No of poles 2 to 22 poles P02 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when P99 0 2 3 or 4 0 01 to 1000 HP when P99 1 00 to 2000 A 0 Disable N 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current ROS Rated current Auto tuning magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to i ce magnetic saturation extension factors a Available when the vector control is enabled Q P06 No load current 5 P07 R1 0 00 to 50 00 POS 6X a P09 Slip compensation gain for driving O
157. 5 kW or above 200 V class series environment where it may be exposed to lint cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will 75 kW or below 400 V class series 90 kW or above 400 V class series cloothe hieacuuk A dike 3 mm Max amplitude 3 mm Max amplitude inverter is to be used in such an environment 2 to less than 9 Hz 2 to less than 9 Hz install it in a dustproof panel of your system 9 8 m s2 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s2 9 to less than 55 Hz nies ie cowie meira auk 2m s2 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz above 1000 you should apply an output l m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally A WARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 and Table 2 3 are maintained at all times When mounting the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the surrounding temperature easily rises Do not install the inverter in a small panel with poor ventilation E When mounting two or more inverters When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel basically lay them out side by side When m
158. 50 p Number of motor poles a b Components of speed reduction ratio between motor shaft and take up roll shaft When the motor shaft rotates b times the take up roll shaft rotates a times r Radius of take up roll before winding initial value m Setting with analog inputs To specify a peripheral speed line speed using analog inputs set an analog input 0 to 100 based on the following equation p x b x 100 Analog input EE ers A x V T X T1 X a X Imax Where V Peripheral speed Line speed m min fmax Maximum frequency 1 F03 m Adjustment Like usual speed controls it is necessary to adjust the speed command filter speed detection filter P gain and integral time in the speed control sequence that controls the peripheral speed at a constant level Speed control If an excessive overshoot occurs for a speed command change Speed command filter increase the filter constant If ripples are superimposed on the speed detection signal so that the s eee ion filter speed control gain cannot be increased increase the filter constant to P obtain a larger gain d Speed control P If hunting is caused in the motor speed control decrease the gain 03 Gain If the motor response is slow increase the gain d04 pero conto If the mot is slow d the integral ti Integral time e motor response is slow decrease the integral time E Cancel constant peripheral speed control Hz LSC Function code E01 to E0
159. 7 Tune while the motor stops The inverter performs tuning while the motor is stopped Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control l 2 3 After tuning while the motor is stopped the inverter performs tuning again with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency After tuning while the motor is stopped the inverter performs tuning with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency twice Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 P16 to P20 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P21 through P23 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 P16 to P20 wo mie Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P21 to P23 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 For details of auto tuning refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of standard motors so that the best performance cannot be obtained under some controls e The motor to be driven is a non standard motor e Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long Generally 20 m or longer e A reactor is inserted between the motor and the invert
160. 7 data 70 Turning ON Hz LSC cancels the constant peripheral speed control This disables the frequency compensation of PI operation resulting in no compensation for a take up roll getting bigger and an increase in the winding speed Use this signal to temporarily interrupt the control for repairing a thread break for example ASC Enable constant peripheral speed control depending on d41 setting ON Cancel constant peripheral speed control V f control without compensation for a take up roll getting bigger 5 138 2 gt Ql T C Z O Z O O J m m Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD Function code E01 to E07 data 71 If this signal is ON under constant peripheral speed control stopping the inverter including an occurrence of an alarm and a coast to stop command or turning OFF HZz LSC saves the current frequency command compensating for a take up roll getting bigger in the memory At the time of restart the saved frequency command applies and the inverter keeps the peripheral speed constant LSC HLD OFF Disable no saving operation Enable Saving the frequency command compensating for a take up roll getting bigger Shutting down the inverter power during an operation stop loses the frequency compensation data saved in the memory At the time of restart therefore the inverter runs at the frequency without compensation so that a large ov
161. 9 The x10 LED turns ON boards Actual cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards hours Displayed value x 10 When the count exceeds 99 990 the counter stops and the LED monitor sticks to 9999 Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan Cumulative run time of the This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control cooling fan function code H06 is enabled and the fan stops The display method is the same as for 5_06 above Shows the content of the motor startup counter 1 e the number of run commands issued Counter range 0 to 65 530 times Display range 0 to 9999 If the count exceeds 10 000 the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Number of startups When the count exceeds 65 530 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Display range 00 to 9999 Input watt hour Displayed value x 100 kWh To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 999 900 kWh the counter will be reset to 0 Input watt hour Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9 999 Unit None Display range 00 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9 999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Input watt hour data Depending on the value of inte
162. A20 to A37 b20 to b37 r20 to r37 P53 to P56 A53 to A56 b53 to b56 r53 to r56 Function code data to H46 be initialized If Data 2 in Step 1 function codes listed at the right are F04 F05 A02 A03 b02 b03 r02 r03 also initialized e Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default e If P02 A16 b16 or r16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcibly to the standard nominal applied motor rating Refer to Table C in Section 5 1 Function Code Tables e Motor parameters to be initialized are for motors listed below under V f control When the base frequency rated voltage and the number of poles are different from those of the listed motors or when non standard motors are used change the rated current data to that printed on the motor nameplate V T control data 4 poles 220 VIGO Hz 415 V 50 Hz 400 V0 Hay o exclusively designed for vector Apos 50 Hz 50 Hz 400 V 50 Hz for the VXGxxx 4E Cnote When accessing function code P02 with the keypad take into account that P02 data automatically updates data of function codes P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 Also when accessing function code A16 b16 or r16 data of related function codes for each are automatically updated H04 H05 Auto Reset Times and Reset interval H04 and H05 specify the auto reset functio
163. Anti regenerative control is enabled during deceleration 4 Overload What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern H07 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter Level is reasonable gt Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter with F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration Mode selection gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 and E15 Measure the output current gt Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase 6 7 J O W a m T O O Z Q Possible Causes 5 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 6 An external potentiometer is used for frequency setting 7 The output frequency is limited by the torque limiter 8 The specified acceleration or deceleration time was incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 is increased gt Incre
164. C Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DOR a Option Applicable safety Enclosure IEC60529 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL Open type IPOO UL open type es J 6s 62 0s well 7 90 to 630 kW Output ratings ut power Item Specifications E _ Nominal applied a kW 110 132 160 200 220 280 355 400 450 500 630 710 Output rating Daa njee E E Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function so zoja J d I l raies Overload capability Overload capability 120 1 min 1 120 1 min 380 to 440 V 50 Hz poe rsgueney 380 to 480 V 60 Hz an oe ae a 0 o 0 oe ae Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Q Required capacity with DCR kVA 140 165 199 248 271 347 436 489 547 611 773 871 Torque 7 to 12 D Braking transistor Built in braking resistor co Braking time s Duty cycle ED EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR 8 Applicable safety i UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Fan cooling Weight Mass kg 62 64 9 8 1mo Mo ms ms so mo sols 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output v
165. C wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C 10 The inverter has been tested with IEC61800 5 1 2007 5 2 3 6 3 Short circuit Current Test under the following conditions Short circuit current in the supply 10 kA Maximum 240 V for 200 V class series with 22 kW or below Maximum 230 V for 200 V class series with 30 kW or above Maximum 480 V for 400 V class series viii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada UL cUL listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada by installation within precautions listed below ACAUTION 1 Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level Use Cu wire only 3 Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits Short circuit rating Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum for 200V class input 22 kW or less 230 Volts maximum for 200V class input 30 kW or above when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 200V class input Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit
166. Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Terminal Check that the terminal blocks are not NA Visual inspection No abnormalities blocks damaged Braking 1 Check for abnormal odor or cracks in 1 Olfactory and visual 1 No abnormalities resistor insulators caused by overheat inspection 2 Check for wire breakage 2 Check the wires visually 2 Within 10 ofthe or disconnect either wire resistance of the and measure the braking resistor conductivity with a multimeter DC link bus 1 Check for electrolyte leakage 1 2 1 2 capacitor discoloration cracks and swelling of Visual inspection No abnormalities the casing Main circuit 3 Measure the discharge 3 The discharge time 2 Check that the safety valve does not time with capacitance should not be shorter protrude remarkably probe than the one specified 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary by the replacement manual Transformer Check for abnormal roaring noise and odor Auditory visual and No abnormalities and reactor olfactory inspection Magnetic 1 Check for chatters during operation 1 Auditory inspection 1 2 contactor 2 Check that contact surface is not rough 2 Visual inspection No abnormalities and relay Printed 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 1 Retighten 1 2 3 4 circuit 2 Check for odor and discoloration 2 Olfactory and visual No abnormalities board 3 Check for cracks breakage inspection deformation and
167. Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly is broken gt Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath 2 PID feedback related circuit Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct affected by strong electrical grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit noise wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible 32 dba Braking transistor error Problem A braking transistor error is detected Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The braking transistor is Check whether resistance of the braking resistor is correct or there is a broken misconnection of the resistor gt Consult your IMO representative for repair 33 ero Positioning control error Problem An excessive positioning deviation has occurred when the servo lock function was activated Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Insufficient gain in positioning Readyjust the settings of J97 Servo lock Gain and d03 Speed control 1 P Gain control system 2 Incorrect control completion Check whether the setting of J99 Servo lock Completion width is correct width gt Correct the setting of J99 6 20 34 ecf Enable circuit f
168. DB for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below Built in DC brakin Option mountin Capacity kW eat DBR 8 Optional devices ee ee 0 4 to 7 5 Built in Built in External DC braking resistor 1 2 3 with a larger capacity Toz Extemal DC braking resistor 2 3 In inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below if the capacity of the built in DC braking resistor DBR is insufficient since the inverter undergoes frequent start stop or heavy inertial load mount an optional external DC braking resistor DBR with a larger capacity to increase the braking capability using the following steps Before mounting the external DBR remove the built in DBR 1 For inverters with a capacity of 0 4 to 3 7 kW disconnect the wiring of the built in DBR from terminals P and DB for inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW disconnect the wiring from terminal DB and the internal relay terminal see the figure below Insulate the terminals of the disconnected wires with insulating tape or other materials Terminal DB Relay terminal Wires from the built in DC braking resistor DBR 2 13 2 Connect an optional DBR to terminals P and DB The internal relay terminal on inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW is left unused 3 Arrange the DBR and inverter so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two DBR wires or
169. E Speed command filter d01 Data setting range 0 000 to 5 000 s d01 specifies a time constant determining the first order delay of the speed command filter Modify this data when an excessive overshoot occurs against the speed command change Increasing the filter time constant stabilizes the speed command and reduces overshoot against the speed command change but it slows the response speed of the inverter E Speed detection filter d02 Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s Modify this data when the control target machinery is oscillatory due to deflection of a drive belt or other causes so that ripples oscillatory components are superimposed on the detected speed causing hunting undesirable oscillation of the system and blocking the PI processor gain from increasing resulting in a slow response speed of the inverter In addition if the lower encoder PG resolution makes the system oscillatory try to modify this data Increasing the time constant stabilizes the detected speed and raises the PI processor gain even with ripples superimposed on the detected speed However the detected speed itself delays resulting in a slower speed response larger overshoot or hunting m P gain d03 Data setting range 0 1 to 200 0 times integral time d04 Data setting range 0 001 to 9 999 s d03 and d04 specify the gain and integral time of the speed regulator PI processor respectively P gain Definition of P gain 1 0 is th
170. ERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad 000000000000000 3 1 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad eara AAA ee 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes n 11s0000000000 3 2 Door Runna Mode cases actcees eccnceeeesreceeenececeeececoueees 3 3 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status ee 3 3 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms cc ceceeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 4 3 4 Programming Mode 2 0 cccscccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup cc cccccceeees 3 6 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting eee 3 7 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking cece 3 7 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 006 3 8 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking eee 3 11 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 3 14 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 3 18 3 4 8 Copying data Menu 7 Data Copying ceeeeeees 3 20 3 3 Alarm MOU arnisicnusrnnsemoeocasenneinasiiacscuetessvcaninaasaantiads 3 23 3 26 USB Connectivity acccancccresasencectesneeecteereeeeessetenttuens 3 24 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR seeeesessenesssesereeee 4 1 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test cceeeeeeeesseeeeeees 4 1 dil Test run proced
171. Feedback 100 Te ey 0 Input at terminal 12 OV 10V In this example it is recommended that the dancer reference position be set around the 5 V 50 point PID Display Coefficient and Monitoring To monitor the PID command and its feedback value set the display coefficient to convert the values into easy to understand mnemonic physical quantities such as temperature LL Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details on display coefficients and to E43 for details on monitoring 9 123 J03 to JO6 PID Control P Gain Integral time D Differential time Feedback filter m P gain J03 Data setting range 0 000 to 30 000 times J03 specifies the gain for the PID processor P Proportional action An operation in which the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the deviation is called P action which outputs the MV in proportion to deviation However the MV alone cannot eliminate deviation Gain is data that determines the system response level against the deviation in P action An increase in gain speeds up response but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output A decrease in gain delays response but it stabilizes the inverter output Deviation Time OQ F Ql MV Time E integral time J04 Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 s 0 0 means that the integral component is ineffective J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor Integral
172. Functions Display on read Read data Reads the function code data out of the inverter s memory and stores it into the keypad memory Also reads out inverter s current running status information which can be checked by JAGUAR Loader such as information of I O system alarm and running status Pressing the amp key during a read operation when read is blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays err blinking If this happens the entire contents of the memory of the keypad will be completely cleared CODY Write data Writes data stored in the keypad memory into the inverter s memory If you press the amp key during a write operation when copy is blinking the write operation that is under way will be aborted and err will appear blinking If this happens the contents of the inverter s memory i e function code data have been partly updated and remain partly old Therefore do not operate the inverter Instead perform initialization or rewrite the entire data If this function does not work refer to li If data copying does not work on page 3 22 Pressing the amp key during a verify operation when ueri is blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays err blinking err appears blinking also when the keypad does not contain any valid data ueri Verify data Verifies collates the data stored in the keypad memory with that in the inverter s memory If any mismatch is detected the verify operati
173. Ha6 Reserved oo ooo M fveng ome H87 Reserve owo v l Hee Reserve besss o O vno e Ck e eee le H90 Reserved 9 Pe fe e eee H91 PID Feedback Wire Break Detection a 7 Disable alarm detection yy y n ss x0 1 to 60 0 s H92 Continuity of Running 0 000 to 10 000 times 999 H93 0 010 to 10 000 s 999 fry Y Y N 5 115 eis oe ye fefe yee Y Y1Y2 999 y Y1Y2 99 Y H94 45 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset MUN pe 5 108 in units of 10 hours 5 115 H95 DC Braking 0 Slow N N N 5 49 Braking response mode 1 Quick 5 115 H96 STOP Key Priority Data STOP key priority Start check function UNUN 5 115 Start Check Function Disable Disable 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 10 0 10 for 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above 11 2 for 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable 5 12 2 J Ql s3dOO NOILONNA F codes E codes C codes P codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes Code Drive control Default tti Da vi PG w o w Torque V f PG PG control Data setting range Cc z2 oC Oc G2 E a O H97 Clear Alarm Data 0 Dis
174. ID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 F34 data to 33 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 FO9 Torque Boost 1 H67 Auto Energy Saving Operation Mode selection F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load Specify the torque boost level with F09 in order to assure sufficient starting torque Data for F37 V f pattern Auto energy saving Applicable load Variable torque Variable torque load V f pattern Torque boost General purpose fans and pumps Disable onstant torque loa Linear Constant torque load 2 V f pattern Auto torque boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load 3 Variable torque Variable torque load V f pattern n re General purpose fans and pumps 5 Enable Constant torque load Linear Constant torque load V f pattern Auto torque boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Ifa required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the constant torque it is recommended to Note select the linear V f pattern factory default Cp e Under the vector control with speed sensor F37 is used to specify whether the auto energy saving o
175. Instruction Manual High Performance Multifunction Inverter Jaguar VXG ACAUTION Thank you for purchasing our JAGUAR VXG series of inverters e This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use e Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor e Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded e For how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device IMO Precision Controls Ltd VXG IM V1 Copyright 2009 IMO Precision Controls Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from IMO Precision Controls Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our JAGUAR VXG series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of
176. Logic Input 1 See U01 5 139 U27 Step 6 Input 2 See U02 U28 Logic circuit U20 Type of timer U30 Timer U31 Customizable Logic Input 1 See U01 0 om 0 0 0 00 U32 Step 7 Input 2 Le See U02 U33 Logic circuit co Jyly yly y U34 Type of timer o Ne eee U35 Timer wolve ir U36 Customizable Logic Input 1 o Seeuol o O U37 Step 8 Input 2 o sew U38 Logic circuit NE ey se U39 Type of timer o He el x U40 Timer oo fy v fy y y _ 3 U41 Customizable Logic Input 1 o Seeuol O U42 Step 9 Input 2 o seu _ on U43 Logic circuit fo Jyly yly y U44 Type of timer yyy T c U45 Timer roo vty fyfy vy z U46 Customizable Logic Input 1 o Seeuol O 9 U47 Step 10 Input 2 Po sew 5 U48 Logic circuit fo fytyfy y y Z U49 Type of timer Eee ie ae ee ee O U50 Timer oo fy y fy fy y_ O U71 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 Disable ye oe ve ye Y m Output selection 1 Step 1 output KAK upk Op U72 Customizable Logic Output Signal 2 2 Step 2 output TL Yee y U73 Customizable Logic Output Signal 3 3 Step 3 output fo fytyfy y y U74 Customizable Logic Output Signal 4 4 Step 4 output ee ee ee U75 Customizable Logic Output Signal 5 5 Step 5 output Yo OL yl oe Y Step 6 output Step 7 output Step 8 output 9 Step 1 output 10 Step 10 output ATT U81 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 O 1000 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps Y
177. M port 2 on terminal block and USB port on the keypad face Protection against Upon detection of a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 ms this function stops the momentary power failure inverter output If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function invokes a restart Transistor output process if power is restored within a predetermined period allowable momentary power failure time 8 6 8 3 External Dimensions 8 3 1 Standard models Inverter type VXG _2 AE anas eie Tae aaa 1132 spa att a 150 Dimensions mm H 11 7 195 105 10 18 5 18 5 el 22 10 10 37 115 355 275 270 155 45 740 75 3 90 630 290 880 Ei J oo J N n N Nn N GM O Lo 0 430 680 290 315 1000 1000 970 3 15 sele rl 313 1400 1370 1550 1520 500 amp 0S J Nn N Lo Ww N DN CO Nn O W a Oo 8 7 Unit mm A Grounding terminal 27 8 x 16 mm for input line provided only on the EMC filter built in type of 200 V 400 V class series inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW A OQ gt 0 SNOILVOIlHIOJdS Chapter 9 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 9 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 9 1 1 General Originally the UL standards wer
178. Motoroverloadearlywaning J yo J o o l o f sink overheat early warning oos oO y ee o dao Lifetime alarm a ne Reference command loss detected Pe ee D N 6 15 6 16 6 16 6 16 6 17 6 17 6 17 6 17 6 17 I oO 200 V class series with 37 kW or above BE 18 400 V class series ol L jejejejeje Lje B a a a E a a a E S 6 Lje N 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting A WARNINGA If any of the protective functions has been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Injury may occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems
179. N the inverter uses the reference frequency saved when the key was pressed last E65 Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command setting through terminal 12 C1 or V2 has dropped below 10 of the reference frequency within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency Refer to E20 through E24 and E27 data 33 When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command 5 90 2 F Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m Frequency Command by Analog Input Reference Loss Detected REF OFF Internal Frequency Command In the diagram above fl is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command Data setting range 0 Decelerate to stop 20 to 120 999 Disable Cote Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command An abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the REF OFF signal Reference loss detected to be issued but do
180. N UX for 400 V class series with 75 kW or above The 400 V class series with 75 kW or above is equipped with a set of switching connectors male which should be configured according to the power source voltage and frequency By factory default a jumper female connector is set to U1 If the power supply to the main power inputs L1 R L2 S L3 T or the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 matches the conditions listed below change the jumper to U2 For the switching instructions see Figures 2 6 and 2 7 a VXG176AL 4E to VXG253AL 4E CN UX red CN UX red Connector configuration CN UX red Connector configuration gt E E 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz 380 to 398 V 50 Hz amp Factory default 380 to 430 V 60 Hz Note The allowable power input voltage fluctuation is within 15 to 10 of the power source voltage 2 14 E Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above The standard JAGUAR VXG series accepts DC linked power input in combination with a PWM converter The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above however contain AC driven components such as AC fans To supply AC power to those components exchange the CN R and CN W connectors as shown below and connect the AC power line to the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 For the switching instructions
181. PID command e Manual speed command S58 SS4 Selected frequency command po OFF OFF Other than multi frequency po FF ON C05 Multi frequency 1 po ON OFF CO6 Mullti frequency 2 po ON ON C07 Multi frequency 3 Jogging Frequency H54 H55 Acceleration Deceleration Time Jogging d09 to d13 Speed Control Jogging To jog or inch the motor for positioning a workpiece specify the jogging conditions using the jogging related function codes C20 H54 H55 and d09 through d13 beforehand switch the inverter to the ready for jogging state and then enter a run command mM Switching to the ready for jogging state Turning ON the Ready for jogging terminal command JOG Function code data 10 readies the inverter for jogging Cote e The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped e When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 simultaneous keying S9 A keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command Pressing these keys toggles between the normal operation and ready for jogging E Starting jogging operation Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging In jogging with the key the inverter jogs only when the key is held down Releasing the key decelerates to stop Note TO start jogging operation by simultaneously entering the JOG terminal command and a run comman
182. T Medium Duty mode Medium load In the MT VT mode the continuous current rating allows the inverter to drive a motor with one or two ranks higher capacity but the overload capability against the continuous current rating is lower than that of the CT mode For Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is the same as the inverter s Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is one or two ranks higher than the inverter s Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is one rank higher than the inverter s the rated current level see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS The MT and VT mode inverters are subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and internal processing as listed below DC braking 1 Setting range 0 to 7 Braking level 100 Setting range 0 to 80 Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz 0 4 to 55 kW 0 75 to 10 kHz 75 to 400 kW 0 75 to 6 kHz 500 and 630 kW Motor sound Carrier frequency Current limiter ips ee Level Initial value 160 Setting range 25 to 500 Hz Upper limit 500 Hz Maximum frequency Current Based on the rated indication and output mode current level for CT Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz 5 5 to 18 5 kW 0 75 to 10 kHz 22 to 55 kW 0 75 to 6 kHz 75 to 500 kW 0 75 to 4 kHz 630 kW Setting range 0 75 to 2 kHz 90 to 400 kW Initial value 145 Initial value 130 Setting range 25 to 500 Hz Upper limit 120 Hz
183. VR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Torque Boost 4 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to r03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 4 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Protection for Motor 4 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilate d motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Thermal time constant r04 Maximum Output Voltage 4 r05 r06 rO7 Overload detection level r08 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes Torque control Refer to page 5 117 2 J D Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m F codes E codes C codes P codes H codes
184. Vector control with speed sensor This control requires an optional PG pulse generator and an optional PG interface card to be mounted on a motor shaft and an inverter respectively The inverter detects the motor s rotational position and speed from PG feedback signals and uses them for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants and using the speed regulator PI controller This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector control without speed sensor Since slip compensation dynamic torque vector control and vector control without with speed sensor use motor parameters the following conditions should be satisfied otherwise full control performance may not be obtained Note e A single motor should be controlled per inverter e Motor parameters P02 P03 P06 to P23 P55 and P56 are properly configured Or auto tuning P04 is performed e The capacity of the motor to be controlled should be two or more ranks lower than that of the inverter under the dynamic torque vector control it should be the same as the inverter under the vector control without with speed sensor Otherwise the inverter may not control the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution e The wiring distanc
185. X terminal requency setting E T Ys5Al Oto 10VDC gt function l S Transistor outputs 9 Current input for y n a 1C1 nen Y4 K frequency setting T O Y31 i Motor overload early warning 4to20mADC gt T seer 3 A PTC NTC A y Y Frequency speed detected Sw5 11 V1 0 Frequency speed arrival lt _lemy Inverter running 24 vpe ov Common terminal sess 11 PLE Enable input L _ 4 REN o l Safety switch 2o FMI I aun 4 to20 I 7 mA DC Swe 11 Analog frequency 11 meter p a 1 JPLC l ro I isw Wie l Digital input i SOURCE Analog frequency fy 11 meter f Run forward command E RA Del acess Run reverse command F DS if Dx J a Data transmission a SW2 SD Select multi frequency 0 to 1 step Select multi frequency 0 to 3 step Select multi frequency 0 to 7 step Select multi frequency 0 to 15 step Select ACC DEC time 2 steps Select ACC DEC time 4 steps U Reset alarm DAR Dmamnit Braking Rlesesior DCR DG Reactor RCD Residual turrent operated peche davece ELCH Earth Leakage Carcuil Breaker Mi Magnelit Contactor MCCB i Mokied Case Circul Breaker RS 485 COM port 1 RJ45 conec for keypad RS 485 COM port 2 TB USE connector 2 4 t3 6 aT 8 i 10 1 12 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or
186. Y Y Function selection 1 1001 Yy ly D U82 Customizable Logic Output Signal 2 yY Y U83 Customizable Logic Output Signal 3 yY Y U84 Customizable Logic Output Signal 4 y fly Y U85 Customizable Logic Output Signal 5 5 1005 Select ACC DEC time 4 steps RT2 y y Y Enable 3 wire operation HD 1 T ylylyl yl yY Coast to a stop Y Y Y Reset alarm YY Y Enable external alarm trip THR YY Y F codes POSE aa a E ae oc ceaann 0 1010 Ready for jogging OG r E codes Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz7 Y Y Y Y N 2 1012 Select motor wT eE Toi 3 ______ Enable DC braking DCBRK _ Y y y y on 4 1014 Select torque limiter level 21 Team Jo Ty vy Ty Dy P codes 5 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz __ SW50 _ Y yun on ANN Switch to commercial power 60 Hz __ sw69 ty TY TN TN ON H codes UP Increase output frequency UP sn We ae ee a Ue N E 1018 DOWN Becrease output requeney Down A ER ae 0 1020 Cancel PID control H2 PID Y y y y on 1 1021 _ Switch normalfinverse operation v9 v fy Ty Py oN b codes 2 1022 Interlock Mi ahaa 3 1023 Canceltorque control H2TRQ NN INN TY r codes Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus LE 5 1025 Universal UN es Enable auto search for idling motor fo ae speedatstarting _______________ STM O pOROS Force to stop stoa Iyfylylyly 30 Active OFF 1030 Active ON y codes 5 22 Driv
187. a Copying 7cpy on the function selection menu in Programming mode 2 When the cpy is displayed holding the amp key down for at least 5 seconds alternates data protection status between enabled or disabled Note For switching the data protection status be sure to hold the es key down for at least 5 seconds Once the key is released within 5 seconds press the amp key to go back to the cpy display and perform the keying operation again e Enabling the disabled data protection Hold key down for at least 5 seconds Displayed item changes read gt proT While cpy is displayed holding down the G amp key for at least 5 seconds shows read for 5 seconds and then switches to proT enabling the data protection e Disabling the enabled data protection Hold key down for at least 5 seconds Displayed item changes proT gt read While 7 cpy is displayed holding down the 5 key for at least 5 seconds shows proT for 5 seconds and then switches to read disabling the data protection The followings are restrictions and special notes concerning Data Copying E f data copying does not work Check whether err or cper is blinking 1 If erris blinking a write error any of the following problems has arisen e No data exists in the keypad memory No data read operation has been performed since shipment or a data read operation has been aborted e Data stored in the keypad memory contains any error
188. a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for 7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 8 The analog input monitor can appear only when the analog input monitor function is assigned to any of the analog input terminals by any of function codes E61 to E63 20 Q Qappears under the V f control 0 0 CAEN A _ Motor output in kW 16 0 0 J gt N S Function code E42 LED display filter allows you to filter the monitoring signals for the monitor items such as output frequency and output current Increase the E42 data if the monitored values are unstable and unreadable due to fluctuation of load Tip 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms The JAGUAR VXG identifies abnormal states in two categories Heavy alarm and Light alarm If the former occurs the inverter immediately trips if the latter occurs the inverter shows the a on the LED monitor and blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED but it continues to run without tripping Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm Light alarm object should be defined with function codes H81 and H82 beforehand Assigning the LALM signal to any one of the digital output terminals with any of function codes E20 to E24 and E27 98 enables the inverter to output the LALM
189. a ag ya aie ae ae parts etc If the slider is in an ambiguous position the circuit is unclear whether it is turned ON or OFF and the digital input remains in an undefined state Be sure to place the slider so that it contacts either side of the switch 2 25 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad You can mount a keypad on the panel wall or install one at a remote site e g for operation on hand RJ 45 connectors Panel gt 73 D z NO Keypad fixing screws Inverter Keypad rear Remote operation extension cable Figure 2 21 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall To mount install a keypad on a place other than in an inverter the parts listed below are needed Extension cable Note 1 JAGLEADIM 2M 3M 3 types available in length of 1 m 2 m and 3 m M3 x O Note 2 Two screws needed Purchase off the shelf ones separately Note 1 When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 1 OBASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant with US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer Sanwa Supply Inc Model KB 10T5 01K 1 m KB STP O1K 1 m Shielded LAN cable Note 2 When mounting on a panel wall use the screws with a length suitable for the wall thickness Depth of the screw holes on the keypad is 11 mm YSLYSAN I AHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW E Removing and mounting a keypad To remove the keypad pull it toward you while holding down the hook pointed by the
190. able C function code P03 E46 Language selection 5 7 Drive control Default Refer to tti page A S Vik PG w o w Torque V f PG PG control Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding 5 67 function to terminals FWD and REV as listed below 5 92 E98 Terminal FWD Function Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps E99 Terminal REV Function Code Data setting range Change when running Data copying lt i lt ix lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ZZ Select multi frequency 0 to 7 steps Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps Select ACC DEC time 2 steps Select ACC DEC time 4 steps Enable 3 wire operation Coast to a stop Reset alarm Enable external alarm trip 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON Ready for jogging Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz7 Select motor 2 M2 Enable DC braking DCBRK Select torque limiter level 2 1 TL2 TL1 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz SW60 UP Increase output frequency DOWN Decrease output frequency Enable data change with keypad WE KP Cancel PID control Hz PID Switch normal inverse operation IVS Interlock IL Cancel torque control Hz TRQ Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus LE Universal DI U DI Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Force to stop STOP 30 Active OFF
191. able YJ Y 1 Enable Setting 1 clears alarm data and then returns to H98 Protection Maintenance Function 0 to 255 Display data in decimal format Mode selection Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Detect input phase loss 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Detect output phase loss 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 Factory default level 1 User setup level Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Detect DC fan lock 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Detect braking transistor error for 22 kW or below 0 Disabled 1 Enabled gt Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure 0 IP20 1 IP40 A codes Motor 2 Parameters Code Drive control Vit PG w o w Torque V f_ PG PG control Name Data setting range D Z 5 pe Data copying c ab Pa 0 D 4 O AOT Maximum Frequency soosoo n PP PV Ate BaseFrewengy2 soosoo frf A03 A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10 A11 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage N Y2 YJ Y Y 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled vol
192. ad Instruction Manual Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Item LED Monitor Keys Functions and LED Indicators Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes E In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency current LED nn and voltage Monitor When a light alarm occurs a is displayed E In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data E In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor when the protective function is activated QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode E In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operations you want to do in each mode as follows E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc When a light alarm is displayed holding down this key resets the light alarm and switches back to Running mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code or establishes the data entered with N and keys E In Alarm mode Pressing this key d
193. ader via the RS 485 communications link no setting 1s required since Loader automatically sets 8 bits The same applies to the Modbus RTU protocol m Parity check y06 for port 1 and y16 for port 2 y06 or y16 specifies the property of the parity bit Data for y06 and y16 For JAGUAR Loader no setting is required since Loader SO None automatically sets the even parity 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 5 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU Stop bits y07 for port 1 and y17 for port 2 y07 or y17 specifies the number of stop bits Data for y07 and y17 Stop bit s For JAGUAR Loader no setting is required since Loader Po its S automatically sets 1 bit For the Modbus RTU protocol no setting is required since the stop bits are automatically determined associated with the property of parity bits m No response error detection time y08 for port 1 and y18 for port 2 y08 or y18 specifies the time interval from when the inverter Data for y08 and y18 detects no access until it enters communications error alarm i No detection mode due to network failure and processes the I to 60 Labis communications error This applies to a mechanical system that always accesses its station within a predetermined interval during communications using the RS 485 communications link For the processing of communications errors refer to y02 and y12 E Response interva
194. ailure Problem The circuit that detects the status of the enable circuit safety stop circuit is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Circuit related to the Enable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct circuit affected by strong grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit electrical noise wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible Note The Reset alarm terminal command RST cannot reset this alarm ec If even a power off reset cannot restore the inverter state the inverter needs to be repaired 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication a on the LED monitor In addition to the indication a the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the light alarm signal L ALM to a digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 through E24 and E27 to 98 Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as light alarm The available light alarm codes are check ma
195. air intake Otherwise a fire or accident could occur Figure 2 2 External Cooling dJLHYJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW 2 2 To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above change the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as shown in Figure 2 3 Screws differ in size and count for each inverter Refer to the table below Table 2 4 Screw Size Count and Tightening Torque Tightening RE Base fixing screw Case fixing screw torque yp Screw size and q ty Screw size and q ty Nin VXGI146AL 2 VXG180AL 2 M6 x 20 M6 x 20 VXG75SAL 4E to VXGI50AL 4E Desar Ue ere 2 pcs for upper side 3 pcs for lower side VXG215AL 2 VXG283AL 2 M6 x 20 M6 x 12 VXGI176AL 4E 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 pcs for upper side VXG350AL 2 M5 x12 M5 x 12 VXG210AL 4E VXG253AL 4E 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side VXG304AL 4E VXG377AL 4E MP 16 ee 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side VXG400AL 2 MS x 16 M5 x 16 VXG415AL 4E VXGS20AL 4E 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs for upper side M5 x 16 M5 x 16 VXG650AL 4E VXG740AL 4E 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides VXG840AL 4E VXG960AL 4E M6 x 20 M6 x 20 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides M8 x 20 M8 x 20 VXGIL70AL 4E VXG1370AL 4E 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs each for upp
196. al negative logic Problem Temperature inside the inverter has exceeded the allowable limit Possible Causes 1 The surrounding temperature exceeded the inverter s specification limit What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the surrounding temperature gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted 10 044 Motor protection PTC NTC thermistor Problem Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The temperature around the motor exceeded the motor s specification range Cooling system for the motor defective Overload The activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was set inadequately Settings for the PTC NTC thermistor are improper Excessive torque boost specified F09 The V f pattern did not match the motor Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the motor gt Lower the temperature Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the heat sink overheat early warning E01 through E07 or the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends
197. alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode E Braking transistor broken DBAL Function code data 105 If the inverter detects a breakdown of the braking transistor it issues the braking transistor alarm dba and also the output signal DBAL Detection of braking transistor broken can be cancelled by H98 200 V class series 400 V class series 22 kW or below EJ Refer to the description of H98 TA Breakdown of the braking transistor could lead to the secondary breakdown of the braking resistor and inverter s internal units Use this output signal DBAL to detect abnormal operation of the built in braking transistor and to cut off power to the magnetic contactor in inverter primary circuits for preventing spread of the damage 5 81 E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width a a Operating condition 1 Operating condition 2 Both signals come ON when the FAR always goes OFF when run commands are difference between the output OFF or the reference speed is 0 frequency estimated detected speed When run commands are OFF the reference and the reference frequency reference speed is regarded as 0 so FAR3 comes ON speed comes within the frequency when the output frequency estimated detected arrival hysteresis width specified by speed is within the range of 0 the frequency E30 arrival hysteresis width specified by E
198. alculated value Input power OHzOAMkW k Input power to the inverter PID command feedback amount transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g PID e p4 O HzO AO kW PID feedback ei O HzO AO kW PID output in as the maximum dis a ee cca frequency F03 being at 100 in 0 Load factor 6 O HzO AO kW al a in as the rated i temperature Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details N suitable for a desired scale Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details An analog input to the inverter in a format Analog input D 39700 O He OOAO kw Torque current 9 4s OWe DAUkwW Torque current command value or 73 calculated torque current O Hz O A O kW Magnetic flux command value 24 command 9 Input watt h kWh pnt CHAD W iewn petwatt hour GW 05 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed as is on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so the LED monitor displays one tenth of the actual value with the x10 LED lit 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter u in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter drives the motor under the PID control specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays
199. alues For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Function Factory default d Name Function code data COUE VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series Base frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz x Rated voltage 200 V class series 400 V class series at base frequency 1 ee 220 V 400 V printed on the nameplate of the ae cae ty motor Nominal applied motor capacity ee ae Rated current of nominal applied motor x i 200 V class series 400 V class series f 03 Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz F 07 Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer Deceleration time 1 than your machinery design values If 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data Note of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the situation of the machinery and select Tuning with the motor stopped
200. amming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display I O Checking 47_o 3 Press the G3 key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g 4_00 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired I O check item then press the 9 key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 4 00 or 4 01 using the W and keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 12 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 13 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 11 I O Check Items shows Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details I O signals on the control circuit 4 00 terminals Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a I O signals on the control circuit command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to 4 01 terminals under communications E Displaying control I O signal terminals and control E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details Shows the ad voltage on terminal Meh in volts ace Shows the output voltage on terminal FM1 in volts V Shows the output voltage on terminal FM2 in volts V Shows the input voltage on terminal V2 in vo
201. ance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Shift to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 Cnote If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Remove the factor of the failure and conduct the measurement again Hereafter each time the inverter is turned OFF it automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor if the above conditions are met Periodically check the relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor with Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode Cnote The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 the inverter can issue an early warning of lifetime alarm LIFE at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 to Y4 and the relay contact terminals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C as soon as any of the levels specified in Table 7 3 has been exceeded The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan provided on 200 V class series inverters
202. and is Input procedures of run commands from keypad 0 Enable fuy amp 0 keys on keypad Pressing the foy key runs the motor in the direction specified by command Motor rotational direction from digital FWD or REV assigned to terminal FWD or REV respectively terminals FWD REV Pressing the key stops the motor 1 Enable terminal command FWD REV Pressing the fuy key runs the motor in the forward direction only Pressing the amp key stops the motor A ADI O EOE ypa Eoad No specification of the motor rotational direction is required Pressing the fuy key runs the motor in the reverse direction only Pressing 3 Enable vy 6 keys on keypad Reverse the amp key stops the motor No specification of the motor rotational direction is required Switching between remote and local modes The remote and local modes can be switched by a digital input signal provided from the outside of the inverter To enable the switching you need to assign LOC as a digital input signal to any of terminals X1 to X7 by setting 35 to any of E01 to E07 E98 and E99 Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the frequency settings used in remote mode If the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local the run command will be automatically turned ON so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over If however there is a discrepancy between the settings used in remote mode and ones made
203. and must be observed at all times Application A WARNING e The JAGUAR VXG is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur e The JAGUAR VXG may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety e Though the JAGUAR VXG is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation AWARNING e Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur e Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire e Inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above whose protective structure is IP00 involve a possibility that a human body may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block Inverters to which an optional DC reactor is connected also involve the same Install such inverters in an inaccessible place Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur ACAUTION Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries e Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink e When chang
204. and saving function code data when the inverter is runnin Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when running Validating and saving function code data If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with and V keys the change will immediately take effect however the change 1s not saved into the y Possible inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with and keys Y Possible the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory imosble OOOO a E Copying data The keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given on the foll
205. are short circuited with each other using a jumper wire disabling this function To enable it be sure to remove the jumper wire For details of connection to this terminal and precautions refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 lt Terminal EN circuit specification gt lt Control circuit gt PLC 24 VDC Ppt Operating voltage SOURCE Operating current at ON Allowable leakage curentat OFF 05mA O PLC PLC signal 1 Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC Maximum 100 mA DC 2 This terminal also supplies a power to the load connected to the transistor output terminals Refer to Transistor output described later in this table for more CM Digital input Two common terminals for digital input signals common These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY E Using a relay contact to turn X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 14 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a high quality relay 2 gt 73 D z NO dJLHJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW power gt Q E t A lt Control circuit gt lt Control
206. arly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Implement any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage Connect a surge suppressor unit at the motor terminal Connect an output circuit filter to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less 6 When an output circuit filter is inserted in the secondary circuit or the wiring between the inverter and the motor is long a voltage loss occurs due to reactance of the filter or wiring so that the insufficient voltage may cause output current oscillation or a lack of motor output torque To avoid it select the constant torque load by setting the function code F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 to 1 and keep the inverter output voltage at a higher level by configuring H50 H52 Non linear V f Pattern Frequency and H51 H53 Non linear V f Pattern Voltage E Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment 1 Phase advancing capacitors for power factor correction Do not mount a phase advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter s input primary or output secondary circuit Mounting it in the input primary circuit takes no effect To correct the inverter power factor use an optional DC reactor DCR Mounting it in the output secondar
207. arm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the amp key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the N key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 16 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the amp key while the running status information is displayed returns to the alarm code display note When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the amp key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time E Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data Figure 3 7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Alarm occurs DItO 3rd last alarm code E g 3g it Item Switching at approx Output frequency Current alarm code AnA 1 second intervals EAA Coit TIL Lit E g OL l i 7 Item Switching at approx
208. arm and Light alarm If the former occurs the inverter immediately trips if the latter occurs the inverter shows the a on the LED monitor and blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED but it continues to run without tripping Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm Light alarm object should be defined with function codes H81 and H82 beforehand Assigning the LALM signal to any one of the digital output terminals with any of function codes E20 to E24 and E27 98 enables the inverter to output the LALM signal on that terminal upon occurrence of a light alarm For details of the light alarm objects refer to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6 1 E How to check a light alarm factor When a light alarm occurs a appears on the LED monitor To check the current light alarm factor enter Programming mode by pressing the amp key and select 5_56 on Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms 5_ 37 last to 5_39 3rd last For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information refer to Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information E How to remove the current light alarm After checking the current light alarm factor to switch the LED monitor back to the running status display e g output frequency from the a indication press the amp key in Running mode If the light alarm factor has been removed the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking and the
209. ary side to terminals RO and TO Connecting its input primary side to those terminals causes the RCD ELCB to malfunction since the input power voltage to the inverter is three phase but the one to terminals RO and TO is single phase To avoid such problems be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown in Figure 2 8 Residual current operated protectice devide P1 Earth leakage AC reactor circuit breaker Radio noise filter Magnetic Power supply Noise filter contactor ae 4 a gt y S y ae aa ik os e i ae Insulation YE amp na i transformer P TEE EE E E ene FRO iTO EaR O DC DC inverter control Magnetic contactor z Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 8 Connection Example of Residual current operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB 2 16 2 gt 73 D z NO dJLHJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW Note When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter do not connect the power supply line directly to terminals RO and TO If a PWM is to be connected insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor at the power supply side For connection examples at the PWM converter side refer to the PWM Converter Instruction Manual MoO case druit Weaker Resldual cument operated protectice device Magnetic Filter Boost Eanh leakage circuit breaker eanlactor reactor react
210. ary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Since using an MCCB or RCD ELCB with a lager capacity than recommended ones breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system be sure to select recommended ones Also select ones with short circuit breaking capacity suitable for the power source impedance Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB and Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB Nominal Rated current of Nominal CT Rated current of applied MCCB and applied MT MCCB and RCD ELCB A Inverter type VT RCD ELCB A 5 VXG3A 2 VXG37AL 4E 5 18 5 40 75 VXG5A 2 VXG8A 2 i n s VXGI8A2 VXG30AL 2 7 VXG75AL 4E 125 VXG46AL 2 1 VXG9I1AL 4E 100 AT o Siw VT 11 0 vxqs9aL2 T 15 a 75 125 VXG112AL 4E oe VXG74AL2 18 5 150 N N Three phase 200 V oe 22 VT VXG88AL 2 VXG210AL 4E MT VT 30 CT 150 200 VXG88AL 2 100 VXG176AL 4E VXG146AL 2 VXG253AL 4E VXG150AL 4E 175 250 VXG180AL 2 Nn VXG304AL 4E SN VXG377AL 4E 200 300 VXG215AL 2 CT 250 350 VXG283AL 2 VXG400AL 2 VXG650AL 4E Nominal Rated current of VXG740AL 4E VXG415AL 4E Three phase 400 V VXG520AL 4E l MCCB and applied Inverter type RCD ELCB A VXG650AL 4E VT mode VXGEAOALAE Si aaa bestel amit a VXG5 5A 4E VXG840AL 4E VXG9A 4E VXG9I60AL 4E VXGI16A5L 4E 11 Nn Three phase 400 V VXG1170AL 4E VXG23AL 4E VXG1370AL 4 VXG30A5L 4E VT
211. ase input inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the screws on the main power input terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Increase the inverter capacity Measure the ripple wave of the DC link bus voltage gt Ifthe ripple is large increase the inverter capacity Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power The JAGUAR VXG of three phase input cannot be driven by single phase power CNote The input phase loss protection can be disabled with the function code H98 Protection Maintenance Function 6 0p Output phase loss Problem Output phase loss occurred Possible Causes 1 Inverter output wires are broken 2 The motor winding is broken 3 The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough 4 A single phase motor has been connected 7 0h1 Heat sink overheat What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires Measure the output current gt Replace the motor Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the JAGUAR VXG only drives three phase induction motors Problem Temperature around heat sink has
212. ase the value of the torque boost F09 Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the external frequency command potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the TL2 TL1 terminal command Select torque limiter level 2 1 is correct gt Correct the data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory defaults gt Set the TL2 TL1 correctly gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 Check the terminal commands RT7 and R72 for acceleration deceleration times gt Correct the RTI and R72 settings 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F14 is either 0 1 or 2 2 The run command remains OFF even after the power has been restored What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip u occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 3 4 or 5 Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad
213. asing the motor rotation Under V f control with speed sensor the inverter detects the motor rotation using the encoder mounted on the motor shaft and compensates for the decrease in slip frequency by the PI control to match the motor rotation with the commanded speed This improves the motor speed control accuracy E Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor The difference from the V f control with speed sensor stated above is to calculate the motor torque for the load applied and use it to optimize the voltage and current vector output for getting the maximal torque out of a motor This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuations and the motor speed control accuracy E Vector control without speed sensor This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter s output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control In addition 1t decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of those components in vector No PG pulse generator interface card is required It is possible to obtain the desired response by adjusting the control constants PI constants using the speed regulator PI controller Since this control controls the motor current it is necessary to secure some voltage margin between the voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor by keeping the former lower t
214. at the torque command is 100 100 torque output of each inverter capacity when the speed deviation reference speed actual speed is 100 equivalent to the maximum speed Determine the P gain according to moment of inertia of machinery loaded to the motor output shaft Larger moment of inertia needs larger P gain to keep the flat response in whole operations Specifying a larger P gain improves the quickness of control response but may cause a motor speed overshooting or hunting undesirable oscillation of the system Moreover mechanical resonance or vibration sound on the machine or motor could occur due to excessively amplified noises If it happens decreasing P gain will reduce the amplitude of the resonance Vvibration A too small P gain results in a slow inverter response and a speed fluctuation in low frequency which may prolong the time required for stabilizing the motor speed Integral time Specifying a shorter integral time shortens the time needed to compensate the speed deviation resulting in quick response in speed Specify a short integral time if quick arrival to the target speed is necessary and a slight overshooting in the control is allowed specify a long time if any overshooting is not allowed and taking longer time is allowed If a mechanical resonance occurs and the motor or gears sound abnormally setting a longer integral time can transfer the resonance point to the low frequency zone and suppress the resonance in t
215. ates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the next page For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above the mass is printed on the main nameplate Jaguar a VAG 60AL EMES TYPE _VXG30AL 2E_ CCC Duty Low Du CT rating VT rating A meia 0 4kW 7 Integrated EMC filter 0 75kW OUTPUT 3PH 200 240 0 1 500Hz 1 5kW VKA A p AIN erh ai GA eNA Tmin 2 2kW Input voltage 200v 3ph SCCR 100k 639 4 OkW Input voltage 400v 3ph Ree 5 5KW 7 5KW 7 5KW 11kW 11kW 15KW E EET ME ee oe RR i uly edium y a SOURCE 3PH 380 440V S5OHz 380 480V 60Hz 201A 238A 238A AU SAL OUTPUT 3PH 380 480V 37KW 45kW 0 1 500Hz 0 1 120Hz 0 1 120Hz 45kW dokW 160KVA 210A 192kVA 253A 192kVA 253A 55kW 75kW 150 1min 150 1min 120 1min 75kW 90kW SERNo 81A123A0001Z 801 SCCR 100kA 90KW 110kW C Odes usro pg MASS 64kg 110kW 132kW ENa 8 NO CONT EO ep na ae ee es 160kW 200kW 377AL 200kW 220kW 415AL 220KW 280KW 520AL TYPE VXG253AL4E 280kW 315kW 650AL SER No 81A123A0001Z 315kW 355kW 740AL 355kW 400kW 840AL 400kW 500kW 960AL 500kW 630kW 1170AL 630W 710kW 1370AL Note In tables given in this manual inverter types are denoted as VXG The JAGUAR VXG is available in two or three drive modes depending upon the inverter capacity Constant Torque CT and Variable Torque VT modes or Constant Torque CT Medium Torque MT and Variable Torque VT modes One of these modes should be selected to match the load proper
216. atings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them LL For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting i Fact faul code VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E x 200 V class series 400 V class series Base frequency 1 Motermtnas 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz printed on the nameplate of the 200 V class series Rated voltage at base motor 220 V 400 V class series f U5 frequency SOON 0 Motor characteristics 0 Standard motors 0 Motor characteristics 0 p II Motor d Segen 3 Motor characteristics 3 Standard motors Standard motors a Capacity of motor connected Nominal applied motor capacity 200 V class series 400 V class series Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 07 Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer Deceleration time 1 than your machinery epee ae aia 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the motor parameters P01 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 2 F es P YOLOW 3HL ONINNOAY Note When acc
217. atus in Table 3 13 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 11 I O Check Items shows Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details I O signals on the control circuit 4 00 terminals Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a I O signals on the control circuit command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to 4 01 terminals under communications E Displaying control I O signal terminals and control E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details Shows the ad voltage on terminal Meh in volts ace Shows the output voltage on terminal FM1 in volts V Shows the output voltage on terminal FM2 in volts V Shows the input voltage on terminal V2 in volts V Shows the output current on terminal FM1 in milliamperes mA Shows the output current on terminal FM2 in milliamperes mA Oaa sonal tsa ical Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on the digital input P and output interface cards options Refer to E Displaying control I O I O ana signal terminals on options on page 3 14 for details Terminal X7 pulse input monitor Shows the pulse rate of the pulse train signal on terminal X7 PG pulse rate 4 15 A B phase signal
218. bol func a 0 1000 l Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps Y C05 to C19 F07 F08 B10 to Bis 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation AED YY YY Y YY FOR 7 1007 Coasttoastp BX CUT TY TY TY TY 8 1008 Resetalarm RST LY TY LY LY TY 1009 9 Enableexternal alarm trip TAR CUT YT YL YT YY C20 1010 Ready for jogging Y H54 H55 d09 to d13 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Hz HzI Y Y Y Y N F01 C30 12 1012 Select motor m Ss py py yy faa s enabie DC braking peerk Y PY PY LYN Foor F40 F41 Oon 1014 Select torque limiter level 2 1 TL2 TL1 xyi yj x E16 E17 15 __ Switch to commercial power 50Hz SW50_ _ Y Y N N N 16 _ Switch to commercial power 60 Hz SW60 _ Y Y N N N 17 1017 _ UP ncrease output frequency UP Y Y N Frequency command 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP__ V V VY v Fo 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID oe o a 1021 Switch normal inverse operation C53 JOI 1022 P H TRO EJEDES es mmm Enable communications link via RS 485 1025 _ Universal DI a e speed at starting 5 67 Function Function code data data Drive Drivecontrl Terminal commands assigned Symbol PG Drive control _ w IT Related Active ON Active OFF Vif TdUS function codes V PG PG control Coa oa Peec O aame NNN LY NOS a 1033 Reset PID integral and diffe
219. braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring the function code data When using any non Fuji braking resistor inquire of the resistor manufacturer about the resistor rating and then configure the related function codes The calculation procedures for the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor differ depending on the application of the braking load as shown below Applying braking load during deceleration In usual deceleration the braking load decreases as the speed slows down In the deceleration with constant torque the braking load decreases in proportion to the speed Use Expressions 1 and 3 given below Applying braking load during running at a constant speed Different from during deceleration in applications where the braking load is externally applied during running at a constant speed the braking load is constant Use Expressions 2 and 4 given below Braking load kW Braking load kW Time Time Applying braking load during deceleration Applying braking load during running at a constant speed E Discharging capability F50 The discharging capability refers to kWs allowable for a single braking cycle which is obtained based on the braking time and the motor rated capacity Data for F50 To be applied to the braking resistor built in type i 1 to 9000 to 9000 kWs D
220. built in EMC filter becomes compliant with these EMC Directives CAUTION The EMC filter built in type of the IMO inverters is categorized as Category C3 of the EN61800 3 It is not designed for use in a domestic environment It may interfere with the operations of home appliances or office equipment due to noise emitted from it 9 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 9 3 1 General The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer For this reason IMO s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above use the EMC filter built in type of inverters or the combination of the basic type of inverters that have no built in EMC filter and an external filter option dedicated to IMO inverters In either case mount inverters in accordance with the installation procedure given below To ensure the compliance it is recommended that inverters be
221. ccelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 160 s Deceleration time After the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 20 to 30 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning OQ F D ies iN YOLOW AHL ONINNOAY Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad aed nee ee ee pannen ere Approx 50 of the base frequency ACC 4 DEC gt ACC a DEC gt Tuning operation The default value of the speed regulator is set low to prevent your system from oscillation hunting However hunting may occur during tuning due to machinery related conditions causing a tuning error er7 or a speed mismatch error ere If a tuning error er7 occurs reduce the gain for the speed regulator if a speed mismatch error ere occurs cancel the speed mismatch detection function d23 0 After that perform tuning again Note E f tuning while the motor is ro
222. ce frequency reaches the bottom of the jump frequency band the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency When the reference frequency exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency band the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference frequency When you are decreasing the reference frequency the situation will be reversed When more than two jump frequency bands overlap the inverter actually takes the lowest frequency within the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper limit Refer to the figure on the lower right Internal reference Internal reference frequency frequency Jump frequency Band C04 Actual Jump 4 Ju Jump frequency Band frequency 3 pE Ban mn Jump E f va vs coy 2 frequency Jump frequency 2 02 Band C02 Jump frequency 1 C04 CO ae frequency 1 C01 Reference frequency Reference frequency m Jump frequencies 1 2 and 3 C01 C02 and C03 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Specify the center of the jump frequency band Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band E Jump frequency hysteresis width C04 Data setting range 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Specify the jump frequency hysteresis width Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band C05 to C19 Multi frequency 1 to 15 E These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 15 Turning termina
223. ce the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it may cause a delay in control 2 Tf you need a quick response current limiting also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 e fan excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm 0u When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load e The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters e The vector control itself contains the current control system so it disables the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 as well as automatically disabling the instantaneous overcurrent limiting specified by H12 Accordingly the inverter causes an overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level F50 to F52 Electronic Thermal Overload Pro
224. cess output Lower limit of PID process output The upper and lower limiters can be specified to the PID output exclusively used for PID control The settings are ignored when PID cancel is enabled and the inverter is operated at the reference frequency previously specified LL E01 to E07 data 20 m PID Control Upper limit of PID process output J18 J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter High F15 will serve as the upper limit mE PID Control Lower limit of PID process output J19 J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter Low F16 will serve as the lower limit J21 Dew Condensation Prevention Duty When the inverter is stopped dew condensation on the motor can be prevented by feeding DC power to the motor at regular intervals to keep the temperature of the motor above a certain level E Enabling Dew Condensation Prevention To utilize this feature you need to assign the terminal command DWP Protect motor from dew condensation to one of the general purpose digital input terminals H E01 to E07 data 39 5 128 mE Dew Condensation Prevention Duty J21 The magnitude of the DC power applied to the motor is the same as the setting of F21 DC braking 1 Braking level and its duration of each interval is the same as the setting of F2
225. ch as load fluctuations and the motor speed control accuracy E Vector control without speed sensor This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter s output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of those components in vector No PG pulse generator interface card is required It is possible to obtain the desired response by adjusting the control constants PI constants using the speed regulator PI controller Since this control controls the motor current it is necessary to secure some voltage margin between the voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor by keeping the former lower than the latter Although the voltage of the general purpose motor has usually been adjusted to match the commercial power keeping the motor terminal voltage low is necessary in order to secure the voltage margin If the motor is driven under this control with the motor terminal voltage being kept low however the rated torque cannot be obtained even when the rated current originally specified for the motor is applied To secure the rated torque therefore it is necessary to use a motor with higher rated current This also applies to the vector control with speed sensor This control is not available in MT mode inverters so do not set F42 data to 5 for those inverters E
226. cial motors When using special motors note the followings E Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance E Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Decrease the thermal time constant of the electronic thermal overload protection to match the motor rating E Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for braking must be supplied from the inverter input primary circuit If the power supply for braking is mistakenly connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the brake may not work when the inverter output is shut down Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes E Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation E Synchronous motors It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your IMO representative for details E Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation E High speed motors If th
227. circuit gt X1 to X7 Photocoupler En a an E a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 14 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact m Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 15 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal X1 to X7 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC 2 20 Digital input Analog output Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Symbol Name Functions lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt Photocoupler a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 15 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide
228. city of the motor is three or more ranks lower or two or more ranks higher than that of the inverter gt Replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 gt Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation P04 1 gt Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation P04 2 or 3 For details of tuning errors refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt E Tuning errors Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 25 er8 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 erp RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Problem A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Communications conditions of the inverter do not match that of the host equipment Even though no response error detection time y08 y18 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle The host equipment did not operate due to defective software settings or defective hardware The RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Broken
229. codes Vif control Torque Limiter 1 1 Y im 76 H Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Terminal 12 Extended Function E61 to E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function Terminal V2 Extended Function E Torque Limiter Control target H74 Under vector control the inverter can limit motor generating torque or output power as well as a torque current default Data for H74 Control target G Motor generating torque limit 4 Torque current limit 7 Analog torque limit value A 8 Analog torque limit value B 1 Output power limit Torque Torque pattern when the torque asia 100 rating current limit is 100 rating Torque pattern when the torque limit is 50 rating Torque pattern when the E E 50 rating power limit is 50 rating Speed 100 rating 200 rating 5 59 Torque Limiter Target quadrants H75 H75 selects the configuration of target quadrants Drive brake Forward reverse rotation in which the specified torque limiter s is activated from Drive brake torque limit Same torque limit for all four quadrants and Upper lower torque limits shown in the table below Data for H75 Target quadrants 0 Drive brake Torque limiter A applies to driving both of forward and reverse and torque limiter B to braking both of forward and reverse Second quadrant First quadrant Reverse braking Forward driving Torque limiter A Tor
230. codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Change the setting of F27 to appropriate value Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted gt Ifit is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 Note If you disable H98 an OAZ OAS or Olu alarm may occur Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is resonance with the mounting base gt Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone then find where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance gt Enable the speed control notch filter d07 d08 and the observer d18 to d20 to suppress vibration Depending on the characteristics of the load this may take no effect 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time Possible Causes 1 The inverter runs the motor with S curve or curvilinear pattern 2 The current limiting operation prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration 3 The automatic deceleration
231. coefficient B E41 PID process command 0 100 PID feedback Example Maintaining the pressure around 16 kPa sensor voltage 3 13 V while the pressure sensor can detect 0 to 30 kPa over the output voltage range of 1 to 5 V Select terminal 12 as a feedback terminal and set the gain to 200 so that 5 V corresponds to 100 SAdO9 NOILONNA The following E40 and E41 settings allow you to monitor or specify the values of the PID process command and its feedback on the keypad as pressure PID display coefficient A E40 30 0 that determines the display value at 100 of PID process command or its feedback PID display coefficient B E41 7 5 that determines the display value at 0 of PID process command or its feedback To control the pressure at 16 kPa on the keypad set the value to 16 0 Value displayed PID display coefficient A E40 30 0 16 0 kPa PID process command PID feedback PID display coefficient B E Ea 5 84 m Display coefficients for PID dancer position command and its feedback J01 3 Under the PID dancer control the PID command and its feedback operate within the range 100 so specify the value at 100 of the PID command or its feedback as coefficient A with E40 and the value at 100 as coefficient B with E41 Value displayed PID display coefficient A z5 50 b a a cael ciallciaia PID display coefficient B l PID dancer pos
232. commercial power 60 Hz 47 1047 Servo lock command 48 Pulse train input available only on terminal X7 E07 49 1049 Pulse train sign available on terminals except X7 E01 to E06 70 1070 Cancel constant peripheral speed control 71 1071 Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD 72 1072 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 73 1073 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 2 74 1074 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 75 1075 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 76 1076 Select droop control 77 1077 Cancel PG alarm 80 1080 Cancel customizable logic 81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers 100 No function assigned Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 0 00 to 6000 s external soft start and stop 5 5 PID RST PID HLD CRUN M1 CRUN M2 CRUN M3 CRUN M4 Change when running Default setting PG w o w Z III lt ZII KiKi KiKi KiKi KIKI X lt lt lt lt IIK lt i lt lt lt Torque page lt 5 67 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring 5 77 Code E16 E17 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E27 Name Torque Limiter 2 1 Torque Limiter 2 2 Terminal Y1 Function Terminal Y2 Function Terminal Y3 Function Terminal Y4 F
233. communications with higher priority than the one attempted was active and its reference frequency was too low 5 The acceleration time was too long or too short What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F03 Maximum frequency gt Correct the F03 data Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter High gt Correct the F15 data Check that the reference frequency has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase the reference frequency gt Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers signal converters switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Chapter 6 gt Correct any incorrect data of function codes e g cancel the higher priority frequency command Check the data of function codes F07 E10 E12 and E14 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration time to match the load 6 5 J O C W C m T O O Z Q Possible Causes 6 Overload 7 Function code settings do not agree with the mo
234. communications cable or poor contact Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Terminating resistor not properly configured What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 y11 to y20 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the no response error detection y08 y18 0 Check the host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers gt Remove the cause of the equipment error Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware with recommended devices as appropriate Check the continuity of the cables contacts and connections gt Replace the cable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Implement noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 converter with a recommended insulated one Check that the inverter serves as a terminating device in the network gt Configure the terminating resistor switch es SW2 SW3 for RS 485 communication correctly That is turn the switch es to ON 26 erf Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save
235. compensation Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 2 Output current Output current RMS of the inverter 250 V for 200 V class series Output voltage Output voltage RMS of the inverter 500 V for 400 V class series Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Load factor Load factor Equivalent to the indication of the load Twice the rated motor load meter Input power Input power of the inverter pee the rated output of the inverter PID feedback amount Feedback amount under PID control 100 of the feedback amount PG feedback value Speed detected through the PG interface Maximum speed as 100 speed or estimated speed 500 V for 200 V class series 1000 V for 400 V class series Command via communications link Universal AO Refer to the RS 485 Communication 20000 as 100 User s Manual Motor output kW Twice the rated motor output This always outputs the full scale 100 Output frequency before slip compensation Calibration Full scale output of the meter calibration 5 54 Data for Function Meter scale Palas le output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 PID command SV Command value under PID control 100 of the feedback amount Output level of the PID controller under PID output MV PID control Frequency Command Maximum frequency F03 re If F31 F35 16 PID output JO 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation enabled the P
236. completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad E Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays er and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to Sequence error a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated E due to limitati a l a l a E The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your IMO representative 4 7 OQ F D ies iN YOLOW AHL ONINNOAY t If a filter other than the IMO optional output filter is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning
237. control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action and the oscillation suppression of D action PID control features minimal control deviation high precision and high stability In particular PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent Repeat the following procedure to determine the optimal solution for each system Increase the data of J03 PID control P Gain within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Decrease the data of J04 PID control I Integral time within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Increase the data of JOS PID control D Differential time within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Refining the system response waveforms is shown below 1 Suppressing overshoot Increase the data of J04 Integral time and decrease that of J05 Differential time Controlled Response Natural Time 2 Quick stabilizing moderate overshoot allowable Decrease the data of J03 Gain and increase that of JOS Differential time Controlled Response L Natural Time 3 Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the inte
238. cooling fan Data for F10 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation 5 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors al through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies fz and fs vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 fb Base frequency Even if the specified base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fb 60 Hz Output frequency 0 f2 f3 fo fo Hz Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Tends tine Reference current Output frequency for motor Characteristic Nominal applied oide for setting the characteristic factor factor motor kW Factory default thermal time 5 ty constant Imax o 04 075 503700 EU a siz enz 90 95 i00 Allowable eer al 10 min sx 3s 90 4 0 kW for the EU Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 The
239. ct from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received oe During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated Error due to limitation E as The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your IMO representative If a filter other than the IMO optional output filter is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning Note l result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 1 12 Running the inverter for motor operation check A AWARNING If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result After completion of p
240. cted value TR When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first and the most recent occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information 3 4 8 Copying data Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 7 Data Copying is used to read function code data out of an inverter for storing it in the keypad or writing it into another inverter It is also used to verify the function code data stored in the keypad with the one configured in the inverter The keypad serves as a temporary storage media In addition using Menu 7 allows you to store the running status information in the keypad detach the keypad from the inverter connect it to a PC running JAGUAR Loader at an office or off site place and check the inverter running status without removing the inverter itself To store the inverter running status information into the keypad use Read data read or Read inverter running information chec function For details on how to connect the keypad to a PC and check the inverter running status information stored in the keypad refer to the JAGUAR Loader Instruction Manual Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 7 Data Copying The keypad can hold function code data for a single inverter Programming mode o BFne List of copying functions Data copying status
241. ction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 specify the factors to correct fluctuations of leakage reactance X Basically there is no need to modify the setting P55 Motor 1 Torque current under vector control P55 specifies the rated torque current under vector control without with speed sensor The combination of P99 Motor 1 selection and P02 Motor 1 rated capacity data determines the standard value Basically there is no need to modify the setting P56 Motor 1 Induced voltage factor under vector control P56 specifies the induced voltage factor under vector control without with speed sensor The combination of P99 Motor 1 Selection and P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity data determines the standard value Basically there is no need to modify the setting P99 Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the motor type to be used 0 Motor characterstes 0 Standard motos To select the motor drive control or to run the inverter with the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost and torque calculation monitoring it is necessary to specify the motor parameters correctly First select the motor type with P99 Motor 1 Selection next specify the motor rated capacity with P02 and then initialize the motor parameters with H03 This process automatically configures the related motor parameters P01 P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 The data of F09 Torque Boost 1 H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failur
242. ctor 2 Iron loss factor 3 Magnetic saturation factor 1 Magnetic saturation factor 2 Magnetic saturation factor 3 Magnetic saturation factor 4 Magnetic saturation factor 5 Magnetic saturation extension factor a Magnetic saturation extension factor b Magnetic saturation extension factor c Pros ai wir a7 Pros ais bis ris Pros a v20 20 ror faa ear ai Pros az v2 af Pros ans was as Y riz a ws 26 eis aa wr ar Pris ars ws as Pris as wo 29 Pris aso o 30 reir ast esr or Pris as ea ae Pris asa ess a3 Pro ase oe oe rear as ws asf rrr a be 36 rs ast esr a7 A codes b codes r codes orsa O o 5 118 Table 5 5 Function Codes to be Switched Continued 3rd Ath parameter motor motor motor motor switching Speed control Speed command filter Speed detection filter do2 A44 b44 44 fo oy P Gain aos aas mas ms Y ouput ster a06 Aas bas we Notch filter resonance frequency do7 A49 b49 a9 fo Notch filter attenuation level dos A50 b50 rso kea ooo Taea cumutaivemoornine feja a sarp counterformowor aeee s ass bss s Psa fase osa a ress ass bss ss Pse ass ose so PReved SSCS a fas Poss Table 5 6 Function Codes Unavailable for the 2nd to 4th Motors Overload early warning Current E34 E35 Disabled detection UP DOWN control eae inita
243. d e g FWD the input delay time between the two commands should be within 100 ms If a run command FWD is entered first the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG The jogging conditions should be specified beforehand using the following function codes Speed Control Jogging 409 Speed command filter 0 000 to 5 000 s Speed Control Joggi Speed re oe 0 000 to 0 100 s Modification items related to speed control Speed Contool Goseme for jogging operation under vector control PK Gain 881mg 0 1 to 200 0 times without with speed sensor F For adjustments refer to the descriptions of diz Pe Control Jagene 0 001 to 9 9995 d0l to d06 I integral time Speed Control Jogging Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s C30 Frequency Command 2 Refer to F01 2 gt Ql s3dOO NOILONNA C31 to C35 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Polarity C36 to C39 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point C41 to C45 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Polarity For details about the frequency command refer to F01 Frequency Command 1 Setting up a reference frequency using analog input You can adjust the gain polarity filter time constant and offset which are applied to analog inputs voltage inputs to terminals 12 and V2 and curr
244. d Donte eatenenabled 0 Trip immediately As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm u and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Trip after recovery As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a from power failure momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm lu The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm u is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Trip after As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a decelerate to stop momentary power failure decelerate to shop control is invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm 7u is issued Continue to run As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a for heavy inertia or momentary power failure continuous running control is invoked Continuous running general loads control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia continues running and waits the recovery of power W
245. d because of a trip this function allows the inverter Auto reset to automatically reset and restart itself The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be specified Upon receipt of the Force to stop terminal command STOP this function Forced stop interrupts the run and other commands currently applied in order to forcedly decelerate the inverter to a stop S This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main urge protection ae circuit power lines and the ground 6 1 Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and a Alarm pak ce Oct Oc2 O03 Oc2 0c3 Instantaneous overcurrent overcurrent 6 10 10 SS ee ee aur tutta lOvervotage OOOO a Sid Oe ewe S e y p fe H Dae re ooo ra ee 200 V class series with 75 kW or above 400 V class series Galt with 90 kW or above 200 V class series pbf Charger circuit fault with 37 kW or above 6 14 400 V class series with 75 kW or above 6 14 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Data saving error during undervoltage erh Hardware error with 45 kW or above a a a a a Oo O moea O OOOO a o S cor rtp feedback wireteak O s a S C2 C m Braking wansitorbroken S d S o S CO ero positioning controlere v Te a E ER Oa fome OOOO o S 200 V class series with 45 kW or above DC fan locked 400 V class series with 75 kW or above __
246. d by J72 Brake signal Brake ON timer the inverter judges that the motor rotation is below a certain level and turns the signal BRKS OFF for activating the brake Under vector control when the reference speed or the detected one drops below the level of the stop frequency specified by F25 Stop frequency and stays below the level for the period specified by J72 Brake signal Brake ON timer the inverter judges that the motor rotation is below a certain level and turns the signal BRKS OFF for activating the brake This era reduces the load applied to the brake extending lifetime of the brake a Brake ON frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz mm a NNER vi Brake ON timer 0 0t050s 0to5 0s SAdO9 NOILONNA eee only under vector 0 Detected speed control Speed selection 1 Reference speed When vector control without Speed selection under vector control speed sensor is selected set to 1 Reference speed rote e The brake signal control is only applicable to the Ist motor If the motor switching function selects any of the ig 2nd to 4th motor the brake signal remains ON e Ifthe inverter is shut down due to an occurrence of alarm state or by the terminal command BX Coast to a stop the brake signal is turned ON immediately Operation time chart under V f control iha taananru sie J69 Brake OFF Ke J71 Brake ON frequency speed as ee Huey iat i ane be frequency speed i F25 Stop frequency Output freque
247. d by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will fluctuate in line with the input voltage fluctuation If F05 an arbitrary value other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost auto energy saving etc is enabled the FO5 data should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor Cote In vector control current feedback control is performed In the current feedback control the current is controlled with the difference between the motor induced voltage and the inverter output voltage For a proper control the inverter output voltage should be sufficiently higher than the motor induced voltage Generally the voltage difference is about 20 V for 200 V class series about 40 V for 400 V class series The voltage the inverter can output is at the same level as the inverter input voltage Configure these voltages correctly in accordance with the motor specifications When enabling the vector control without speed sensor using a general purpose motor set the F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 data at the rated voltage of the motor The voltage difference described above is specified by function code P56 Induced voltage factor under vector control Generally there is no need to modify the initial setting 5 37 m Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Frequency H50 H52 and H65 Data setting range 0 0 cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz Set the fr
248. d is heavy due to undervoltage caused by a control delay In such a case when Trip after decelerate to stop is selected the inverter allows the motor to coast to a stop when Continue to run is selected the inverter saves the output frequency being applied when the undervoltage alarm occurred and restarts at the saved frequency after a recovery from the momentary power failure When the input power voltage for the inverter is high setting the continuous running level high makes the control more stable even if the load s inertia is relatively small Raising the continuous running level too high however might cause the continuous running control activated even during normal operation When the input power voltage for the inverter is extremely low continuous running control might be activated even during normal operation at the beginning of acceleration or at an abrupt change in load To avoid this lower the continuous running level Lowering it too low however might cause undervoltage that results from voltage drop due to a control delay Before you change the continuous running level make sure that the continuous running control will be performed properly by considering the fluctuations of the load and the input voltage 5 48 2 J Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m F15 F16 Frequency Limiter High Frequency Limiter Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection mM Frequency Limiter High and Low F15 F16 Data
249. d lower 3 digits are displayed alternately 5_00 Cumulative run time Example 0 lt gt 535h 535 hours 65 lt gt 535h 65 535 hours The lower 3 digits are displayed with hour When the count exceeds 65 535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit amp 01 DC link bus voltage Unit V volts ae Max temperature inside the Shows the maximum temperature inside the inverter for every hour 7 inverter Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Wak EEE Wee cia Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour P Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour Max effective output current i Unit A amperes Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer capacitor to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit 5 D 2 oO QVdAA AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards which is calculated by multiplying the cumulative run time count by the coefficient based on the Cumulatweruntneort surrounding temperature condition electrolytic Counter range 0 to 99 990 hours capacitors on the printed circuit Display range 0 to 999
250. d vertically to the terminal block When connecting wires to these terminals use the bolts washers and nuts that come with the inverter as shown below 3 we 7 OX j iS a fh e mE NS A WARNING e When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Be sure to use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the
251. d16 After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the motor parameters P01 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Note When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 The motor rating should be specified properly when performing auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control or overload stop In any of the following cases the full control performance may not be obtained from the inverter because the motor parameters differ from the factory defaults so perform auto tuning Refer to Section 4 1 7 e The motor to be driven is a non standard product e The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is too long generally 20 m or more e A reactor is inserted between the inverter and the motor 4 1 11 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 6 gt Under V f control with speed sensor F42 3 or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor F42 4 any of the following cases requires configuring the basic function codes given below and auto tuning Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Driving a non standard motor Driving a general purp
252. des correctly Make a note of function code data currently configured and then initialize all function code data using H03 gt After the above process reconfigure function codes one by one checking the running status of the motor 6 8 6 3 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 2 3 No power neither main power nor auxiliary control power supplied to the inverter The power for the control PCB did not reach a sufficiently high level The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is a poor contact between the jumper bar and those terminals Mount a jumper bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and P For poor contact tighten up the screws Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem recurs gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem recurs When r
253. ding to a torque command momentary power failure Select this operation for use in which the motor is surely stopped before Startup 2 Enable At normal start and At startup the inverter searches for idling motor speed and starts at restart after momentary running the motor at the frequency base on the searched speed Then it power failure starts torque control 2 J Ql H26 H27 Thermistor for motor Mode selection and Level These function codes specify the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The thermistor is used to protect the motor from overheating or output an alarm signal E Thermistor for motor Mode selection H26 H26 selects the function operation mode protection or alarm for the PTC NTC thermistor as shown below 0 oo Enable When the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level motor protective function alarm 0h4 is triggered causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop state Enable SAdOO NOILONNA When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level a motor alarm signal is output but the inverter continues running You need to assign the Motor overheat detected by thermistor signal THM to one of the digital output terminals beforehand by which a temperature alarm condition can be detected by the thermistor PTC E20 to E24 and E27 data 56 Enable If the mot
254. dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 20 To access the slide switches remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above open also the keypad enclosure For details on how to remove the front cover and how to open and close the keypad enclosure refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide 2 24 gt 73 D z NO dJLHJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW Table 2 8 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 8 Function of Each Slide Switch SW4 SW6 Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE This switches the input mode of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV to be used as the SINK or SOURCE mode The factory default for VXGxxx 2 is SINK for VXGxxx 4E SOURCE Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 2 on the control PCB If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications n
255. e Leading edge Trailing edge Leading edge Trailing edge lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration arbitrary when the frequency change is 30 or more of the maximum frequency 10 at the leading edge and 20 at the trailing edge gt 2 x 10 100 70 100 2 x 20 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 3 x reference acceleration or deceleration time Acceleration or deceleration time s Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with its maximum performance oe Acc torque Acc output kW Output frequency on equency The figures at left show the acceleration characteristics Similar characteristics apply to the deceleration Output frequency Maximum i fregqtenty ia F03 Base frequency F04 i Time Feoterence Acc time Cote e If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Accelera
256. e Restart time and F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level depends on the motor capacity but the process stated above does not change them Specify and adjust the data during a test run if needed 5 98 2 J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA 5 2 5 H codes High Performance Functions H03 Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the 6 A keys or 6 V keys simultaneous keying Data for HO Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Initialize motor 3 parameters in accordance with b16 Rated capacity and b39 Motor 3 selection Initialize motor 4 parameters in accordance with r16 Rated capacity and r39 Motor 4 selection e To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows St tt Age Function code e em ction i 4th motor Motor selection Selects the motor type P9 A39 O A39 Motor Sets the motor capacity initialization parameters If Data 0 1 3 or 4 P01 P03 A15 A17 b15 b17 r15 r17 in Step 1 P06 to P23
257. e stop frequency for slow flowrate level J15 for the period of slow flowrate level stop latency J16 the inverter decelerates to stop while PID control itself continues to operate When the discharge pressure decreases increasing the reference frequency output of the PID processor above the starting frequency J17 the inverter resumes operation 2 J Ql m PID control Stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 Data setting range 0 0 Disable 1 0 to 500 0 Hz J15 specifies the frequency which triggers slow flowrate stop of inverter m PID control Slow flowrate level stop latency J16 Data setting range 0 to 60 s J16 specifies the period from when the PID output drops below the frequency specified by J15 until the inverter starts deceleration to stop m PID control Starting frequency J17 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz J17 specifies the starting frequency Set J17 to a frequency higher than the stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 If the specified starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency for slow flowrate the latter stop frequency is ignored the slow flowrate stopping function is triggered when the output of the PID processor drops below the specified starting frequency SAdOO NOILONNA E Assignment of PID STP Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control E20 to E24 and E27 data 44 Assigning the digital output signal PID STP to any of the programmable output terminals with
258. e the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 5 45 Power failure Recovery F14 4 V V DC link bus N Undervoltage voltage a la Searching for motor speed Output frequency Motor speed Acceleration Auto restarting after Meet pee te ae IPF 2 J Ql e Auto restarting after momentary power failure ZPF This output signal is ON during the period after the occurrence of momentary power failure until the completion of restart the output has reached the reference frequency When the ZPF is ON the motor slows down so perform necessary operations H For details about IPF refer to E20 through E24 and E27 data 6 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation with auto search enabled Auto search for idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for the time auto search delay time enough to discharge the residual voltage The delay time is specified by H46 Starting Mode Auto sea
259. e Table B 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 9 15 Drive control PG w o w Vif PG PG Default Name Data setting range Cc P setting c oO te z oO D es O b35 Motor 3 Magnetic saturation extension factor a 0 0 to 300 0 lt Data copying N b36 0 0 to 300 0 lt N N Magnetic saturation extension factor b Magnetic saturation extension factor c b37 0 0 to 300 0 lt N N b39 Motor 3 Selection Motor characteristics 0 Standard motors Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 2 Not used Motor characteristics 3 Not used Other motors Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above b41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Gain for Motor 3 b42 Motor Parameter Switching 3 0 Motor Switch to the 3rd motor Mode selection 14 Parameter Switch to particular b codes b40 Slip Compensation 3 O
260. e The models of copy source and destination inverters are different e A data write operation has been performed while the inverter is running e The copy destination inverter is data protected function code F00 1 e In the copy destination inverter the Enable write from keypad command WE KP is OFF e A data read operation has been performed for the inverter whose data protection was enabled 2 If cper is blinking any of the following problems has arisen e The function codes stored in the keypad and ones registered in the inverter are not compatible with each other Either of the two may have been revised or upgraded in a non standard or incompatible manner Consult your IMO representative 3 22 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor E Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the amp key only when the alarm code is displayed E Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the N V key while the current alarm code is displayed E Displaying the status of inverter at the time of al
261. e automatic control systems by setting F37 to 1 Constant torque load and F42 to 0 V f control with slip compensation active then check that the motor vibration stops Make the output wires as short as possible Once disable all the automatic control systems such as auto torque boost auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation dynamic torque vector control droop control overload stop function speed control online tuning notch filter observer and then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop gt Disable the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 gt Readjust the speed control systems d01 through d06 Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates Possible Causes 1 The specified carrier frequency is too low 2 The surrounding temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 3 Resonance with the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function
262. e between the inverter and motor should be 50 m or less If it is longer the inverter may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing through stray capacitance to the ground or between wires Especially small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may be unable to control the motor correctly even when the wiring is less than 50 m In that case make the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance e g loosely bundled cable to minimize the stray capacitance 5 63 F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current The default setting is 160 145 and 130 for CT MT and VT mode inverters respectively Once the CT MT or VT mode is selected by F80 the current limit for each mode is automatically specified If 160 145 or 130 or over of overcurrent instantaneously flows and the output frequency decreases by this current limit that is undesired consider increasing the current limit level If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capab
263. e control Default oa setting PG wo w ace Pre excitation EXITE 5 139 Reset PID integral and differential T components PID RST Code Name Data setting range running Data copying Change when Select local keypad operation Select motor 3 Select motor 4 Protect motor from dew condensation Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 Servo lock command Pulse train sign Cancel constant peripheral speed control HZ LSC Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 CRUN M7 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 2 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 76 1076 Select droop control ____________ PROOP Cancel PGalarm PpG ccL J nilyIniyly Clear all customizable logic timers Run forward Run reverse No function assigned Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal U91 Customizable Logic Timer Monitor Step 1 Step selection Step 2 2 3 Step 3 4 Step 4 5 Step 5 6 Step 6 7 Step 7 8 Step 8 9 Step 9 10 Step 10 y codes LINK Functions Drive control Refer to Vit PG w o w Tor
264. e cooling fan ON OFF control enabled H06 1 this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in operation and OFF when it is stopped This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON OFF control 5 100 H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern Refer to F07 H08 Rotational Direction Limitation HOS inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to miss operation of run commands miss polarization of frequency commands or other mistakes Data for H08 po Disable S Enable Reverse rotation inhibited Enable Forward rotation inhibited Under vector control some restrictions apply to the speed command Under vector control without speed sensor a speed estimation error caused by a motor constant error or other errors may slightly rotate the motor in the direction other than the specified one H09 Starting Mode Auto search H49 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 1 d67 Starting Mode Auto search H46 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 H09 specifies the starting mode whether to enable the auto search for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search can apply to the restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and the normal startup of the inverter individually If the terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting is assigned to a digital input terminal with any of E01 t
265. e current Input Leakage current I VXG3A3D 2 VXGI1A5 4E VXG8A 2 VXG4A 4E VXGIIA 2 4 VXG5 5A 4E VXG9A 4E ae 2 i ea 2 VXG16A5L 4E Three phase eas 2 VXG23AL 4E 200 V VXGHALS 2 VXG30A5L 4E I VXG88AL 2 VXG37AL 4E VXG115AL 2 VXG45AL 4E VXG146AL 2 VXG60AL 4E VXG180AL 2 VXG75AL 4E VXG215AL 2 Three phase _VXG91AL 4E VXG283AL 2 400 V VXG112AL 4E 2 VXGI50AL 4E VXG176AL 4E VXG210AL 4E VXG253AL 4E VXG304AL 4E VXG377AL 4E VXG415AL 4E VXG520AL 4E 2 5 2 Co VXG650AL 4E VXG740AL 4E VXG840AL 4E VXG960AL 4E VXG1170AL 4E VXG1370AL 4E SCYVONVLS HLIM ALINYOANOO 1 Calculated based on these measuring conditions 240 V 60 Hz grounding of a single wire in delta connection interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2 2 Calculated based on these measuring conditions 480 V 60 Hz neutral grounding in Y connection interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2 9 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 9 4 1 General comments When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 9 4 below for details Medium Voltage Medium to low voltage transfor
266. e established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc as private criteria for inspections investigations pertaining to fire accident insurance in the USA Later these standards were authorized as the official standards to protect operators service personnel and the general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards cUL certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards 9 1 2 Considerations when using JAGUAR VXG in systems to be certified by UL and cUL If you want to use the IMO series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL certified certified product refer to the related guidelines described on pages 1x to xii 9 2 Compliance with European Standards The CE marking on IMO products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC which are issued by the Council of the European Communities The products comply with the following standards EN61800 3 2004 Depends upon afirercedieatgdig Immunity Second environment Industrial EMC Directives IMO inverers Emission Category C3 Low Voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2003 Safety Standard EN954 1 Category 3 If connected with an external EMC filter dedicated to IMO inverters the basic type of inverters that bear a CE marking but have no
267. e keypad gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command Referring to the block diagram of the frequency command block refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Chapter 6 check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command Check whether the analog frequency command reference frequency is correctly inputted using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly gt When terminal C1 is used check the slider position of terminal C1 property switch SWS and the setting of the thermistor mode selection H26 Check that a reference frequency has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Set the reference frequency at the same or higher than that of the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to the lower values gt Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers signal converters switches and relay co
268. e reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or higher to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check it for the safe operation 1 8 B a Q EN dJ3LHYJANI 3HL NISN 340444 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Item Specifications Site location Indoors Altitude une Pa R ET derating factor S o ee 10 to 50 C Note 1 1000 m or lower 1 00 Relative humidity 5 to 95 No condensation 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 gases flammable gases oil mist vapor or water drops 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Note 1 When inverters are mounted The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in side by side without any clearance between them 22 kW or below the surrounding temperature that will cause condensation to form ae temperature should be within the range from Altitude 1 000 m max Note 3 10 to 40 C Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an Vibration 55 kW or below 200 V class series 7
269. e speed the inverter can stop without fail because the reference speed reaches the stop frequency level even if the detected speed does not When such a situation is expected select the reference speed for the general fail safe operation 9 52 F26 F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency and Tone H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection m Motor Sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings an 0 75 to 4kHz 630 kW VT mode 0 75 to 2kHz 90 to 400 kW MT mode High lt Low gt gt Ee e OOOO due to harmonics components Ripples in output current waveform Large lt gt Small Leakage current low e Hih Electromagnetic noise emission Low lt gt Hish Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a large amount of ote ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to a surrounding temperature r
270. e thermistor is activated the inverter stops without displaying a blinking the KEYPAD CONTROL LED or outputting L ALM signal regardless of the assignment of bit 11 PTC thermistor activated by H82 Light Alarm Selection 2 E Light alarm L ALM E20 to E24 and E27 data 98 This output signal comes ON when a light alarm occurs 9 113 H84 H85 Pre excitation Initial level Time A motor generates torque with magnetic flux and torque current Lag elements of the rising edge of magnetic flux causes a phenomenon in which enough torque is not generated at the moment of the motor start To obtain enough torque even at the moment of motor start enable the pre excitation with H84 and H85 so that magnetic flux is established before a motor start E Pre excitation Initial level H84 Data setting range 100 to 400 Ratio to the motor s no load current H84 specifies the forcing function for the pre excitation It is used to shorten the pre excitation time Basically there is no need to modify the default setting E Pre excitation Time H85 Data setting range 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s H85 specifies the pre excitation time before starting operation When a run command is inputted the pre excitation starts After the pre excitation time specified by H85 has elapsed the inverter judges magnetic flux to have been established and starts acceleration Specify H85 data so that enough time is secured for establishing magnetic f
271. ecifies the upper limit of the alarm AH in percentage of the feedback amount m Lower level alarm AL J13 J13 specifies the lower limit of the alarm AL in percentage of the feedback amount The value displayed is the ratio of the upper lower limit to the full scale 10 V or 20 mA of the feedback Note amount in the case of a gain of 100 Upper level alarm AH and lower level alarm AL also apply to the following alarms raa How to handle the alarm Alarm Description F Select alarm output J11 Parameter setting Upper limit absolute ON when AH lt PV Absolute value alarm J13 AL 0 Lower limit absolute ON when PV lt AL J12 AH 100 2 J D Ql Upper limit deviation ON when SV AH lt PV Deviation alarm J13 AL 100 Lower limit deviation ON when PV lt SV AL J12 AH 100 Upper lower limit ON when SV PV gt AL J13 AL J12 AH deviation Upper lower range limit ON when SV AL lt PV lt SV AL Deviation alarm deviation a A negative logic signal Upper lower range limit ON when AL lt PV lt AH Absolute value alarm should be assigned to absolute PID ALM Upper lower range limit ON when SV AL lt PV lt SV AH Deviation alarm deviation J15 to J17 PID Control Stop frequency for slow flowrate Slow flowrate level stop latency and Starting frequency Refer to J08 SAdO9 NOILONNA J18 J19 PID Control Upper limit of PID pro
272. ecreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the F09 data Problem Temperature inside inverter has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range 2 Excessive torque boost specified F09 3 The specified acceleration deceleration time was too short 4 Overload 5 Ventilation paths are blocked 6 Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the service life expired or failure 7 The wires to the motor are too long causing a large leakage current from them 16 05 Overspeed What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the F09 data Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 gt Enable
273. ective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before you actually apply this feature to your machinery You can select whether applying this feature to constant speed operation only or applying to constant speed operation and accelerating decelerating operation Data for H67 Auto energy saving operation Enable only during running at constant speed Enable during running at constant speed or accelerating decelerating Note For accelerating decelerating enable only when the load is light If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a motor speed change from constant speed operation may be slow Do not use this feature for such machinery that requires quick acceleration deceleration 5 56 2 J Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m e Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the base frequency is set at 60 rote Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters PO1 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the mo
274. ed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable Check the mounting condition of the front cover gt Use wires of the recommended size 0 65 to 0 82 mm for wiring gt Change the wiring layout inside the unit so that the front cover can be mounted firmly Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Appendix A Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a keypad communications error er occurs gt Replace the keypad 6 16 20 er3 CPU error Problem A CPU error e g erratic CPU operation occurred Possible Causes 1 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures 21 er4 Option communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter Possible Causes 1 There was a problem with the connection between the option card and the inverter 2 Strong electrical noise 22 ers Option error What t
275. ed by the speed sensor 5 44 A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation with auto search disabled The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seco
276. eds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 N m in both the deceleration and constant speed running phases JAGUAR VXG series of inverters have two braking control modes torque limit control and DC link bus voltage control Understand the feature of each control and select the suitable one Control mode Control process Operation mode Torque limit Controls the output frequency Enabled during acceleration Quick response control to keep the braking torque at running at the constant Causes less overvoltage trip H69 2 or 4 around 0 speed and deceleration with heavy impact load DC link bus Control the output frequency Enabled during deceleration Shorter deceleration time voltage control to lower the DC link bus Disabled during running at by making good use of the H69 3 or 5 voltage if the voltage exceeds the constant speed inverter s regenerative the limiting level capability 5 109 In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative contro
277. eee eee eneenen eee eee eee ewe ew ew ew ww ow ow a a a sia aa a iaa pep a a ie i is Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control Low output torque detected Torque detected 1 Torque detected 2 Motor 1 selected Motor 2 selected Motor 3 selected Motor 4 selected Running forward Running reverse In remote operation Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt I I I I oa e a ee I I i i lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt zla KAX I lt i lt lt lt lt i lt i lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt xKx T KRR E ee ee A ce ee A ee ea oe ee ee ee weee eee ee ee ewe ew ew ew ew wm wm we wm wm wm wm wm wm wm wm ew ew wm ew wm wm ew ew ew ew ew ww oe vit mil ti EPET AE ES DoDo a eens ass si pam am SS ae ee Brake signal Frequency speed detected 3 Terminal C1 wire break Speed valid BRKS FDT3 C10FF DNZS lt Z lt x I I lt xi i lt i lt lt i lt Z lt weseeemrenrererewrerererereerereeewee eee ee ew ew ew ew ww ow ow ew ss tea ee pe ee IPEE RETA ee PEERAA EENE aG da a a Speed agreement Frequency speed arrival signal 3 PG error detected DSAG FAR3 PG ERR 32 1082 Positioning completion si
278. eion Jodie an00 rp oom 588 E51 Display Coefficient for Input gt 000 CAER 0 001 to 9999 0 010 Y Watt hour Data Menu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and 7 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 and 7 2 Full menu mode E54 Frequency Detection 3 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz py MMMAES 5 82 5 89 E55 Current Detection 3 Level 0 00 Disable Y1 Y2 5 83 value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current 5 89 E56 nes E A eae ee E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function None 5 90 E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function Auxiliary frequency command 1 E63 Terminal V2 Extended Function Auxiliary frequency command 2 PID command 1 PID feedback amount Ratio setting Analog torque limit value A Analog torque limit value B 10 Torque command 11 Torque current command 20 Analog input monitor E64 Saving of Digital Reference 0 Automatic saving when main power is turned OFF Promency ne Sanat presona hy Mae E65 Reference Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop 20 to 120 999 Disable y y E78 Torque Detection 1 Tevel Co 5 01 E79 Timer 0 Py v wooli v E80 Torque Detection 2 0 to 300 AMALA MMEA Low Torque Detection E87 menoro soos v orii r The shaded function codes E are applicable to the quick setup The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See T
279. en analog inputs are used as torque limiters Pra LL Refer to F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 Torus comand Analog inputs to be used as torque commands under torque control i LL Refer to H18 Torque Limiter Analog inputs to be used as torque current commands under torque Torque current command control LJ Refer to H18 Torque Limiter By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as the temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter you can monitor the state of external devices via the communications link By using an appropriate display coefficient you can also have various values to be converted into physical values such as temperature and pressure before they are displayed Analog signal input monitor Note if these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt E63 A E64 Saving of Digital Reference Frequency E64 specifies how to save the reference frequency specified in digital formats by the N Q keys on the keypad as shown below Auto saving when the main power is turned OFF The reference frequency will be automatically saved when the main power is turned OFF At the next power on the reference frequency at the time of the previous power off applies Saving by pressing key Pressing the key saves the reference frequency If the control power is turned OFF without pressing the key the data will be lost At the next power O
280. ency 5 D Code Name Data setting range ve 8 to 6 O V f PG PG control 2 k _ pees ERRER T C02 2 fy ovi in 03 3 Py fy poo ly fy in C04 Hysteresis width I E C06 y 000 ly y y y n_ C07 y oov in 08 r oo fy fy in 09 v ooo fy fy in C10 r ooo fy fy y y N on r oo fy fy in C2 r oo fy fy in c13 y oo fy fy in C14 Py yy oo fy fy yfy n C15 y 000 ly v n C16 y oov in C17 r ooo fy fy in C18 v ooo fy fy y y N C19 r ooo fy fy y v Nn C20 Jogging Frequency 0 00 to 500 00 Hz y y ooo yf y y y N 5 93 C30 Frequency Command 2 Enable W amp keys on the keypad N Y 2 Yo ee I N 5 29 Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 5 94 Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 Voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control 8 Enable S amp keys on the keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 11 Digital input interface card option 12 Pulse train input AHP C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 5 0 to 5 0 5 94 Offset 632 Gain 033 Filter time constant 0 05 C34 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 100 00 035 Polarity C36 Analog Input Adjustment for e1 a 5 0 to 5 0 C37 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 100 00 C38 Filter time constant 0 05 C39 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 100 00 C41 Analog Input Adjustment for N2 m 5 0 to
281. ency command via communication or multi frequency command then the N and keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency e When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the N Q key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit e While the least significant digit is blinking by pressing the A Q key holding down the key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits e Setting F01 data to 8 enables the balanceless bumpless switching When the frequency command source is switched to the keypad from any other source the inverter inherits the current frequency that has applied before switching providing smooth switching and shockless running 2 Using analog input F01 1 to 3 or 5 When any analog input voltage input to terminals 12 and V2 or current input to terminal C1 is selected by F01 it is possible to arbitrarily specify the ref
282. eneral General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU IMO Precision Controls Ltd states that all our inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 9 5 2 Points for consideration when using the IMO series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If you want to use the IMO series of inverters in systems equipment in the EU refer to the guidelines on pages v to viii 9 4 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 9 6 1 General In IMO series of inverters opening the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC stops the output transistor coasting the motor to a stop EN Enable input This is the safety stop function prescribed in EN60204 1 Category 0 Uncontrolled stop and compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 Note Depending on applications additional measures may be necessary for end user to apply such as brake function to prevent movement and motor terminal protection against possible electrical hazard s Use of terminals EN and PLC eliminates the need of external safety circuit breakers while conventional inverters need those breakers to configure the EN954 1 Category 3 compliant safety system Conventional Inverter Safety circuit breakers complying JACUAR VEG with EN954 1 T 3 Power supply Power supply Safety switch complying with EN954 1 Category 3 Enable input Safety switch complying with EN954 1
283. ent input to terminal C1 Adjustable items for analog inputs Input Filter time _ C1 4to20mA Sor 39 88 V2 _ Oto 10 V 10 to 10 V E Offset C31 C36 C41 Data setting range 5 0 to 5 0 C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input The offset also applies to signals sent from PSIG the external equipment codes E Filter time constant C33 C38 C43 Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 s C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant m Polarity C35 C45 C35 and C45 configure the input range for analog input voltage Data for C35 and C45 Specifications for terminal inputs Po 10 to 10 V 0 to 10 V A minus component of the input will be regarded as 0 VDC 5 94 E Gain Reference frequency es ae eT ae Gain C32 C37 C42 2 Analog input 0 Gain base point 100 C34 C39 C44 Note To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminals 12 and V2 set C35 and C45 data to 0 Setting C35 and C45 data to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point Refe
284. equency component at an arbitrary point in the non linear V f pattern Note Setting 0 0 to H50 H52 or H65 disables the non linear V f pattern operation m Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Voltage H51 H53 and H66 Data setting range 0 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 0 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point in the non linear V f pattern Note The factory default values for H50 and H51 differ depending on the inverter capacity For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below H50 0 0 Hz and H51 0 V For those with a capacity of 30 kW or above refer to the table below Destination Inverter type VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E Voltage 200 V class series 400 V class series O 2 ie H50 6 0 Hz 5 0 Hz H51 E Maximum Output Voltage 1 F06 Data setting range 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 Note If F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through H53 H65 H66 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant T C Z O O Z O O J m F07 F08 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Ti
285. er E Functions that are affected by motor parameters in running capability Auto search C Awos OOOO o 5 96 2 gt D Ql SAdOO NOILONNA P codes P06 to P08 Motor 1 No load current R1 and X P06 through P08 specify no load current R1 and X respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters m No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer m R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ R1 Cable R1 ii O V I x 100 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A E X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X1 X2 x XM X2 XM Cable X X V I x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A Note For reactance use the value at the base frequency F04 P09 to P11 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation response time and Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the sli
286. er The radius of the take up roll increases as the roll rotates Radius of take up roll r1 Speed v y Speed v in winding direction Reduction ratio a b When the motor shaft rotates b times the take up roll shaft rotates a Speed detector times radius r2 Encoder Reduction ratio c d I F d When the speed detector shaft car rotates d times the encoder shaft rotates c times A B phase or B phase Speed reduction ratio between motor shaft and take up roll shaft a b Speed reduction ratio between speed detector shaft and encoder shaft c d Radius of take up roll before winding r m Radius of speed detector r m Setting the Reduction Ratio Encoder pulse resolution Encoder pulse resolution P R to be set in hexadecimal Pulse count factor 1 Speed reduction ratio of the whole machinery load d 9 9 adie is a C Pulse count factor 2 l u E d16 Denominator factor for the speed reduction ratio K1 rl xax c d17 Numerator factor for the speed reduction ratio K2 r2 x b x d 5 137 E Peripheral speed line speed command Under constant peripheral speed control speed commands should be given as peripheral speed line speed ones Setting with digital inputs To digitally specify a peripheral speed line speed in m min make the following settings Coefficient for speed indication 240m xaxri 5 pxb Ks Coefficient for speed indication E
287. er and lower sides rz 1 Remove all of the base fixing screws and the case fixing screws from the top of the inverter 2 Move the top mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it to the case fixing screw holes with the base fixing screws After changing the position of the top mounting base some screws may be left unused 3 Remove the base fixing screws from the bottom of the inverter move the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it with the base fixing screws just as in step 2 Inverters with a capacity of 220 kW or below have no case fixing screws on the bottom Base fixing screws ie Top on mounting Case fixing screws y b SS t Base fixing screws Figure 2 3 Changing the Positions of the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases ACAUTION When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide 1 For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below First loosen the front cover fixing screw slide the cover downward holding its both sides tilt it toward you and then pull it upward as shown below While pressing the wiring guide upward pull it out toward you After carrying out wi
288. er to E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3_23 on the next page 120 No of poles If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Display value Output frequency Hz x 3_08 Motor speed Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for speed indication If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value 3_09 Load shaft speed Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command value using function 3 10 PID command value code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command value x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID feedback amount using function 32 11 e code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears dd Torque limit value Driving torque limit value A based on motor rated torque alo Torque limit value Braking torque limit value B based on motor rated torque 2 14 Raos y When this setting is 100 the LED monitor shows 1 00 time of the value to E 8 be displayed If no ratio setting is
289. ered can produce nothing This state is regarded as abnormal causing an alarm 14 0 n Overload of motor 1 through 4 Problem Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 2 3 or 4 activated O11 Motor 1 overload O12 Motor 2 overload O13 Motor 3 overload O14 Motor 4 overload Possible Causes 1 The electronic thermal characteristics do not match the motor overload characteristics What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 gt Use an external thermal relay 6 14 Possible Causes 2 Activation level for the electronic thermal protection was inadequate 3 The specified acceleration deceleration time was too short 4 Overload 5 Excessive torque boost specified F09 15 0 u Inverter overload What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the continuous allowable current of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase Check whether d
290. erence frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted Adjustable elements of frequency command 1 Bias Gan Filter Data for f FO Input terminal Input range Base Base Polarity time Offset point point constant 0 to 10 V c a bee M0 ai felefele ee to 10 V men eat e om oe oo ow Sumofthewovalues y io30ma_ Fig cso c37 ax Ge Ge 0 to 10 n m Offset C31 C36 C41 C31 C36 or C41 specifies an offset for analog input voltage or current The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment E Filter time constant C33 C38 C43 C33 C38 or C43 specifies a filter time constant for analog input voltage or current Choose an appropriate value for the time constant taking into account the response speed of the mechanical system since a large time constant slows down the response When the input voltage fluctuates due to noise specify a larger time constant m Polarity C35 C45 C35 or C45 specifies the input range for analog input voltage Data for C35 C45 Terminal input specifications 0 to 10 VDC negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V 5 30 2 J Ql T C Z O Z O O J m E Gain and bias Reference frequency eee acne eae eee cane eegae eee eee ena age Gain C32 C37 or C42 Point B Bias i Are F18 PointA
291. ershoot may occur Note d51 to d55 Reserved for particular manufacturers d68 d69 d99 These function codes d51 to d55 d68 d69 and d99 are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes d59 d61 Command Pulse Rate Input d62 d63 Pulse input format Filter time constant Pulse count factor 1 and Pulse count factor 2 Refer to F01 d70 Speed Control Limiter d70 specifies a limiter for the PI value output calculated in speed control sequence under V f control with speed sensor or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor A PI value output is within the slip frequency x maximum torque in a normally controlled state If an abnormal state such as a temporary overload arises the PI value output greatly fluctuates and it may take a long time for the PI value output to return to the normal level To suppress such abnormal operation the PI value output can be limited with d70 Data setting range 0 to 100 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 5 2 9 U codes Application functions 3 U00 Customizable Logic Mode selection U01 to U50 Customizable Logic Step 1 to 10 Setting U71 to U75 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 to 5 Output selection U81 to U85 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 to 5 Function selection U91 Customizable Logic Timer Monitor Step selection The customizable logic function allows the user to form a logic c
292. erter trips due to a heat sink overheat 0 or inverter overload H70 control Olu this function decreases the output frequency to reduce the load Automatic deceleration If regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability this Anti regenerative function automatically increases the deceleration time or controls the output control frequency to avoid an overvoltage trip J O W a m T O O Z Deceleration During deceleration this function increases the motor energy loss and decreases characteristics the regenerative energy returned to avoid an overvoltage trip 0u Excessive regenerative energy proof braking capability This function detects a reference frequency loss due to a broken wire etc Reference loss detection continues the inverter operation at the specified frequency and issues the Command loss detected signal REF OFF Even when the inverter is in stopped state this function feeds DC current across the motor at certain intervals to raise the motor temperature for preventing dew condensation Dew condensation prevention When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level this function Motor overload early issues the Motor overload early warning signal OL before the thermal overload warning protection function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection This function exclusively applies to the Ist motor When the inverter has stoppe
293. es can be specified by analog inputs through terminals 12 C1 and V2 voltage or current Set E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function and Terminal V2 Extended Function as listed below Data for E61 E62 or E63 Analog torque limit value A Use the analog input as the torque limit value specified by function code data 7 or 8 a a Analog torque limit value B Input specifications 200 10 V or 20 mA If the same setting is made for different terminals the priority order is E61 gt E62 gt E63 E Torque limiter levels specified via communications link S10 S11 The torque limiter levels can be changed via the communications link Function codes S10 and S11 exclusively reserved for the communications link respond to function codes F40 and F41 Switching torque limiters The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command TL2 TLI Select torque limiter level 2 1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals To assign the TL2 TL1 as the terminal function set any of E01 through E07 to 14 If no TL2 TL1 is assigned torque limiter levels 1 1 and 1 2 F40 and F41 take effect by default Torque limiter 1 1 F40 S10 Analog torque limit value A Driving torque limiter Torque limiter 2 1 E16 o ON E61 to E63 TL2 TL1 Analog torque limit value B Torque limiter 2 2 E17 O ON Braking torque limiter
294. es not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is fl x 0 2 When E65 100 or higher the reference frequency level at which the wire is recognized as fixed is fl x 1 Pa The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 E78 E79 Torque Detection 1 Level and Timer E80 E81 Torque Detection 2 Low Torque Detection Level and Timer E78 specifies the operation level and E79 specifies the timer for the output signal TDI E80 specifies the operation level and E81 specifies the timer for the output signal TD2 or U TL Operation level Range 0 to 300 m Torque detected 1 TD1 Torque detected 2 TD2 The output signal TDI or TD2 comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command exceeds the level specified by E78 or E80 Torque detection Level for the period specified by E79 or E81 Torque detection Timer respectively The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque drops below the level specified by E78 or E80 minus 5 of the motor rated torque The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Calculated torque or torque command 101 102 doa E Low output torque detected U TL This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter
295. essing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 The motor rating should be specified properly when performing auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control or overload stop In any of the following cases the full control performance may not be obtained from the inverter because the motor parameters differ from the factory defaults so perform auto tuning Refer to Section 4 1 7 e The motor to be driven is not a IMO product or is a non standard product e The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is too long generally 20 m or more e A reactor is inserted between the inverter and the motor 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt Under the V f control F42 0 or 2 or dynamic torque vector control F42 1 any of the following cases requires configuring the basic function codes given below and auto tuning Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Driving a non standard motor Driving a general purpose motor provided that the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long or a reactor is connected Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design v
296. estarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Even if the run command is set to OFF voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W if the servo lock command is ON Even if the motor is stopped due to DC braking or preliminary excitation voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings Run commands e g Run forward FWD stop commands e g Coast to a stop BX and frequency change comma
297. etwork as a terminating device turn SW2 to ON Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 1 for connecting the keypad To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON Switches the output form of analog output terminals FM1 and FM2 between voltage and current When changing the setting of SW4 and SW6 also change the data of function codes F29 and F32 respectively FM 1 FM2 SW4 F29 data SW6 F32 data Current output Switches the property of the analog input terminal C1 between analog setting current input PTC thermistor input and NTC thermistor input When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code H26 mman oo o Analog setingcumentinput Factory detail c1 o Figure 2 20 shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input output terminal configuration Switch Configuration and Factory Defaults SW5 sw2 VO1 VO2 Cl owe sm o swaswe OFF OFF Factory default 101 102 PTC NTC The factory default for VXGxxx 2E is SINK for VXGxxx 4E SOURCE Figure 2 20 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control PCB _ To move a switch slider use a tool with a narrow tip e g a tip of tweezers Be careful not to touch other electronic Note
298. f not the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that the inverter does not apply the restart mode and starts normal running 5 46 Power Failure Recovery f f DC Link Bus Voltage 4 f Undervoltage Level 1 1 l 1 l 1 l I I 1 I l 1 l I 1 l 1 l I 1 I I 1 I l 1 l l 1 l l 1 l Time Reserved for Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s s State of the Inverter Gate Signal ON Ready to Run Run Command ON ON Operation Case 1 3 i Restart Run Command l e S Operation Case 2 aN 1 H16 i ON Start of Normal Running If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Power supply voltage Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure 200 V class series 400 V class series 100 V Cote The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of undervoltage until it reaches of the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors E Restart mode af
299. f the light alarm indication a appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 6 5 If an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor Go to Section 6 6 while neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication 2 is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your IMO representative 6 26 3 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication a Appears on the LED Monitor This section describes the troubleshooting procedure based on function codes dedicated to motor 1 which are marked with an asterisk For motors 2 to 4 replace those asterisked function codes with respective motor dedicated ones refer to Chapter 5 Table 5 5 For the function codes dedicated to motors 2 to 4 see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 6 3 1 Abnormal motor operation 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No power supplied to the inverter No run forward reverse command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation No Enable input No rotation direction command keypad operation The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode A run command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped No analog frequenc
300. fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X7 of the control circuit e If an external frequency command potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e If an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y 1 to Y4 and relay output signals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C will not be turned ON e Disable the RS 485 communications link Giip It is recommended that terminal EN be short circuited for the measurement of the capacitance Cnote If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the surrounding temperature within 25 10 C 2 Turn ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Turn OFF the main circuit power 5 The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Cnote If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement has not started Check the conditions listed in 1 6 After has disappeared from the LED monitor turn ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor 7 4 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC
301. fied Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified Keep the current output frequency E Specifying the initial value for the UP DOWN control Specify the initial value to start the UP DOWN control Data for H61 Initial value to start the UP DOWN control Mode fixing the value at 0 The inverter automatically clears the value to 0 when restarted including powered ON Speed up by the UP command Mode holding the final output frequency in the previous UP DOWN control The inverter internally holds the last output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering ON At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the internal frequency reaches Note the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency Pressing one of these keys overwrites the frequency held in the inverter 9 32 2 J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA Frequency Frequency saved in internal memory a a E G E G E a E G E Output frequency Run j i PRE ON OFF ON UP terminal command fo Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is
302. fied grounding terminals Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure Inverter output terminals U V and W and secondary grounding terminals G for motor Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the 3 phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning the phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal G Note When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Inverter i a Inverior 2 E 3 Multicgne cable ae Inverter 3 IE DC reactor terminals P1 and P Connect a DC reactor DCR to these terminals for power factor correction 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect an optional DCR to those terminals Cnote e The wiring length should be 10 m or below Do not remove the jumper bar when a DCR is not used e Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters e Ifa PWM converter is connected to the inverter no DCR is required WARNING Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and
303. for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Operation Method Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 6000 s 5 38 Deceleration Time 1 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start Torque Boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to Rated Voltage Y Y 3 Y at Base Frequency 1 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Protection for Motor 1 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or m motor with separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of ine motor F12 Thermal time constant 0 Restart Mode after Momentary Trip EET Power Failure Mode selection 4 Trip after a recovery from power failure Trip after decelerate to stop Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads Restart at the starting frequency F15 Frequency Limiter Figh emoe Te a y ine Ty y oo fy fy F18 Bias Frequency command 1 00 00 to 100 00 bal ikl a F20 DC Braking 1 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking starting frequency F21 Braking level 0 to 100 CT mode 0 to 80 MT VT mode F22 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s 43 ee EEEE o 5 49 5 29 5 49
304. for pressing the 9 key with the 6 key held down 3 2 3 3 Running Mode 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the fourteen items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the amp key to switch between these monitor items Table 3 3 Monitoring Items Display sample on the LED indicator Function Monitor items Unit Meaning of displayed value code data LED monitor W ON O OFF for E43 Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED Speed monitor ae een Output frequency 1 before slip 5x00 M HzO AOkW Hz Frequency actually being output compensation Output frequency 2 after slip 5 00 M HzO AOUkW Hz Frequency actually being output compensation B HzOAUkW Reference frequency being set E48 2 frequency 120 Motor speed 1500 E Hz E AO kW r min Output frequency Hz x P 01 Load shaft speed BHz8 A0kW Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 O Hz A M kW E E48 5 Output frequency Speed 5 0 O Hz O AO kW x 100 E48 7 Maximum frequency deyo E48 0 E48 1 E48 3 QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO Output current O Hz E A O kW Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage 2 O Hz O A O kW Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 4 in 0 Calculated torque 50 O HzO AO kW Motor output torque in C
305. frequency Hz x P 01 Load shaft speed BHz8 A0kW Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 O Hz A M kW E E48 5 Output frequency Speed 5 0 O Hz O AO kW x 100 E48 7 Maximum frequency deyo E48 0 E48 1 E48 3 QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO Output current O Hz E A O kW Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage 2 O Hz O A O kW Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 4 in 0 Calculated torque 50 O HzO AO kW Motor output torque in Calculated value Input power OHzOAMkW k Input power to the inverter PID command feedback amount transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g PID e p4 O HzO AO kW PID feedback ei O HzO AO kW PID output in as the maximum dis a ee cca frequency F03 being at 100 in 0 Load factor 6 O HzO AO kW al a in as the rated i temperature Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details N suitable for a desired scale Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details An analog input to the inverter in a format Analog input D 39700 O He OOAO kw Torque current 9 4s OWe DAUkwW Torque current command value or 73 calculated torque current O Hz O A O kW Magnetic flux command value 24 command 9 Input watt h kWh pnt CHAD W iewn petwatt hour GW 05 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed as is on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so the LED monitor disp
306. from the reference PG 4 10 Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from the reference PG 416 z Sat ae fain the ucicicace Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the p G 8 reference PG 407 Cy cece ee ae ee Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from the PG slave PG PG pulse rate Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the slave Z phase signal from the slave PG oo sane oa E a a on terminal 32 on the analog interface card a le Gs aa C2 on the analog interface card A Ti he on terminal AO on the analog interface card e a sa ae elie ia CS on the analog interface card 3 12 m Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal e Displaying the I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 12 and the figure below each of segments a to dp on LED1 and LED2 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 to X7 is closed it goes OFF when it is open Each of segments a to e on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 and terminal CMY or between terminals YS5A and Y5C is closed respectively it goes OFF when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C and lights when the circuit between terminals 3
307. function is activated QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode E In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operations you want to do in each mode as follows E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc When a light alarm is displayed holding down this key resets the light alarm and switches back to Running mode E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code or establishes the data entered with N and keys E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor A LO UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor RUN LED Lights when running with a run command entered by the fu key by terminal command FWD or REV or through the communications link Operation Keys KEYPAD Lights when the inverter is ready
308. g of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If Note the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly Deceleration time 1 22 kW or below 6 00 s Initializing the motor 1 parameters with the function code H03 2 automatically updates the data of function codes Note P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 After that perform the auto tuning E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the machinery conditions and perform the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 Adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 in view of the motor rotation And specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery Note x ae Tuning type Tune while the motor stops Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control If the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 machinery refer to the W If tuning while the motor is rotating cannot be selected below Drive control abbreviation Motor parameters subjected to tuning Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip freq
309. gerous objects are not dangerous objects are left around the equipment left Input voltage Check that the input voltages of the main Measure the input voltages The standard specifications and control circuit are correct using a multimeter or the like must be satisfied 1 Check that the display is clear 1 2 1 2 2 Check that there is no missing part in Visual inspection The display can be read the displayed characters and there is no fault Structure such as Check for 1 Visual or auditory 1 2 3 4 5 frame and cover 1 Abnormal noise or excessive vibration inspection No abnormalities 2 Loose bolts at clamp sections 2 Retighten NOILOAdSNI ANY JONYNALNIYN 3 Deformation and breakage 3 4 5 4 Discoloration caused by overheat Visual inspection 5 Contamination and accumulation of dust or dirt Common 1 Check that bolts and screws are tight 1 Retighten 1 2 3 and not missing No abnormalities 2 Check the devices and insulators for 2 3 deformation cracks breakage and Visual inspection discoloration caused by overheat or deterioration 3 Check for contamination or accumulation of dust or dirt Main circuit Conductors 1 Check conductors for discoloration and 1 2 1 2 and wires distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the wires for cracks and discoloration Visual inspection No abnormalities Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check part
310. gnal ________ PSE Maintenance timer Light alarm Alarm output for any alarm 101 1101 102 1102 105 1105 111 1111 112 1112 113 1113 114 1114 115 1115 Setting the Enable circuit failure detected Enable input OFF Braking transistor broken Customizable logic output signal 1 Customizable logic output signal 2 Customizable logic output signal 3 Customizable logic output signal 4 Customizable logic output signal 5 value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic output to a terminal 5 6 Zz Z Zi lt xi I Ziz i Z Z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Drive control page 2 F Ql s3dOO NOILONNA F codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes 4 Dri rive contro Referto Code Name Data setting range L 8 setting page a s Vit PG wo w Torque 5 EY Vif PG PG control E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width 0 0 to 10 0 Hz 5 82 E31 Frequency Detection 1 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz E32 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 500 0 Hz E34 Overload Early Warning Current 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter Y Y1 Y2 i Y 5 83 Detection Level rated current E35 Timer 0 01 to 600 005 E36 Frequency Detection 2 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz 5 82 5 83 E37 Current Detection 2 0 00 Disable Cur
311. gral time specified by J04 Increase the data of J04 Integral time Controlled Response Natural Time 4 Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by JO5 Differential time Decrease the data of JO5 Differential time Decrease the data of J03 Gain if the oscillation cannot be suppressed even though the differential time is set at 0 sec Controlled Response Natural Time 5 125 E Feedback filter JO6 Data setting range 0 0 to 900 0 s J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop Setting too long a time constant makes the system response slow _ To specify the filter for feedback signals finely under PID dancer control apply filter time constants for analog input C33 C38 and C43 J08 JO9 PID Control Pressurization starting frequency pressurizing time J15 PID Control Stop frequency for slow flowrate J16 PID Control Slow flowrate level stop latency J17 PID Control Starting frequency Slow flowrate stopping function J15 to J17 J15 to J17 configure the slow flowrate stopping function in pump control a function that stops the inverter when the discharge pressure rises causing the volume of water to decrease When the discharge pressure has increased decreasing the reference frequency output of the PID processor below th
312. grated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Continued shows Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 Number of RS 485 communication COM port 1 connection to keypad after the power is communications errors t d ON COM port 1 nea Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Content of RS 485 Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication COM communications error port 1 in decimal COM port 1 For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being Number of option errors 1 connected to the A port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 5 14 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad PROM Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code version Number of RS 485 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 k a communication COM port 2 connection to terminal block after the communications errors power is turned ON COM port 2 Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Content of RS 485 Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication COM c
313. h delay JOL2 Function code data 22 The output signal JOL comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms The output signal JOL2 comes ON when any of the following output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more e Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 Maximum internal value e Current limiting by software F43 and F44 e Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 e Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 Coote When the JOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function E Keypad operation enabled KP Function code data 8 This output signal comes ON when the keys are specified as the run command source E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated E Select AX terminal function AX Function code data 15 In response to a run command FWD this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial power supply side It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command and it goes OFF after the motor decelerates to sto
314. han the latter Although the voltage of the general purpose motor has usually been adjusted to match the commercial power keeping the motor terminal voltage low is necessary in order to secure the voltage margin If the motor is driven under this control with the motor terminal voltage being kept low however the rated torque cannot be obtained even when the rated current originally specified for the motor is applied To secure the rated torque therefore it is necessary to use a motor with higher rated current This also applies to the vector control with speed sensor This control is not available for MT mode inverters so do not set F42 data to 5 for those inverters E Vector control with speed sensor This control requires an optional PG pulse generator and an optional PG interface card to be mounted on a motor shaft and an inverter respectively The inverter detects the motor s rotational position and speed from PG feedback signals and uses them for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants and using the speed regulator PI controller This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector control without speed sensor Since slip compensation dynamic torque vector control and vector control wi
315. he MT VT mode a value out 0 75 to 16 kHz 5 5 to 18 5 KW of the range if specified Motor sound 0 4 to 55 kW Setting range 0 75 to 10 kHz automatically changes to the Carrier 0 75 to 10 kHz 0 75 to 2 kHz 22 to 55 kW maximum value allowable in the frequency 75 to 400kW 90to400kKW 0 75 to 6 kHz VT mode 0 75 to 6 kHz 75 to 500 kW 500 and 630 kW 0 75 to 4 kHz 630 kW Switching the drive mode daas between CT MT and VT with Level Initial value 160 Initial value 145 Initial value 130 function code F80 automatically initializes the F44 data to the value specified at left In the MT VT mode if the maximum frequency exceeds Maximum 25 to 500 Hz Setting range 25 to 500 Hz 120 Hz the actual output egigney Upper limit Upper limit 120 Hz frequency is internally limited to 500 Hz 120 Hz Setting range Current Based on the rated Based on the rated Based on the rated indication and current level for current level for current level for output CT mode MT mode VT mode Switching to the MT VT mode does not automatically change the motor rated capacity P02 to the one for the motor with one rank higher capacity so configure the P02 data to match the applied motor rating as required 4 1 5 Selecting a desired motor drive control The JAGUAR VXG supports the following motor drive control F42 Diveccarel Basic Speed Drive control aoa Other data control feedback class p a V f control o with slip
316. he automatic drop function can be disabled e Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C e Keypad setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Setting resolution Analog setting 1 3000 of maximum frequency 1 1500 for V2 input Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 to 500 0 Hz Link operation setting Selectable from the following two types 1 20000 of maximum frequency 0 01 Hz fixed Under V f Speed 1 100 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 15 to 1500 r min control with control 1 2 speed sensor range Setting range Output frequency Constant torque range Constant output range Under dynamic Speed Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C o A Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C control wil speed sensor Under Speed 1 200 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 7 5 to 1500 r min vector control control 1 2 without speed range l sensor Speed Analog setting 0 5 of base speed at 25 10 C Constant torque range Constant output range 2 F D gt 0 control accuracy Under Speed 1 1500 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 1 to 1500 r min 1024 p r vector control control 1 4 with speed sensor range Speed Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C ao Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Control method V f control Dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor
317. he frequency speed command e For the inverter without an optional PG interface card Pulse train input PIN assigned to the digital terminal X7 data 48 Pulse train sign SIGN assigned to a digital terminal other than X7 data 49 If no SIGN is assigned polarity of any pulse train input is positive 1 Forward rotation Frequency speed command according to the pulse train rate is given to the inverter pulse Reverse rotation The forward rotation pulse gives a frequency speed command with positive pulse polarity and a reverse rotation pulse with negative polarity 2 A and B phases with 90 Pulse trains generated by A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference give a degree phase difference frequency speed command based on their pulse rate and the phase difference to an inverter For details of operations using the optional PG interface card refer to the Instruction Manual for it 5 33 Positive Negative polarity polarity Pulse train sign OFF ON Pulse train input A gt Pulse train sign Pulse train input Positive Negative gt polarity gt polarity Reverse rotation pulse ne L T LL Forward rotation pulse e LJ Fo Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference O D Run Run S forward gt reverse __ gt ie signal signal A phase input 1 lt i l i pa B phase input o O 90 degree
318. he high frequency zone E Output Filter d06 Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s d06 specifies the time constant for the first order delay of the speed controller output filter Use this function code when setting of the P gain and or integral time cannot control mechanical resonance such as hunting or vibration Generally setting a larger value to this time constant decreases the amplitude of resonance however a too long time constant may make the system unstable 5 133 d07 d08 d09 Speed Control 1 Notch filter resonance frequency Speed Control 1 Notch filter attenuation level A49 b49 r49 Speed control 2 to 4 Notch filter resonance frequency A50 b50 r50 Speed control 2 to 4 Notch filter attenuation level These function codes specify speed control using notch filters The notch filters make it possible to decrease the speed loop gain only in the vicinity of the predetermined resonance points suppressing the mechanical resonance The notch filters are available only under vector control with speed sensor Setting the speed loop gain at a high level in order to obtain quicker speed response may cause mechanical resonance If it happens decreasing the speed loop gain is required to slow the speed response as a whole In such a case using the notch filters makes it possible to decrease the speed loop gain only in the vicinity of the predetermined resonance points and set the speed loop gain at a high level in other
319. hen an undervoltage condition is detected due to a lack of energy to be regenerated the output frequency at that time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverter at the power performs auto search for idling motor output frequency saved when speed and restarts running the motor at the undervoltage was detected frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for fan applications with a large moment of inertia Restart at the As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a frequency at which momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a the power failure coast to stop state occurred for jeneral loads If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverter at the power performs auto search for idling motor output frequency saved when speed and restarts running the motor at the undervoltage was detected frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Restart at the As soon as the DC
320. hen the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 Note The inverter rated output current differs between the CT and MT VT modes m Braking time F22 Data setting range 0 01 to 30 00 s 0 00 Disable F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking 5 49 E Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode When vector control without with speed sensor is selected the response is constant Data for H95 Slow response Slows the rising edge of the current Insufficient braking torque may result at the thereby preventing reverse rotation at the start of DC start of DC braking braking Quick response Quickens the rising edge of the Reverse rotation may result depending on the current thereby accelerating the build up of the moment of inertia of the mechanical load and braking torque the coupling mechanism Output frequency Start of decelerating to stop Hz DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency F20 Q Time l l DC braking 1 Braking time F22 DC Braking 1 Braking level F21 0 Yee aaa Time DC braking Braking response mode H95 Gp It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking terminal command DCBRK P As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time s
321. herefore the search is greatly influenced by the residual voltage in the motor At factory shipment H46 data is preset to a correct value according to the motor capacity for the general purpose motor and basically there is no need to modify the data Depending on the motor characteristics however it may take time for residual voltage to disappear due to the secondary thermal time constant of the motor In such a case the inverter starts the motor with the residual voltage remaining which will cause an error in the speed search and may result in occurrence of an inrush current or an overvoltage alarm If it happens increase the value of H46 data and remove the influence of residual voltage If possible it is recommended to set the value around two times as large as the factory default value allowing a margin Cote e Be sure to auto tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling motor speed e When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency whichever is lower e During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search e Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below e Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters powe
322. hexadecimal Table 3 7 Running Status 3_07 Bit Assignment BUSY WBE AUN MOe One Agta aS ems 1 under voltage limiting control written Always 0 0 Always 0 EET 1 under torque limiting control a nan 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher pane Le ps Nov than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when 12 RL ready for run and frequency commands via 4 BRK _ 1 during braking communications link 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during deceleration 1 during DC braking lo wee 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction os m 1 under current limiting control o FWD 1 during running in the forward direction Table 3 8 Running Status 2 3_23 Bit Assignment Le Speed limiting under torque control a Not used Motor selection 00 Motor 1 01 Motor 2 10 Motor 3 11 Motor 4 Inverter drive control 0000 V f control with slip compensation inactive Not used 0001 Dynamic torque vector control 0010 V f control with slip compensation active 0011 V f control with speed sensor 0100 Dynamic vector control with speed sensor 0101 Vector control without speed sensor 0110 Vector control with speed sensor 1010 Torque control Vector control without speed sensor 1011 Torque control Vector control with speed sensor NO w A Table 3 9 Runni
323. hing operation between line and inverter refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 5 47 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter automatically reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall P0000 Follow the deceleration time specified 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation matches Note l i i 1e the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control E Restart after momentary power failure Continuous running level H15 Continuity of running P and 1 H92 H93 e Trip after decelerate to stop If a momentary power failure occurs when F14 is set to
324. his function is effective for improving the motor speed control ey The compensation value 1 is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking 4 3 OQ F D ies KR YOLOW AHL ONINNOAY H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function according to the motor driving conditions H68 dat Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone ic Accl Decel Base frequency or below Above the base frequency o 0 Embe Embe Enable Enable E Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuations and the motor speed control accuracy Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation since this control is an open loop V f control that does not perform the current control unlike the vector control The advantages of this control include larger maximum torque per output current than that the vector control E f control with speed sensor Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decre
325. hunting is caused in the motor speed control decrease the gain P Gain If the motor response is slow increase the gain ieee If the motor response is slow decrease the integral time OQ F D ies iN YOLOW AHL ONINNOAY 4 1 13 Preparation for practical operation After verifying normal motor running with the inverter in a test run connect the motor with the machinery and perform wiring for practical operation 1 Configure the application related function codes that operate the machinery 2 Check interfacing with the peripheral circuits 1 Mock alarm Generate a mock alarm by pressing the fr keys on the keypad for 5 seconds or more and check the alarm sequence The inverter should stop and issue an alarm output signal for any fault 2 Judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor When the multi function keypad is used it is necessary to set up the judgment reference level to be applied for the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor When the remote keypad is used the same setting up is also necessary in order to judge the life of the DC link bus capacitor under the practical operating conditions For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 3 I O checking Check interfacing with peripherals using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad in Programming mode For details refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 4 Analog input adjustment Adjust the analog inputs on term
326. ic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds for 22 kW or below or 3 seconds for 30 kW or above after power ON so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period 5 1 7 Terminals Y5A C and 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching sl Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line or direct on line starting use transistor outputs Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals f The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5A C and 30A B C The descriptions are in principle arranged in the numerical order of assigned data However highly relevant signals are collectively described where one of them first appears Refer to the function codes or signals in the Related function codes signals data column if any The JAGUAR VXG runs under V f control dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed
327. ically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes Integral time O A52 A53 A54 A55 A56 1 Y2 ojo viil S S S ali N O N Torque current under vector control R Ss a E T TT A eee ee ie 5 14 Refer to page 2 J D Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m 5 117 F codes E codes C codes P codes He b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes b codes Motor 3 Parameters control Cc ab 7 2 Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range g E to 52 Torque page e O b01 Maximum Frequency 3 25 0 to 500 0 Hz b02 Base Frequency 3 25 0 to 500 0 Hz 0 b03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 3 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage n Be EEEE eee ES 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series b04 Maximum Output Voltage 3 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Torque Boost 3 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to b03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 3 b06 Electric Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling
328. igh performance in the characteristics that are important in your machinery In rare cases the performance shown below may not be obtained due to various conditions including motor characteristics or mechanical rigidity The final performance should be determined by adjusting the speed control system or other elements with the inverter being connected to the machinery load If you have any questions contact your IMO representative F42 Dri Output Speed Speed Maximum Load Current Torque d rive control frequency control control ata stability accuracy response torque disturbance control accuracy V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Relative performance symbols Excellent O Good A Effective A Less effective Not effective 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 1 gt Driving a general purpose motor under the V f control F42 0 or 2 or dynamic torque vector control F42 1 requires configuring the following basic function codes Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Select standard 8 or 6 series motors with the function code P99 Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the r
329. ight load ones The MT mode is available for three phase 400 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 90 kW or above F80 Drive mode Application Continuous rated current level Overload A data capability frequency CT High Duty Constant Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is the 150 for 1 min 500 Hz mode Torque same as the inverter s one 200 for 3 s MT Medium Medium Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is one i a Duty mode rank higher than the inverter s one pees ae neve VT Low Duty Variable Capable of driving a motor whose capa isone 1 500 for 1 min 120 Hz mode Torque or two ranks higher than the inverter s one The MT VT mode inverter brings out the continuous rated current level which enables the inverter to drive a motor with one or two ranks higher capacity but its overload capability against the continuous current level decreases For the rated current level see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Some versions of the optional multi function keypad OP KP LCD do not display the content of the function code F80 when the data is 2 so 2 appears instead of 2 Medium T However the function code data can be configured normally Note The MT VT mode inverter is subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and internal processing as listed below DC braking Setting range Braking level 0 to 100 ete nee neous Setting range Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz In t
330. ility during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation E Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Running states that enable the current limiter Data for F43 During constant speed During deceleration 0 iisable Disable Disable 2 J Ql E Level F44 Data setting range 20 to 200 in ratio to the inverter rating F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating Note The inverter s rated current differs depending upon the CT MT or VT mode selected T C Z O O Z O O J m E Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Disable po An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level If any problem occurs in use of the equipment or machine is expected when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time Cote e Sin
331. ime specified which may look as if the droop control is disabled By contrast the vector control without with speed sensor contains the current control system and the inverter does not trip even at an abrupt change in load so the acceleration deceleration time does not affect the droop control It is therefore possible to eliminate load unbalance using the droop control even during accelerating decelerating H30 Communications Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or fieldbus option allows you to issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitor the inverter running information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself or computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or fieldbus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the fieldbus LE Inverter itself Selected command l i Frequency command ON Run command Port 1 RJ 45 connector RS 485 communications link LO Port 2 Terminals on control PCB Fieldbus Option Be a ee ee ee RS 485 communications link _ If no LE is assigned the command source selected by H30 y98 will apply 9 105 Command sources selectable Command sources Description Sources except RS 485 communications link and fieldbus Inverter itself Frequency command source
332. imiter high and low bias frequency jump frequency jogging operation pre excitation switch to commercial power commercial power switching sequence cooling fan ON OFF control select motor 2 to 4 protect motor from dew condensation universal DI universal DO universal AO rotational direction limitation e Overload prevention control auto search slip compensation automatic deceleration anti regenerative control droop control PID process control PID dancer control Deceleration characteristics improving braking capability auto energy saving function e Auto tuning offline e Life early warning cumulative inverter run time cumulative motor run time e Light alarm retry command loss detection momentary power failure Digital input Run forward command run reverse command select multi frequency select ACC DEC time enable 3 wire operation coast to a stop reset alarm enable external alarm trip ready for jogging select frequency command 2 1 select motor 1 to 4 enable DC braking select torque limiter level switch to commercial power UP increase output frequency DOWN decrease output frequency enable data change with keypad cancel PID control switch normal inverse operation interlock cancel torque control enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option universal DI enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting force to stop pre excitation reset PID integral and differential components
333. improve the system performance in the dancer roll positioning accuracy E Detection width of dancer position deviation J58 J58 specifies the bandwidth in the range of 1 to 100 Specifying 0 does not switch PID constants E P Gain 2 J59 Data setting range 0 000 to 30 000 times m Integral time 2 J60 Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 s m D Differential time 2 J61 Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 s Descriptions for J59 J60 and J61 are the same as those of PID control P Gain J03 I Integral time J04 and D Differential time J05 respectively J62 PID Control PID control block selection J62 allows you to select either adding or subtracting the PID dancer processor output to or from the primary speed command Also it allows you to select either controlling the PID dancer processor output by the ratio against the primary speed command or compensating the primary speed command by the absolute value Hz Data for J62 Control value type Operation for the primary speed command po 0 0 Absoltevalwe Hz pt 0 1 Absolute value Hz 2 1 0 ee Ratio Ratio J68 to J70 Brake Signal Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency speed and Brake OFF timer J71 J72 Brake Signal Brake ON frequency speed and Brake ON timer J95 J96 Brake Signal Brake OFF torque and Speed selection These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of vertical carrier machines It
334. in power is shut down the inverter automatically measures elapsed hours the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and corrects the elapsed time The display method is the same as for 5_06 above ee Shows the remaining lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor which is 527 Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor estimated by subtracting the elapsed time from the lifetime 10 years sing h remaining hours The display method is the same as for 5_06 above Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 2 Cumulative run time of motor 2 l The display method is the same as for 23 above Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 3 Cumulative run time of motor 3 i i The display method is the same as for 5_23 above 3 28 Og Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Continued shows Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 4 Cumulative run time of motor 4 The display method is the same as for 5_23 above Shows the time remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the cumulative run time of motor 1 from the maintenance interval specified by H78 This function applies to motor 1 only Display range Oto 9999 The x10 LED turns ON Remaining time before the next motor 1 maintenance 2 5 D 2 oO Time remaining before the next maintenance hour Displayed value x 10 Shows the content of the mot
335. inal applied motor 200 V class series 400 V class series Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 07 Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If 22 kW or below 6 00 s the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly Cote e When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 e Specify the rated voltage at base frequency F05 at the normal value although the inverter controls the motor keeping the rated voltage rated voltage at base frequency low under vector control without speed sensor After the auto tuning the inverter automatically reduces the rated voltage at base frequency e Vector control without speed sensor is not available for MT mode inverters Function Factory default N F t Motor 1 selection 2 a teristics 2 0 Motor characteristics 0 Motor 1 S that of th lied mot l Ra ie spac acs at ot ne appiied motor Nominal applied motor capacity 200 V class series 400 V class series Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 07 Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test drivin
336. inals 12 C1 and V2 using the function codes related to the offset filter and gain that minimize analog input errors For details refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 Calibrating the FM output Calibrate the full scale of the analog meter connected to the terminals FM1 and FM2 using the reference voltage equivalent to 10 VDC To output the reference voltage it is necessary to select the analog output test with the function code F31 F35 14 6 Clearing the alarm history Clear the alarm history saved during the system setup with the function code H97 1 Depending upon the situation of the practical operation it may become necessary to modify the settings of the torque boost F09 acceleration deceleration times F07 F08 and the PI controller for speed control under the vector control Confirm the function code data and modify them properly Note 4 2 Special Operations 4 2 1 Jogging operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor 1 Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display jog e Switch the inverter to Running mode see page 3 2 e Press the fr N keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to jog again Tip Function code C20 specifies the jogging frequency H54 and H55 specify the acceleration and deceleration times respectively These three function codes are exclusive t
337. ing F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a akg frequency limiter high F04 to F05 Base Frequency 1 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage H65 H66 Non linear V f Pattern 3 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 H65 and H66 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque To prevent this problem use F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 to increase the voltage Note however that the inverter cannot output voltage exceeding its input power voltage es wma oin i Voltage The setting of the maximum output voltage is disabled Maximum frequency F03 F06 when the auto torque boost torque vector control vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor is selected Base frequency o roa oS foo O Non linear V f pattern 3 Disabled when the auto t
338. ing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or an accident might result e Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Wiring A WARNING Ifno zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise a fire could occur When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Be sure to connect an opti
339. iod specified by the error processing timer y03 y13 display an RS 485 communications error er8 for y02 and erp for y12 and then stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Retry communication during the period specified by the error processing timer y03 y13 If a communications link is recovered continue operation Otherwise display an RS 485 communications error er for y02 and erp for y12 and stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Continue to run even when a communications error occurs For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual l 2 3 RA 5 147 m Timer y03 for port 1 and y13 for port 2 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s y03 or y13 specifies an error processing timer If the timer count has elapsed due to no response from the other end when a query has been issued the inverter interprets it as an error occurrence See the No response error detection time y08 y18 given on the next page E Baud rate y04 for port 1 and y14 for port 2 y04 or yl4 specifies the transmission speed for RS 485 Data for y04 and y14 Transmission speed bps communication ed 2400 For JAGUAR Loader via the RS 485 communications link 4800 specify the transmission speed that matches the connected a 9600 computer 19200 38400 m Data length y05 for port 1 and y15 for port 2 yOS or yl5 specifies the character length for RS 485 Data for y05 and y15 Data length For JAGUAR Lo
340. ion 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 The wire size of UL Open Type and Enclosed Type are common Please contact us if UL Open Type exclusive wire is necessary xi Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION Required torque ERS bn N Wire size AWG mm L1 R L2 S L3 T U V W Aux control power supply Inverter type Power supply voltage Class J fuse size A g go D or or fas foe z Z Circuit breaker trip size A Main terminal Aux Fan power supply Aux fan power supply 60 C Cu wire A N Aux control power supply 75 C Cu wire 300x2 152x2 2 400x2 3 203x2 250x2 127x2 CT e 300x2 152x2 800 400x2 203x2 1200 424 7 10 6 10 6 48 1 2 1 2 te 253x2 1200 600x2 350x3 1600 1773 500x3 2533 6003 VT 2200 1600 304x3 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 The wire size of UL Open Type and Enclosed Type are common Please contact us if UL Open Type exclusive wire is necessary 350x2 1772 400x2 2032 300x2 1522 350x2 1772 5 9 5 9 5 5 5 9 5 5 9 8 s 9 8 9 5 5 crmvrmn VXG520AL 4E VXGO650AL 4E 315 VXG740AL 4E VXGO650AL 4E VXG740AL 4E VXG840AL 4E VXG740AL 4E 400 VXG840AL 4E VXG9I60AL 4E VXG840AL 4E Q 400x2 203x2 500x2 253x2 Three phase 400 V 600x
341. ion Y pais pe a es i Terminal V2 Extended Function O EA a manila m Torque limit control mode Torque limit is performed by limiting torque current flowing across the motor The graph below shows the relationship between the torque and the output frequency at the constant torque current limit Torque Constant torque limit Constant output current limit Output frequency Base frequency 5 57 m Torque limiter 1 1 1 2 2 1 and 2 2 F40 F41 E16 and E17 Data setting range 300 to 300 999 Disable These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque limiters become activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque Torque limit feature F40 Torque limiter 1 1 Driving torque current limiter 1 F41 Torque limiter 1 2 Braking torque current limiter 1 E16 Torque limiter 2 1 Driving torque current limiter 2 Bt Torque limiter 2 2 Braking torque current limiter 2 Note Although the data setting range for F40 F41 E16 and E17 is from positive to negative values 300 to oe 300 specify positive values in practice If a negative value is specified the inverter interprets it as an absolute value The torque limiter determined depending on the overload current actually limits the torque current output Therefore the torque current output is automatically limited at a value lower than 300 the maximum setting value E Analog torque limit values E61 to E63 The torque limit valu
342. ion code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters Initialize motor 2 parameters Initialize motor 3 parameters Initialize motor 4 tate ee H04 Auto reset Times oe saoe toe ooo Disable 1 to 10 H05 Reset interval 0 5t020 0s eee 5 20 0s HOG A codes b codes r codes HO7 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern Linear S curve Weak 5 101 S curve Arbitrary according to H57 to H60 data Curvilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation Disable Enable Reverse rotation inhibited J codes d codes U codes Enable Forward rotation inhibited The shaded function codes E are applicable to the quick setup 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes Drive control setting w o w Torque sae Vif ie PG PG control Code Name Data setting range Cc z Oat Oc G2 E am O HO9 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration 1 Coast to stop H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting 0 Disable Mode selection 4 Enable H13 Restart Mode after Momentary 0 1 to 10 0s P
343. ion code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the amp key to return to the menu from the function code list CTip Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the amp key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Gip It is possible to change or add function code items subject to quick setup For details consult your Fuji Electric representatives 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting Z _ through y__ in Programming mode allows you to set up all function codes To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation The basic key operation in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display the desired function code group from the choices Z __ through y_ 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of function codes for the selected function code group 4 Use the N and V keys to display the desired function code then press the am
344. ion filter 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 005 vty ty d11 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times 10 0 FY N d12 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s 0 100 ON d13 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s d14 Feedback Input Pulse input format lt 0 Pulse train sign Pulse train input 5 135 1 Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase shift d15 Encoder pulse resolution 0014 to EA60 hex 20 to 60000 pulses RR Ro oO A N O S d16 Pulse count factor 1 1 to 9999 d17 Pulse count factor 2 1 to 9999 d21 Speed Agreement PG Error 0 0 to 50 0 10 0 5 136 Hysteresis width d22 Detection timer 0 00 to 10 00 s d23 PG Error Processing 0 Continue to run 1 Stop running with alarm 1 2 Stop running with alarm 2 d24 Zero Speed Control 0 Not permit at startup pees seman 5 136 a32 Py py y os 433 Speed mit 2 oono er d41 Application defined Control 0 Disable Ordinary control N Y N 5 137 e e i i wiv ee ee eT E a a ee ee a53 Reseve 9 oso OOOO o aae asa Resewe 9 oso OSS o a Pw a55 Reseve 9 o oo o y a d d59 Command Pulse Rate Input 0 Pulse train sign Pulse train input Pulse input format 1 Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase shift on ro Z 5 51 5 136 tat ee e oO Q N J t e ek oO Q N oj 8 ee ee e ee e PCERE EEE mae
345. ion in the normal starting sequence e Ifthe Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency e The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage condition whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit In a configuration where a magnetic contactor 1s installed on the output side of the inverter the inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the momentary power failure shuts down the operating power of the magnetic contactor causing the contactor circuit to open When the contactor circuit is open the inverter is cut off from the motor and load and the voltage drop in the DC link bus is not great enough to be recognized as a power failure In such an event restart after a recovery from momentary power failure does not work properly as designed To solve this connect the interlock command JZ line to the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor so that a momentary power failure can sure be detected For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 Function code E01 to E07 data 22 OFF No momentary power failure has occurred A momentary power failure has occurred Restart after a momentary power failure enabled During a momentary power failur
346. ion of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices 3 Tuning Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the Gs key The blinking of Z or 2 on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is eu key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 D The moment a run command is entered the display of or 2 lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s 4 If P04 2 after the tuning in above the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 75 s Deceleration time If P04 2 after the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon
347. ion test of control circuit Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit Use a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the wiring connected to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter 7 6 7 6 IMO Inverter warranty statement 7 6 1 Terms of IMO 5 year warranty e IMO Jaguar Inverters are covered by a5 year warranty from date of despatch e Inthe event of failure due to faulty components or inferior workmanship the Inverter will be replaced or repaired free of charge at IMO s discretion e Warranty replacements and repaired units will be despatched free of charge all costs related to faulty units being returned to IMO for inspection repair are the responsibility of the sender e Incircumstances where it is viable for the Inverter to be repaired in situ due to size 30kw an Engineer from IMO or contracted to represent IMO can be supplied Site visits are chargeable at IMO s current service rate any warranty parts will be replaced free of charge e All Inverters require a Returns Authorisation reference to be supplied with the Inverter upon returning the drive to IMO this reference can be obtained fro
348. ion time 1 to 4 POE ALAO ME If no terminal command is assigned only the Acceleration E12 E13 ON OFF acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 is deceleration time 3 effective A aon E14 E15 ON ON deceleration time 4 Atoso When the terminal command JOG is ON jogging operation is i t ae H54 H55 possible Data 10 p LL Refer to the description of C20 When the terminal command STOP is OFF the motor decelerates NE E H56 to a stop in accordance with the deceleration time for forced stop p H56 After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm er6 displayed Data 30 m Acceleration Deceleration pattern H07 H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns patterns to control output frequency Acceleration Data for Function deceleration Motion H07 code pattern Linear The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve To reduce an impact that Weak l make on the machine the to be applied to all of the four inverter gradually accelerates or inflection zones is fixed at 5 of decelerates the motor in both the the maximum frequency S curve Arbitrary starting and ending zones of i acceleration or deceleration l l Arbitrary The acceleration deceleration rate can be arbitrarily specified for each of the four inflection zones Curvilinear Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows d
349. ircuit for digital input output signals modify them arbitrarily and configure a simple relay sequence inside the inverter In a customizable logic one step component is composed of 2 inputs and 1 output logical operation including timer and a total of ten steps can be used to configure a sequence E Specifications Input signal Operation block Logical operation counter etc 13 types Timer 5 types output 5 139 E Block diagram Customizable logic Input signals Operation ae Customizable logic U03 to U05 output signals Operation block Operation block Input 1 of Operation G block Input 2 QO J D Ql Digital inputs Digital outputs X terminals Y terminals T C Z O O Z Q O J O o i a Inverter s sequence processor FWD TD1 Internal output signals Internal input signals E Customizable Logic Mode selection U00 U00 specifies whether to enable the sequence configured by the customizable logic function or disable it to operate the inverter only by input terminal signals and others C o a S Enable Customizable logic operation m Customizable Logic Setting U01 to U50 In a customizable logic one step is composed of the components shown in the following block diagram Input 1 O Input 2 O General purpose timer Logic circuit O Output 5 140 Function codes for each step eine een Note These items
350. is possible to set the conditions of the brake releasing turning on signals current frequency or torque so that a hoisted load does not fall down at the start or stop of the operation or so that the load applied to the brake is reduced 9 129 E Brake signal BRKS E20 to E24 and E27 data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Releasing the Brake When any of the inverter output current output frequency or torque command value exceeds the specified level of the brake signal J68 J69 J95 for the period specified by J70 Brake signal Brake OFF timer the inverter judges that required motor torque is generated and turns the signal BRKS ON for releasing the brake This prevents a hoisted load from falling down due to an insufficient torque when the brake 1s released Data setting range 0 to 300 Brake OFF current Set it putting the inverter rated current at See Note below 100 Available only under Brake OFF frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz rew ee Brake OFF timer 0 0t050s 0to5 0s J95 Brake OFF torque 0 to 300 Available a under vector control Note The inverter rated current differs depending upon the drive mode selected CT MT or VT 2 J Ql Turning the Brake ON When the run command is OFF and the output frequency drops below the level specified by J71 Brake signal Brake ON frequency speed and stays below the level for the period specifie
351. is wrong interchange the A and B phase wires 6 Wiring to the motor is Check the wiring to the motor incorrect gt Connect the inverter output terminals U V and W to the motor input terminals U V and W respectively 6 19 Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 7 The motor speed does not rise Check the data of F40 Torque limiter 1 1 due to the torque limiter gt Correct the F40 data Or set the F40 data to 999 Disable if the torque limiter operation operation is not needed 29 nrb NTC wire break error Problem A wire break is found in the NTC thermistor detection circuit Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The NTC thermistor cable is Check whether the motor cable is broken broken gt Replace the motor cable 2 The temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor motor is extremely low lower Reconsider the use environment of the motor than 30 C 3 The NTC thermistor is broken Measure the resistance of the NTC thermistor gt Replace the motor 30 err Mock alarm Problem The LED displays the alarm err Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The f9 3 keys were held gt To escape from this alarm state press the key down for more than 5 seconds 31 cof PID feedback wire break Problem The PID feedback wire is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The PID feedback signal wire
352. isable the electronic thermal overload protection During deceleration Braking time s X Motor rated capacity k Discharging capability kWs eee Expression 1 During running at a constant speed Discharging capability kWs Braking time s x Motor rated capacity kW Expression 2 Crip When the F50 data is set to 0 To be applied to the braking resistor built in type no specification of the P discharging capability is required m Allowable average loss F51 The allowable average loss refers to a tolerance for motor continuous operation which is obtained based on the ED and motor rated capacity kW Data for F51 0 001 to 99 99 0 001 to 99 99 kW During deceleration ED T00 x Motor rated capacity kW Expression 3 Allowable average loss kWs 5 During constant speed operation ED Allowable average loss kWs a x Motor rated capacity kW Expression 4 E Resistance F52 F52 specifies the resistance of the braking resistor F80 Switching between CT MT and VT drive modes F80 specifies whether to drive the inverter in the Constant Torque CT medium Torque MT or Variable Torque VT mode To change the F80 data it is necessary to press the 6 A keys or amp keys simultaneous keying Data for a Overload Maximum Application Continuous current rating level capability CT High Duty mode default Heavy load VT Low Duty ae Light load M
353. ise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm 0 u With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 It is recommended to set the carrier frequency at 5 kHz or above under vector control without with speed sensor DO NOT set it at 1 kHz or below E Motor Sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone only for motors under V f control This setting is effective when the carrier frequency specified by function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor Cote If the tone level is set too high the output current may become unstable or mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also this function code may not be very effective for certain types of motor Data for F27 a ae Disable Tone level 0 Enable Clone level 1 Enabie Lovie level Enable Tone level 3 5 53 F29 to F31 Analog Output FM1 and FM2 Mode selection Voltage adjustment Function F32 F34 F35 These function codes allow terminals FM1 and FM2 to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or current The magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable E Mode selection F29 and F32 F29 and F32 specify the property of the output
354. isplays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor A LO UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor RUN LED Lights when running with a run command entered by the fu key by terminal command FWD or REV or through the communications link Operation Keys KEYPAD Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the fuy key F02 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes however pressing the uy key cannot CONTROL LED run the inverter even if this indicator lights These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them LED Wait LEDs Unit Hz A kW r min and m min Indicators 3 LEDs Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light MHz UA kw Lights when the data to display exceeds 9999 When this LED lights the displayed value x 10 is the actual value x10 LED Example If the LED monitor displays 7234 and the x10 LED lights it means that the actual value is 1 234 x 10 12 340 Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Continued LED Monitor Keys The USB port with a mini B connector
355. it General 1 A general purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the transistor purpose relay output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 output Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3 A cos o 0 3 48 VDC 0 5 A 2 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals Y5A and Y5C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals Y5A and Y5C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed 30A B C Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to output stop the motor for any Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos o 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A error 2 Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 to Y4 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output Relay output 3 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals 30A and 30C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals 30A and 30C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed 2 22 Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions RS 485 A communications port transmits data through the RS 485 multipoint protocol communications between the inverter a
356. it supply RO TO cal oO 5 a T 5 a oO gt lt S lt Fi ne Aux fan power supply R1 T1 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C Vii Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued A WARNINGA Recommended wire size mm_ MCCB or RCD ELCB 1 Main power input 2 Rated current L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding BG W W o W W o DCR DCR ae DCR 185x2 oo 185x2 p02 x2 fas Fo 4E 240x2 VXG840AL 4E VT 1200 a 3003 24044 VXG9I60AL 4E 500 2404 VXG1170AL 4E 630 1400 call ca 300 4 VXG1370AL 4E The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details Inverter type Power supply voltage CT MT VT mode U V W 2 P1 P 2 Control circuit supply RO TO Aux fan power supply R1 T1 Nominal applied motor DC reactor P DB 2 Aux control power Inverter outputs Braking resistor VXG520AL 4E gt D 5 lt oO n S lt an b E Sn 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PV
357. itches the motor to any of the 2nd to 4th motors and also switches the function code group enabled to the one corresponding to the selected motor as listed in Table 5 5 Note that however the functions listed in Table 5 6 are unavailable when any of the 2nd to 4th motors are selected If A42 b42 or r42 is set to 1 Parameter Switch to particular A codes b codes or r codes the combination of M2 M3 and M4 switches the particular parameters marked with Y in the Object of parameter switching column in Table 5 5 For other parameters ones in the 1st motor column remain effective Table 5 5 Function Codes to be Switched Ist 2nd 3rd 4th Parameter motor motor switching Mammens OOOO OOo o B ta OOOO o Rated voluge atbasefrequeney SSSCSCS CSP AOS Electronic thermal overload protection for motor bos Select motor characteristics Pent aor eor F12 Aos oos o fao ww Braking time seringen O i TAD a Drive conoisen O OOOO o i o fa oa a No ofpotesy Por ais bis ris Name 2 gt D 2 Ql Overload detection level Thermal time constant DC braking Braking starting frequency ET ae Braking level SAdOO NOILONNA Rated current Auto tuning No load current R1 X Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation response time Slip compensation gain for braking Rated slip frequency Iron loss factor 1 Iron loss fa
358. ition 100 0 100 command PID feedback If the sensor output is unipolar the PID dancer control operates within the range from 0 to 100 so virtually specify the value at 100 as coefficient B That is suppose b Display value at 0 then Display coefficient B 2b A L For details about the PID control refer to the description of JO1 and later LY For the display method of the PID command and its feedback refer to the description of E43 E Display coefficient for analog input monitor By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter you can monitor the state of peripheral devices via the communications link By using an appropriate display coefficient you can also have various values converted into physical values such as temperature and pressure before they are displayed Value displayed PID display coefficient A E40 PID display coefficient B E41 Analog inp g input 0 100 terminals 12 V2 C1 LL To set up the analog input monitor use function codes E61 through E63 Use E43 to choose the item to be displayed E42 LED Display Filter E42 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output frequency output current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad If the display varies unstably so as to be hard to read due to load fluctuation or other causes increase this filter time c
359. itor the inverter s alarm status on the keypad e The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may trigger that of the inverter s internal parts e g charging resistor To avoid such a breakdown linkage introduce an MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if a DC link voltage establishment signal is not issued within three seconds after the MC is switched on For the braking transistor built in type of inverters assign a transistor error output signal DBAL on inverter s programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input circuit 7 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter output secondary circuit If a magnetic contactor MC is inserted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes it should be switched on and off when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped This prevents the contact point from getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC The MC should not be equipped with any main circuit surge killer Applying a commercial power to the inverter s output circuit breaks the inverter To avoid it interlock the MC on the motor s commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit so that they are not switched ON at the same time 8 Surge absorber surge killer Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter s output secondary lines E Noise reduction If noise
360. ives a description of the basic key operation in Quick Setup following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 2 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data Frequency command source from the factory default N V keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example Ofn is displayed 2 If anything other than Ofn is displayed use the and keys to display Ofn 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of function codes 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired function code 07 in this example then press the key The data of this function code appears In this example data 0 of O appears 5 Change the function code data using the N and keys In this example press the key two times to change data 0 to 2 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example 02 Pressing the amp key instead of the G amp key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the funct
361. ix lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt i lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt x lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt IZ lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt iz lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Z Z 2 F Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m F codes E codes C codes P codes lt lt Terminal C1 wire break C10FF Speed valid DNZS Speed agreement DSAG Frequency speed arrival signal 3 FAR3 PG error detected PG ERR Positioning completion signal PSET H codes Z Z A codes lt Z b codes Z 84 1084 98 1098 99 1099 101 1101 102 1102 105 1105 2001 3001 2002 3002 2003 3003 2004 3004 2005 3005 2006 3006 2007 3007 Maintenance timer Light alarm Alarm output for any alarm Enable circuit failure detected Enable input OFF Braking transistor broken Output of step 1 Output of step 2 Output of step 3 Output of step 4 Output of step 5 Output of step 6 Output of step 7 5 20 MNT L ALM ALM DECF EN OFF DBAL S001 S002 S003 S004 S005 SO06 SO07 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt r codes J codes U codes Code U03 U04 U05 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25
362. kly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a deviation occurs Too long differential time makes the inverter output oscillation more Setting short differential time will weakens the suppression effect when the deviation occurs J codes Deviation Time MV _ Time 5 124 The combined uses of P I and D actions are described below 1 PI control PI control which is a combination of P and I actions is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused by P action PI control always acts to minimize the deviation even if a commanded value changes or external disturbance steadily occurs However the longer the integral time the slower the system response to quick changed control P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components 2 PD control In PD control the moment that a deviation occurs the control rapidly generates greater MV manipulated value than that generated by D action alone to suppress the deviation increase When the deviation becomes small the behavior of P action becomes small A load including the integral component in the controlled system may oscillate due to the action of the integral component if P action alone is applied In such a case use PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P action for keeping the system stable That is PD control is applied to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process 3 PID control PID
363. l 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 9 3 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the motor and panel MCCB or Metal panel RCD ELCB Power supply compliant filter optional Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 9 3 Mounting the Inverter with EMC compliant Filter in a Metal Panel 9 2 9 3 3 Leakage current of EMC filter built in type of inverters An EMC filter uses grounding capacitors for noise suppression which increase leakage current When using an EMC filter built in type of inverters therefore check whether there is no problem with electrical systems ACAUTION Three Phase PDS Power Drive System with touch currents gt 3 5 mA AC or gt 10 mA DC As the touch current leakage current of inverters with EMC filter is relatively high it is of essential importance to always assure a reliable connection to Protective Earth PE In Table 9 1 for the inverter types whose leakage currents are equal to or exceed the critical value of 35 mA AC or 10 mA DC IEC 61800 5 1 the minimum cross sectional area of the PE conductor should be 10 mm2 Cu conductors 16 mm Al conductors An electric shock could occur Table 9 1 Leakage Current of EMC Filter Built in Type of Inverters Input Leakag
364. l y09 for port 1 and y19 for port 2 Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s y09 or yl9 specifies the latency time after the end of receiving a query sent from the host equipment such as a computer or PLC until the start of sending the response This function allows using equipment whose response time is slow while a network requires quick response enabling the inverter to send a response timely by the latency time setting Host equipment Response Inverter T1 T1 Response interval a where a is the processing time inside the inverter This time may vary depending on the processing status and the command processed in the inverter LU For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual CNote When setting the inverter with JAGUAR Loader via the RS 485 communications link pay sufficient attention to the performance and or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as RS 485 RS 232C converter Note that some protocol converters monitor the communications status and switch the sending receiving of transmission data by a timer 5 148 OQ J Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m m Protocol selection y10 for port 1 y10 specifies the communications protocol for port 1 Data for y10 For JAGUAR Loader via the RS 485 communications FO Modbus RTU protocol link only y10 can be used for protocol selection Set the JAGUAR Loader protocol y10 data at 1 General purpose inverter prot
365. l cise e a P11 Slip compensation gain for braking Z P12 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 5 98 9 P13 Iron loss factor 1 O Pid ron os factor 2 0 00 t 20 00 fv z P15 Iron loss factor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Ae Ay O P16 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 0 103000 v ha O P17 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 ia P18 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 0 to 300 0 Mv vej D P19 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 t0300 vj P20 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Le ee P21 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 factor a P22 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 bai Y2 factor b P23 Magnetic saturation extension peee Y2 factor c P53 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Y1 Y2 P54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y1 Y2 P55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A 1 Y P56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 YY vector control on par Resened _ fo 00016 200008 99 Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor arco 0 standard motors 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Not used 3 Motor characteristics 3 Not used 4 Other motors F H codes High Performance Functions codes E codes Drive control Default Data setting range setting Change when running H03 Data Initialization Disable initialization P codes Initialize all funct
366. l commands SS J SS2 SS4 and SS8 ON OFF selectively switches the reference frequency of the inverter in 15 steps To use these features you need to assign SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Select multi frequency to the digital input terminals with C05 to C19 data 0 1 2 and 3 5 92 C20 E Multi frequency 1 to 15 C05 through C19 Data setting range 0 00 to 500 00 Hz The combination of SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 and the selected frequencies are as follows C06 mulifrequency 2 C14 multi frequency 10 Other than multi frequency includes frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 and other command sources except multi frequency commands mE When enabling PID control J01 1 2 or 3 Under the PID control a multi frequency command can be specified as a preset value 3 different frequencies It can also be used for a manual speed command even with the PID control being canceled Hz PID ON or for a primary reference frequency under the PID dancer control e PID command OF OFF Command specified by 02 po OFF ON Miltisfrequency by CO8 ON FR Mlti Frequency by C12 O 0N ON Multisfrequency by C16 O C08 C12 and C16 can be specified in increments of 1 Hz The following gives the conversion formula between the PID command value and the data to be specified Data to be specified PID command x Maximum frequency F03 100 Data to be specified C08 C12 C16 Maximum frequency F03 ae
367. l for 2 ms 10 Input hold General purpose timer Hold function of previous values of 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer If the hold control signal is OFF the logic circuit outputs input signals if it is ON the logic circuit retains the previous values of input signals the counter value by one When the counter value reaches the target one the output signal turns ON Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to zero 12 Decrement counter Decrement counter with reset input By the rising edge of an input signal the logic circuit decrements 11 Increment counter Increment counter with reset input By the rising edge of an input signal the logic circuit increments the counter value by one When the counter value reaches zero the output signal turns ON Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to the initial value Timer with reset input Timer output with reset input If an input signal turns ON the output signal turns ON and the timer starts When the period specified by the timer has elapsed the output signal turns OFF regardless of the input signal state Turning the reset signal ON resets the current timer value to zero and turns the output OFF The block diagrams for individual functions are given below 1 Through output 2 AND 3 OR General purpose timer T Output General purpose timer General purpose timer 5 142 gt Ql SAdO9 NOILONN4 4 XOR
368. l frequency scttins Fixed at the initial setting 0 Hz JO1 to J06 JO8 to J13 J15 to J19 PID control J56 to J62 E40 E41 H91 Disabled Brake signal J68 to J72 J95 J96 Disabled Rotational direction limitation Disabled Maintenance Interval Preset Startup H78 H79 Disabled Count for Maintenance NTC thermistor H26 H27 Disabled E ASR Switching Time d25 Data setting range 0 000 to 1 000 s Parameter switching is possible even during operation For example speed control P Gain and I Integral time listed in Table 5 5 can be switched Switching these parameters during operation may cause an abrupt change of torque and result in a mechanical shock depending on the driving condition of the load To reduce such a mechanical shock the inverter decreases the abrupt torque change using the ramp function of ASR Switching Time d25 5 119 5 2 7 J codes Application Functions 1 J01 PID Control Mode selection Under PID control the inverter detects the state of a control target object with a sensor or the similar device and compares it with the commanded value e g temperature control command If there is any deviation between them the PID control operates so as to minimize it That is it is a closed loop feedback system that matches controlled variable feedback amount The PID control expands the application area of the inverter to the process control e g flow control pressure control and temperature contr
369. l load In environments with a surrounding temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may be shorter Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life 1 2 7 3 1 Judgment on service life The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the voltage applied time etc The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life The life prediction function can also issue early warning signals if the life time alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals Refer to 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm later in this section Table 7 3 lists the parts whose service life can be predicted and details the life prediction function The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the surrounding temperature and other usage environments Table 7 3 Life Prediction prediction DC link bus Measurement of discharging time 85 or lower of the initial At periodic 5_05 capacitor Measures the discharging time of capacitance at shipment inspection Capacitance the DC link bus capacitor when See 1 Measuring the H98 Bit 3 0 the main power is shut down and capacitance of DC link bus calculates the capacitance
370. l to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor forcibly Function Data for H69 Force to stop with actual deceleration time exceeding Control mode three times the specified one E Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H76 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Since increasing the output frequency too much in the torque limit control mode is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting gt Ql Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data makes the anti regenerative control capability high e Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration Note time e When a braking unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control The automatic deceleration control may be activated at the same time when a braking unit starts operation which may make the deceleration time fluctuate e If the set deceleration time is too short the DC link bus voltage of the inverter rises quickly and consequently the automatic deceleration may not follow the voltage rise In such a case specify a longer deceleration ti
371. l value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command value using function 3 10 PID command value code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command value x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID feedback amount using function 32 11 e code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears dd Torque limit value Driving torque limit value A based on motor rated torque alo Torque limit value Braking torque limit value B based on motor rated torque 2 14 Raos y When this setting is 100 the LED monitor shows 1 00 time of the value to E 8 be displayed If no ratio setting is selected appears Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for ae Li d pa speed indication 7 al ale MN Tf the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Not used PE Not usod A a Not usod CA Notwedy i a s Notwedy E PID output value in 100 at the maximum frequency Ca PID output value If PID control is disabled appears 3 22 Flux command value Flux command value in
372. larms available Absolute value alarm While PV lt AL or AH lt PV PID ALM is ON PID feedback PV PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL alarm AH J13 J12 Absolute value alarm with Hold Same as above with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Same as above with Latch 3 ie Absolute value alarm with Hold and Same as above with Hold and Latch Latch 4 Deviation alarm While PV lt SV AL or SV AH lt PV PID ALM is ON PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL alarm AH J13 J12 PID feedback PV PID command value SV Deviation alarm with Hold Same as above with Hold E en Deviation alarm with Latch Same as above with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch Same as above with Hold and Latch SV PID process command PV PID feedback amount 5 127 Hold During the power on sequence the alarm output is kept OFF disabled even when the monitored quantity is within the alarm range Once it goes out of the alarm range and comes into the alarm range again the alarm is enabled Latch Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON the alarm will remain ON even if it goes out of the alarm range To release the latch perform a reset by using the key or turning the terminal command RST ON Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm E Upper level alarm AH J12 J12 sp
373. lays one tenth of the actual value with the x10 LED lit 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter u in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter drives the motor under the PID control specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for 7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 8 The analog input monitor can appear only when the analog input monitor function is assigned to any of the analog input terminals by any of function codes E61 to E63 20 Q Qappears under the V f control 0 0 CAEN A _ Motor output in kW 16 0 0 J gt N S Function code E42 LED display filter allows you to filter the monitoring signals for the monitor items such as output frequency and output current Increase the E42 data if the monitored values are unstable and unreadable due to fluctuation of load Tip 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms The JAGUAR VXG identifies abnormal states in two categories Heavy al
374. link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions When bit 3 of H98 data is 1 the inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF This measurement requires setting up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the practical operation using the setup procedure given below ee mem ene man men Reference capacitance setup procedure 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 1 refer to function code H98 2 Turn OFF all run commands 3 Make the inverter ready to be turned OFF under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Turn OFF the inverter and the following operations are automatically performed The inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Turn ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacit
375. ll of the four notch filters apply to the 1st motor d11tod13 P Gain Integral time and Output filter Refer to d01 These function codes control the speed control sequence for jogging operations The block diagrams and function codes related to jogging operations are the same as for normal operations Since this speed control sequence is exclusive to jogging operations specify these function codes to obtain higher speed response than that of normal operations for smooth jogging operations For details refer to the corresponding descriptions d01 to d04 and d06 about the speed control sequence for normal operations 5 134 2 F Ql T C Z O O Z QO J m d14tod17 Feedback Input Pulse input format Encoder pulse resolution Pulse count factor 1 and Pulse count factor 2 These function codes specify the speed feedback input under vector control with speed sensor E Feedback Input Pulse input format d14 d14 specifies the speed feedback input format Negative polarity Positive polarity gt Pulse train sign OFF ON Pulse train input Pulse train sign Pulse train input Positive Negative i polarity polarity Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse T ra a a N Reverse rotation pulse gt Forward rotation puse ___ L i Set the d14 data to 2 for Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control Run Run forward g
376. ll the Inverter being stopped state Output signal O RUN These signals come ON when the inverter is running Goes OFF even during DC braking or Under V f control dew condensation prevention These signals come ON if the inverter output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and go OFF if it drops below the stop frequency The RUN signal can also be used as a Speed valid signal DNZS Under vector control both RUN and RUN2 come ON when zero speed control or servo lock function is enabled Comes ON even during DC braking pre exciting zero speed control or dew condensation prevention m Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given m Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output judging from the internally calculated torque or torque command This signal goes OFF when the detected torque is a driving one and it goes ON when it is a braking one 5 79 E Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 Inverter output limiting wit
377. loss on the terminal C1 inverter keeping speed output speed arrived PG error detected maintenance timer light alarm alarm relay contact output for any fault braking resistor broken positioning completion signal enable circuit failure detected customizable logic output signal Analog output Terminals FM1 and FM2 Output a selected signal with analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC current 4 to 20 mA Selectable output signals Output frequency before slip compensation after slip compensation output current output voltage output torque load factor input power PID feedback amount speed PG feedback value DC link bus voltage universal AO motor output calibration PID command SV PID output MV Running stopping Speed monitor reference frequency Hz output frequency motor speed load shaft speed line speed speed in Output current output voltage torque calculation value input power PID command value PID feedback amount PID output load factor motor output torque current flux command analog signal input monitor input watt hour Life early warning cumulative inverter run time cumulative motor run time input watt hour number of startups I O checking energy saving monitor input power input power x coefficient charges for input power Trip history Saves and displays the last 4 trip factors and their detailed description Communications RS 485 COM port 1 for keypad connection RS 485 CO
378. ls m Power PCB Aay power input terminals terminals Se eas _ Power switching HE switching Auxiliary power input connectors CN UX connectors terminals CN R and CN W a VXG180AL 2 to VXG350AL 2 b VXG400AL 2 VXG176AL 4E to VXG253AL 4E VXG304AL 4E to VXG1370AL 4E Figure 2 6 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals 2 15 Note To remove each of the jumpers pinch its upper side between your fingers unlock its fastener and pull it up CN UX VY When mounting it fit the jumper over the connector until it snaps into place Yy CN R CN W Figure 2 7 Inserting Removing the Jumpers Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input The three phase input power lines are connected to these terminals 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned OFF before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and an MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Tip Itis recommended to insert a manually operable magnetic contactor MC that allows you to disconnect the inverte
379. ltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve the braking capability gt Consider the use of a braking resistor 6 Malfunction caused by noise Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the overvoltage alarm occurred gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise J O C W E m T O O Z e 4 Ju Undervoltage Problem DC link bus voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 A momentary power failure gt Release the alarm occurred gt Ifyou want to restart running the motor without treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 3 4 or 5 depending on the load type 2 The power to the inverter was Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while the control power switched back to ON too soon was still alive Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light when F14 1 gt Turn the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off 3 The power supply voltage did Measure the input voltage not reach the inverter s gt Increase the voltage to within the specified range specification range 4 Peripheral equipment for the Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipmen
380. lts V Shows the output current on terminal FM1 in milliamperes mA Shows the output current on terminal FM2 in milliamperes mA Oaa sonal tsa ical Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on the digital input P and output interface cards options Refer to E Displaying control I O I O ana signal terminals on options on page 3 14 for details Terminal X7 pulse input monitor Shows the pulse rate of the pulse train signal on terminal X7 PG pulse rate 4 15 A B phase signal from the reference PG 4 10 Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from the reference PG 416 z Sat ae fain the ucicicace Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the p G 8 reference PG 407 Cy cece ee ae ee Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from the PG slave PG PG pulse rate Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the slave Z phase signal from the slave PG oo sane oa E a a on terminal 32 on the analog interface card a le Gs aa C2 on the analog interface card A Ti he on terminal AO on the analog interface card e a sa ae elie ia CS on the analog interface card 3 12 m Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal e Displaying the I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3
381. lux The appropriate value for H85 data depends on the motor capacity Use the default setting value of H13 data as a guide Motor speed 4 2 F Ql Magnetic flux Cf H85 Pre excitation time lt ________ T C Z O O Z O O J m FWD ON mM Pre excitation EX TE E01 to E07 data 32 When this input signal comes ON pre excitation starts After the delay time for establishing magnetic flux has elapsed a run command is inputted When the run command is inputted the pre excitation ends and acceleration starts Use an external sequence to control the time for establishing magnetic flux A Motor speed Magnetic flux f l gt Pre excitation mH wae ON n FWD l ON gt Note Im V f control including auto torque boost and torque vector pre excitation is disabled Use the DC braking or the starting frequency instead Note A transient phenomenon which may occur when the amount of mechanical loss is small may rotate the motor during pre excitation If a motor rotation during pre excitation is not allowed in your system install a mechanical brake or other mechanism to stop the motor A WARNING Even if the motor is stopped by pre excitation voltage is output to inverter s output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur H86 to H90 Reserved for particular manufacturers H86 to H90 are reserved for particular manufacturers Do
382. ly restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at the time of restarting Otherwise an accident could occur If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control has been selected the inverter may operate with acceleration deceleration or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the 1 key To enable the 6 key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 to 5 then the inverter automatically r
383. m 1 Remove the light alarm factor that has been checked in 5_36 Light alarm factor latest under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode in accordance with the troubleshooting procedure The reference page for the troubleshooting corresponding to each light alarm factor is shown in Ref page column in Table 6 1 2 Once the light alarm factor is removed the light alarm indication a on the LED monitor disappears and the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking If the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking it means that any light alarm factor has not completely been removed and the inverter is still in the light alarm status Proceed to other troubleshooting procedures When all of the light alarm factors have been removed the digital output L ALM is also turned OFF automatically 6 21 J O W T_ m T O O Z Q 6 6 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while Neither an Alarm Code nor Light Alarm Indication 2 is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 2 When PID control had been disabled JO1 0 you changed E43 LED Monitor Item selection to 10 or 12 With the PID being enabled JOI 1 2 or 3 you disabled PID control JO1 0 when the LED monitor had been set to display the PID command or PID feedback amount by pressing the J key The keypad was poorly
384. m our website www imopconline com by registering and following the returns instructions 7 6 2 Warranty restrictions Incorrect or unsafe installation Poor condition due to abuse neglect or improper maintenance Modifications repairs performed by anyone other than IMO or without prior written agreement Inverter used in incorrect application or used for function other than for which it is designed Any alterations which may invalidate the Inverters CE declaration Non IMO options or ancillary devices used 2 he N 7 6 3 Liability e Regardless whether a breakdown occurs during or after the warranty period IMO shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits penalty clauses or damages arising from any special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company damages to any equipment or personal injury NOILOAdSNI ANY JONYNALNIYIN 1 1 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Model EMC Filter Built in Type 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series CT High Duty mode inverters for heavy load Nominal applied raar kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 7 5 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Output rating 6 phase 200 to 230 V Rated voltage V Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function with AVR function ST e e e a e e a H Ciso min 2030s O OO OOOO O Overload 0 150 1 min 200 3 0 s Voltage frequency 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz pay oa eae Allowable Voltage 10 to 15 I
385. me SAdO9 NOILONNA H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of OAZ or Olu respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops P0000 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s a Disable overload prevention control E Overload prevention control OLP E20 to E24 and E27 data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated and the output frequency changed Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms Cote In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled H71 Deceleration Characteristics Hcodes Setting the H71 data to 1 enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the mot
386. me 1 E10 E12 E14 Acceleration Time 2 3 and 4 E11 E13 E15 Deceleration Time 2 3 and 4 H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop H54 H55 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Jogging H57 to H60 1st and 2nd S curve Acceleration Deceleration Range F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 s Under V f control Acc time 1 Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency tre duency 1 F25 F23 Actual Actual 3 acc time dec time Under vector control without speed sensor Acc time 1 Dec time 1 FO7 Maximum F08 frequency FQ3 Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency F23 5 F2 5 38 Under vector control with speed sensor Dec time 1 F08 Maximum frequency F03 Acc time 1 Starting F23 eee Stop freq uency F25 Na Depends on the run command E Acceleration deceleration time Acceleration Switching factor of acceleration deceleration time deceleration time H Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E07 Accea The combinations of ON OFF states of the two O sane F07 F08 terminal commands RT2 and RTI offer four choices of acceleration decelerat
387. me alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200 V class series or 75 kW or above for 400 V class series has locked 5 80 2 J Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m m Under PID control PID CTL Function code data 43 his output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled Cancel PID control Hz PID OFF and a run command is ON Refer to the description of J01 When PID control is enabled the inverter may stop due to the slow flowrate stopping function or other reasons with the PID CTL signal being ON As long as the PID CTL signal is ON PID control 1s effective so the inverter may abruptly resume its operation depending on the feedback value in PID control A WARNING When PID control is enabled even if the inverter stops its output during operation because of sensor signals or other Note reas
388. ments the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 75 s Deceleration time If P04 2 after the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning D Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad E Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays er and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to Sequence error a stop DWP Prote
389. mer power supply Medium to low voltage transformer O Public low voltage s User A i Industrial low voltage Inverter Inverter power supply 1 KW or 1 kW or below below The inverter connected here is The inverter connected subject to the harmonics here is not subject to the regulation If the harmonics harmonics regulation flowing into the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 9 4 Power Source and Regulation 9 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation Table 9 2 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation Applicable Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V When supplying three phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 400 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated Note 1 Inverter types marked with V in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditionally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with To connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data contact your IMO representative 9 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 5 1 G
390. monitor and to control the speed refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion 120 Motor speed r min _ _ _ x Frequency Hz No of poles Data setting range 2 to 22 poles 5 95 P02 P03 P04 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data for PO2 0 01 to 1000 When P99 Motor 1 pee 0 2 3 0r4 When P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 When accessing function code P02 with the keypad take into account that the P02 data automatically updates the data of function codes P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 Motor 1 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data setting range 0 00 to 2000 A Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter There are three types of auto tuning as listed below Select appropriate one considering the limitations in your equipment and control mode Data for P04 Motor parameters to be tuned Disable Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P0
391. motor dedicated function codes that are marked with an asterisk For motors 2 to 4 replace those asterisked function codes with respective motor dedicated ones Refer to Chapter 5 Table 5 5 LL For the function codes dedicated to motors 2 to 4 see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES See Chapter 2 Mount the inverter parfornn wiring and set up slide switches Check prior to powering on Power ON and check Switch between CT MT amp YT modes FBO Fa 0 1 2 VIF cantrolDynamic torque vector control See Section 4 1 2 See Section 4 1 3 See Section 4 1 4 Which motor drive control See Section 4 7 5 Fao 3 4 Fa 5 FA 6 VE control with speed sensor Vector contral without Vector control with Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor speed sensor speed sensor motor non standard motar non standard motor Which motor type Which motor type general purpose motor Langer output lines Reactor connected general purpose motor Langer output lines Reactor connected What output wiring condition What output wiring condition Shorter output lines Function code Function code Function code Function code basic settings lt gt basic settings lt 62 basic settings lt 3 gt basic seltings 4 gt See Section 4 1 7 See Section 4 1 10 See Section 4 1 11 See Section 4 1 8 See
392. mounted in a metal panel Giip Our EMC compliance test is performed under the following conditions Wiring length of the shielded cable between the inverter EMC filter built in type and motor 5m Cote To use IMO inverters in combination with a PWM converter the basic type of inverters having no built in EMC filter should be used Use of an EMC filter built in type may increase heat of capacitors in the inverter resulting in a break In addition the effect of the EMC filter can no longer be expected 2 5 D gt Co sSaH YaNYLS HLIM ALINHOJNOO 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below E In the case of EMC filter built in type of inverter 1 Mount the inverter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly clamp the shield to the metal plate to ground it Further connect the shielding layer electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor Separate the input and output wires as far as possible using wiring guides For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW connect the input grounding wire to the grounding terminal at the front left hand side and the output grounding wire to that on the main circuit terminal block Refer to Figure 9 1
393. n Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PG feedback value DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 13 Motor output 14 Calibration 15 PID command SV 16 PID output MV F32 Analog Output FM2 l 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Mode selection 4 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC 1 F34 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 F35 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Y Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV p ch gt CoS aoe oy SS ODNONRWN AO ll e a a SHGOD NOILONNJ emeltte p ch oO F37 Load Selection Variable torque load Auto Torque Boost Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving Auto torque boost during ACC DEC F38 Stop Frequency Detection mode 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed F39 Holding Time 0 00 to 10 00 s F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 300 to 300 999 Disable F41 1 2 300 to 300 999 Disable
394. n codes P01 d15 d16 and d17 in accordance with the motor and PG 2 Overload Measure the inverter output current gt Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake is working gt Release the mechanical brake 3 The motor speed does not rise Check the data of function code F44 Current limiter Level due to the current limiter gt Change the F44 data correctly Or set the F43 data to 0 Disable if the current operation limiter operation is not needed Check the data of function codes F04 F05 and P0O1 through P12 to ensure that the V f pattern setting is right gt Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings gt Change the function code data in accordance with the motor parameters 4 Function code settings do not Check whether the data of P01 P02 P03 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO09 P10 and match the motor P12 match the parameters of the motor characteristics gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter using the function code P04 5 Wrong wiring between the Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter pulse generator PG and the gt Correct the wiring inverter Check that the relationships between the PG feedback signal and the run command are as follows e For the FWD command the B phase pulse is in the High level at rising edge of the A phase pulse e For the REV command the B phase pulse is in the Low level at rising edge of the A phase pulse gt Ifthe relationship
395. n menu appears In this example Ofn is displayed 2 If anything other than Ofn is displayed use the and keys to display Ofn 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of function codes 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired function code 07 in this example then press the key The data of this function code appears In this example data 0 of O appears 5 Change the function code data using the N and keys In this example press the key two times to change data 0 to 2 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example 02 Pressing the amp key instead of the G amp key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the amp key to return to the menu from the function code list CTip Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the amp key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Gip It is possible to change or add function code items subject to quick setup For details consult your Fuji Electric representatives 3 4 2 Setting up functi
396. n that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm output for any alarm even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function is activated in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm output for any alarm and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the protective functions subject to auto reset Overvoltage protection Qul Ou2 or 0u Braking resistor overheat 5 99 E Number of reset times H04 Data setting range 0 Disable 1 to 10 times H04 specifies the number of reset times for the inverter to automatically attempt to escape the tripped state WARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur E Reset interval H05 Data setting range 0 5 to 20 0 s HOS specifies the reset interval time between the time when the inverter enters the tripped state and the time when it issues the reset command to attempt to auto reset the state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below lt Operation timing scheme gt e In the figure belo
397. n the LED monitor Notes for using servo lock 1 Positioning control error ero If a positioning error exceeds the value equivalent to four rotations of the motor shaft when the inverter is servo locked the inverter issues a positioning control error signal ero 2 Stop frequency F25 under servo lock Since servo lock starts when the output frequency is below the stop frequency F25 it is necessary to specify such F25 data that does not trigger ero that is specify the value equivalent to less than 4 rotations of the motor shaft Stop frequency F25 lt 4 x Gain J97 x Maximum frequency Example When Gain J97 0 01 and Maximum frequency F03 60 Hz specify F25 data lt 2 4 Hz 3 Enabling the servo lock control disables the following e Operation controlled with a stop frequency e Rotation direction limitation 9 132 2 J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA 5 2 8 d codes Application Functions 2 d01 to d04 Speed Control 1 Speed command filter Speed detection filter P Gain and I Integral time d06 Speed Control 1 Output filter These function codes control the speed control sequence for normal operations For application of each function code refer to the figure below and the subsequent descriptions Block diagram of the speed control sequence Speed command filter d01 Output filter d06 Speed regulator PI processor d03 i P Gain d03 Integral time d04 Torque command
398. nance Interval M1 Preset Startup Count for Maintenance M1 Refer to H44 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and or backlash in the machinery load Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation However as incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range 0 00 to 0 40 5 111 H81 H82 Light Alarm Selection 1 and 2 If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication a on the LED monitor In addition to the indication a the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the light alarm signal L AZM to a digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 through E24 and E27 to 98 Select the desired items to be regarded as a light alarm from the following table Name Description Heat sink overheat Heat sink temperature increased to the trip level An error that has occurred in peripheral equipment turned A the external alarm signal THR ON Tnvererintemal overhear The temperature inside the inver
399. nance timer MNT 1 H78 Maintenance interval M1 specifies the maintenance interval in units of ten hours When the cumulative motor run time 1 H94 reaches the time specified by H78 Maintenance interval M1 the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal MNT to remind the user of the need of system maintenance The setting is in units of 10 hours The maximum setting is 9999 x 10 hours Data setting range 0 Disable 1 to 9999 in units of ten hours lt Biannual maintenance gt SAdO9 NOILONNA Cumulative motor run time 1 H94 H78 876 8760 hours 1 year H78 438 4380 hours Half year Maintenance Timer MNT fon on 2 H79 Preset startup count for maintenance M1 specifies the number of inverter startup times to determine the next maintenance timing When the count of the startup counter for motor 1 H44 reaches the number specified by H79 Preset startup count for maintenance M1 the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal MNT to remind the user of the need of system maintenance Set the H79 data in hexadecimal The maximum setting count is 65 535 FFFF in hexadecimal Data setting range 0000 Disable 0001 to FFFF Hexadecimal lt Maintenance every 1 000 times of startups gt Startup Count for Motor 1 H44 H79 07D0 2000 times H79 03E8 1000 times Startup Count Maintenance Timer MNT To enable this function assign the maintenance timer signal MNT to one
400. nce data such as frequency command and PID command from accidentally getting changed by pressing the N Q keys on the keypad Changing function code data Changing digital reference data Data for F00 we From the keypad Via communications link with the Q keys Allowed Allowed Allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Not allowed Not allowed Allowed Not allowed Only F00 data can be modified with the keypad while all other function codes cannot To change F00 data simultaneous keying of g GANY from 0 to 1 or Q from 1 to 0 keys is required For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 data 19 The relationship between the terminal command WE KP and F00 data are as shown below Changing function code data WE KP TE z From the keypad Via communications link OFF Not allowed Allowed Follow the F00 setting e If you mistakenly assign the terminal command WE KP you no longer edit or modify function code data In such a case temporarily turn this WE KP assigned terminal ON and reassign the WE KP to a correct command e WE KP is only a signal that allows you to change function code data so it does not protect the frequency settings or PID speed command specified by the N and V keys Tip Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data
401. ncy E F24 Starting frequency 1 ioo io F38 Stop frequency Holding time Holding time a J68 Brake OFF current Output current Run command Brake signal BRKS JTO Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer 5 130 Operation time chart under vector control without speed sensor F23 Starting frequency 1 Speed command _ __ ___ _ s T F25 Stop frequency F24 Starting frequency 1 Holding time F39 Stop frequency Holding time J68 Brake OFF current Output current ve ne he nw ee ne ee enn we ee ee ee nn ee ee se ee ee re ee en oe re ee see ee ee ee eee ee eee ee J95 Brake OFF torque Torque command Run command Brake signal BRKS J70 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer Operation time chart under vector control with speed sensor Reference detected as F25 Stop frequency 0 Hz speed P p zero Zero J68 Brake OFF current Output current J95 Brake OFF torque 0 Torque command Run command OFF OFF OFF J70 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer Brake signal BRKS Cote e If the zero speed control is enabled under vector control set J95 Brake OFF torque at 0 e After releasing the brake BRKS ON operating for a while and then activating the brake BRAS OFF to stop the motor if you want to release the brake BRKS ON turn the inverter s run command OFF and then ON J97 to J99 Servo lock Gain Completion timer Completi
402. ncy e Output current e Output voltage e Output torque e Load factor e Input power e PID feedback amount e Speed PG feedback value DC link bus voltage e Universal AO e Motor output e Calibration e PID command e PID output Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ at 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capable of driving up to two analog voltmeters with 10 kQ impedance Input impedance of the external device Max 500Q at 4 to 20 mA DC output Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 11 Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signals common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM and CMY 2 21 Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Y1 Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and overload early output 1 warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 to Y4 by setting function code E20 to E24 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes for details 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 to Y4 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 to Y4 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa 2 gt 73 D z NO Transistor output 2 Transistor Transistor output circuit specification output 3 lt Control circuit gt
403. nd a personal computer or other equipment such as a PLC port 2 Terminals on control PCB For setting of the terminating resistor refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches RJ 45 RS 485 1 Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter supplies the power to connector communications the keypad through the pins specified below The extension cable for remote for the port 1 operation also uses wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power keypad Standard RJ 45 2 Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 connector communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller For setting of the terminating resistor refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches 4 5V S O D n S z GND A RJ 45 connector resistor face SW3 RJ 45 connector pin assignment Figure 2 18 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the remote keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment USB USB port A USB port connector mini B that connects an inverter to a personal computer connector On the keypad JAGUAR Loader software running on the computer supports editing the function codes transferring them to the inverter verifying them test running an inverter and monitoring the inverter running status
404. nd the FWD REV command determines the rotational direction of the motor The table below shows the relationship between the polarity of the pulse train input and the motor rotational direction FWD Run forward command Negative FWD Run forward command Negative REV Run reverse command Mounting an optional PG interface card automatically switches the pulse train input source to the card and disables the input from the terminal X7 Note m Filter time constant d61 d61 specifies a filter time constant for pulse train input Choose an appropriate value for the time constant taking into account the response speed of the mechanical system since a large time constant slows down the response When the reference frequency fluctuates due to small number of pulses specify a larger time constant Switching frequency command Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input terminals switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 LL For details about Hz2 Hz1 refer to E01 to E07 data 11 Terminal command Hz2 Hz1 Frequency command source Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command Keypad Enables the keys to run and stop the motor Rotational direction specified by The rotational direction of the motor is specified by terminal terminal command command FWD or REV External signals Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run the motor
405. nds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage f Undervoltage level poi Henos i Time reserved for restart ag i about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF Ready to run we 9 g __ I I Wating for run commana for run command State of the inverter Run command ON ON 4 Restart e When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run command However if the Cnote allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operat
406. nds can be assigned to digital input terminals Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals modifying the function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or frequency command sources with the related terminal commands e g SS7 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed Ensure safety before modifying customizable logic related function code settings U codes and related function codes or turning ON the Cancel customizable logic terminal command CLC Depending upon the settings such modification or cancellation of the customizable logic may change the operation sequence to cause a sudden motor start or an unexpected motor operation An accident or injuries could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement A WARNINGA e Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur Maintenance inspec
407. ned to bits 0 and 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X7 are assigned to bits 2 through 10 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and it is set to 0 when the terminal is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON short circuited and all the others are OFF open 0005 is displayed on LED4 to LED 1 Digital output terminals Y 1 through Y4 are assigned to bits 0 through 3 Each bit is set to 1 when the output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 is short circuited with CMY ON and 0 when it is open OFF The status of the relay contact output terminal Y5A C is assigned to bit 4 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals Y5A and Y5C is closed The status of the relay contact output terminals 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is ON Y2 through Y4 are OFF the circuit between Y5A and Y5C is open and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 0707 is displayed on the LED4 through LED1 Table 3 13 presents bit assignment and an example of corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Table 3 13 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Example LED No LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 ME ae AREA TENE UE AREAL SENECA RAC NEZER Finputtemsinal smmfaerpfoxre en
408. ng Status Display o e fJisjujsje ujofofsjf6e sjafs 2fifo Binay 1 o0o ojojofjo fojof o o jojofi LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 E Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 10 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 10 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion 2 5 D 2 Q9 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 11 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 4 QVdAA AHL NISN NOILvVH3dO List of I O check items I O data 7 q By LED segment ON OFF LIL I O status in binary format Input status in hex format Output status in hex format By LED segment ON OFF I O status in binary format Input status in hex format ria LiLiLiti 24 Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking 3 11 Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Progr
409. ng with alarm 2 ere If the deviation between the reference speed and detected one is out of the specified range d21 for the period specified by d22 the inverter judges it as a PG error Data setting for d23 however defines the detection conditions and the error processing after the error detection Data for d23 Detection condition Processing after error detection When the inverter cannot follow the speed The inverter outputs the PG error command even after the soft starting due to a detected signal PG ERR and continues to heavy overload or the like and the detected speed run is slow against the reference speed the inverter oe The inverter enters the coast to stop state does not interpret this situation as a PG error outputting the ere alarm and also outputs The inverter interprets the situation above asa PG the PG error detected signal PG ERR error l Enabling an operation limiting function such as the torque limit and droop control will increase the deviation Note caused by a huge gap between the reference speed and actual one In this case the inverter may trip interpreting this situation as a PG error depending on the running status To avoid this incident set the d23 data to 0 Continue to run to prevent the inverter from tripping even if any of those limiting functions is activated Zero Speed Control Refer to F23 ASR Switching Time Refer to A42 5 136 2 F Ql T C Z O
410. nly to the analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the IVS terminal command determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 0 Normal operation L r Inverse Inverse operation Normal e When the process control is performed by the PID processor integrated in the inverter The terminal command Hz PID Cancel PID control can switch the PID control between enabled process is to be controlled by the PID processor and disabled process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting In either case the combination of the PID control JO1 or Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the terminal command IVS determines the final operation as listed below When the PID control is enabled The normal inverse operation selection for the PID processor output reference frequency is as follows PID control Mode selection 101 O When the PID control is disabled The normal inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency is as follows Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency Emal opernton command 1 C53 p 0 Normal operation 1 Inverse operation Inverse When the process control is performed by
411. not modify the settings 5 114 H91 PID Feedback Wire Break Detection Using the terminal C1 current input for PID feedback signal enables wire break detection and alarm cof issuance H91 specifies whether the wire break detection is enabled or the duration of detection The inverter judges an input current to the terminal C1 below 2 mA as a wire break Data setting range 0 0 Disable alarm detection 0 1 to 60 0 s Detect wire break and issue cof alarm within the time H92 H93 Continuity of Running P and l Refer to F14 H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Refer to H44 H95 DC Braking Braking response mode Refer to F20 through F22 H96 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function H96 specifies a functional combination of STOP key priority and Start check function as listed below Data for H96 STOP key priority Start check function a e m STOP key priority Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS 485 communications link link operation pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor After that er6 appears on the LED monitor E Start check function For safety this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of the following situations If one has been turned ON the inverter does not start up but displays alarm code er6 on the LED monitor e When the power to the inverter is turned ON e When the key is pressed t
412. ns H30 6 H30 7 H30 8 H30 6 7 or 8 link port 2 y98 0 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 H30 0 2 or 6 H30 1 30r7 H30 4 Sor8 H30 0 1 to 8 Via fieldbus option y98 2 y98 2 y98 2 y98 3 LL For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual Q O far 5 io N T S S io O S pe When the terminal command LE Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus is assigned to a digital input terminal turning LE ON makes the settings of H30 and y98 enabled When LE is OFF those settings are disabled so that both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 data 24 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON 5 106 2 gt Ql T C Z O O Z O O m H42 H48 H43 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H98 Protection Maintenance Function m Life prediction function The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the voltage applied time etc The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life The life
413. nt or it may not assure the accuracy in measuring leakage current Depending on the operating condition an excessive leakage current may damage the inverter To avoid the above problems when directly connecting an inverter to a motor keep the wiring distance 50 m or less for inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW or below and 100 m or less for inverters with a higher capacity If the wiring distance longer than the specified above is required lower the carrier frequency or insert an output circuit filter as shown below When the inverter drives two or more motors connected in parallel group drive in particular using shielded wires the stray capacitance to the earth is large so lower the carrier frequency or insert an output circuit filter No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter P Inverter Inverter Max 50 m Max 100 m Max 400 m For an inverter with an output circuit filter installed the total secondary wiring length should be 400 m or less 100 m or less under the vector control If further longer secondary wiring is required consult your IMO representative 5 Precautions for surge voltage in driving a motor by an inverter especially for 400 V class general purpose motors If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particul
414. ntacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly 6 4 Possible Causes 9 A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active 10 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly 11 The coast to stop command was effective 12 Broken wires incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor 13 Overload 14 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 15 Wrong connection or poor contact of DC reactor DCR What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the frequency command block refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Chapter 6 gt Correct any incorrect function code data e g cancel the higher priority run command Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter High and F16 Frequency limiter Low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones Check the data of function codes E01 through E07 E98 and E99 and the input signal status using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting Check the wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them Measure the output current gt Reduce the load In
415. ntenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is ON or operating Check that the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check that the surrounding environment satisfies the requirements given in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor on the keypad displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 2 hee N 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspections be sure to stop the motor and remove the front cover with the inverter power OFF Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the surrounding temperature 1 Check visually or 1 The standard humidity vibration and atmosphere measure using apparatus specifications must be dust gas oil mist or water drops satisfied 2 Check that tools or other foreign 2 Visual inspection 2 No foreign or materials or dan
416. nterphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 voltage frequency Required nay panD A e 08 12 22 sa 52 74 vo ve ao as oe oe oe Torque 150 100 10 to 15 g Braking transistor Built in Te Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR 8 Option Applicable safety j UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 IP20 UL open type IPOO UL open type VT Low Duty mode inverters for light load 12 D G S _ J Q per 6 0 O a od J Qa a Item Specifications Type VXG 2 30AL 46AL 59AL 74AL 88AL 115AL 146AL 180AL 215AL 283AL 350AL 400AL Nominal applied aa kW 7 5 15 185 22 30 37 45 56 75 110 Output rating e dT wl slo else l olf Three i Es to es V Three phase 200 to a V TAE E with AVR function with AVR function IEA Overload capability a 1 min Voltage frequency a 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz TTA oe Allowable o o 9 voltage frequency pe Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Required a sema LTT pe e e e e ee Torque 70 E Braking transistor _ en Builtin Built in braking resistor g 37s 134s Braking time s Dutycycle MED Joje o ooo o SSS EMC fiter filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category
417. o Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the connector on the option card is properly engaged with that of the inverter gt Reload the option card into the inverter Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures An error detected by the option card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 23 er6 Operation protection Problem An incorrect operation was attempted Possible Causes 1 The key was pressed when H96 1 or 3 2 The start check function was activated when H96 2 or 3 3 The forced stop digital input STOP was turned OFF 24 er7 Tuning error Problem Auto tuning failed Possible Causes 1 A phase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor 2 V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set 3 The wiring length between the inverter and the motor was too long What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the key was pressed when a run command had been entered from the input terminal or through the communications port gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Check that any of the following operations has been performed with a run command being entered Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable
418. o E07 data 26 the combination of the H09 data and the STM command status switches the starting modes whether auto search is enabled or disabled If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default H09 d67 Starting mode auto search and terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of H09 d67 data and the STM status determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below Factory default V f control F42 0 to 2 0 Disable Vector control with speed sensor F42 5 2 Enable Auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM power failure F14 3 to 5 PONE mable Enable When STM is ON auto search for idling motor speed at starting is enabled regardless of the H09 d67 setting Refer to E01 to E07 data 26 Data for H09 d67 Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Reference frequency Motor speed J l 1 Starting mode l Auto search delay time 1 H49 T i Max 1 2 sec l T SE E E a A presumed Auto search for idling motor speed to follow 5 101 H
419. o jogging operation e Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state e Switching between the normal operation state and ready to jog state with the 09 keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped 2 Jogging the motor Hold down the fuy key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key 3 Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the A keys simultaneously 4 2 2 Remote and local modes The inverter is available in either remote or local mode In the remote mode that applies to ordinary operation the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings stored in the inverter whereas in the local mode that applies to maintenance operation it is separated from the control system and is driven manually under the control of the keypad e Remote mode Run and frequency commands are selected by function codes or source switching signals except Select local keypad operation LOC e Local mode The command source is the keypad regardless of the settings specified by function codes The keypad takes precedence over the settings specified by communications link operation signals 4 16 Run commands from the keypad in the local mode The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the keypad in the local mode When F02 data run comm
420. o release an alarm status or when the digital input terminal command RST Reset alarm is turned ON e When the run command source is switched by a digital input terminal command such as LE Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus or LOC Select local keypad operation H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 Mock Alarm H97 clears alarm data alarm history and relevant information stored in the inverter To clear alarm data simultaneous keying of 6 key key is required ooo o Enable Setting 1 clears alarm data and then returns to 0 H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable automatic lowering of carrier frequency input phase loss protection output phase loss protection judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor DC fan lock detection braking transistor error detection and IP20 IP40 switching in combination Bit 0 to Bit 7 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 Under V f control only This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal surrounding temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping AI Oh or Olu Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise Input phase loss pr
421. o that function is still maintained asingle fault in any of these parts does not lead to the Accumulation of undetected faults can loss of the safety function and lead to the loss of the safety function a single fault is detected whenever reasonably practicable Requirements of Category 1 shall apply When faults occur the safety function is Safety related parts shall be designed so that a single fault still maintained is detected during or prior to the next demand on the safety function If this is not possible an accumulation of faults shall not lead to the loss of the safety function 2 5 2 Co SCYVGNVLS HLIM ALINHOJNOO 9 6 3 Notes 1 Wiring for terminal EN When using terminal EN be sure to remove the short circuit wire from terminals EN and PLC which has been connected at the shipment TEN amp PLC terminals are safety related wire connections and therefore careful installation practices shall be applied to ensure no short circuit s can occur to these connections For opening and closing the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC use safety approved components such as safety switches and safety relays that comply with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher to ensure a complete shutoff Be sure to use shielded wires for connecting terminals EN and PLC and ground the shielding layer Do not connect mix any other control signal wire within the same shielded core It is the
422. ock alarm occurs the data automatically returns to 0 H46 Starting Mode 0 1 to 10 0 s Y1 Y2 5 101 Auto search delay time 2 5 109 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacement of DC link bus capacitor 5 107 Capacitor 0000 to FFFF hex 5 109 H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors Indication for replacement of capacitors oe on Printed Circuit Boards The cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of 10 hours H49 Starting Mode 0 0 to 10 0 s 5 101 Auto search delay time 1 5 109 H50 Non linear Vif Patten 1 Frequency O aprte p a s H51 Voltage 7 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage Y2 5 109 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H52 Non linear Vif Pattern 2 Frequency 0 Se ee H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage Y2 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H54 Acceleration Time Jogging 0 00 to 6000 s 5 38 H55 Deceleration Time Jogging 0 00 to 6000 s 5 109 H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0 00 to 6000 s H57 1st S curve acceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 y ie N Leading edge H58 2nd S curve acceleration range 0 to 100 Trailing edge H59 1st S curve deceleration range 0 to 100 10 Leading edge H60 2nd S curve deceleration range 0 to 100 10 Trailing edge 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20
423. ocol E Protocol selection y20 for port 2 y20 specifies the communications protocol for port 2 Data for y20 Le Modbus RTU protocol General purpose inverter protocol y97 Communication Data Storage Selection A nonvolatile storage in the inverter has a limited number of rewritable times 100 000 to 1 000 000 times Saving data into the storage so many times unnecessarily will no longer allow the storage to save data causing memory errors For frequent data writing via the communications link therefore a temporary storage is provided instead of the nonvolatile storage To use the temporary storage set the y97 data at 1 Using the temporary storage reduces the number of data writing times into the nonvolatile storage preventing memory errors Setting the y97 data at 2 saves all data written in the temporary storage into the nonvolatile one Changing the y97 data requires simultaneous keying of and N Q keys Data for y97 a Save into nonvolatile storage Rewritable times limited Write into temporary storage Rewritable times unlimited gt Save all data from temporary storage to nonvolatile one After saving data the data automatically returns to 1 y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Refer to H30 y99 Loader Link Function Mode selection This is a link switching function for JAGUAR Loader Rewriting the data of y99 to enable RS 485 communications from Loader helps Loader send the inverter the frequenc
424. of function code F00 Data Protection gt Change the F00 data from Enable data protection 1 or 3 to Disable data protection 0 or 2 Check the data of function codes E01 through E07 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal Check whether you have pressed the amp key after changing the function code data gt Press the key after changing the function code data gt Check that saue is displayed on the LED monitor Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON Turn OFF both FWD and REV If Menu 0 Quick Setup o nc is selected only the particular function codes appear gt With Menu 0 Quick Setup 0 nc being selected press the A key to call up the desired menu from __ to Z y__ Then select the desired function code and change its data For details refer to Chapter 3 Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode 6 9 J O C W a m T O O a Z e 4 Formatted Bullets and Numbering 6 36 4 _ If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 1 cn Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level Oc1 Overcurrent occurred during acceleration 0c2 Overcurrent occurred during deceleration 0c3 Overcurrent occurred during running at a constant speed Possible Causes 1 The inverter output lines
425. of the following functions is selectable as a logic circuit with general purpose timer m No function assigned Output is always OFF 1 Through output General purpose timer Only a general purpose timer No logic circuit exists a ANDing General purpose timer AND circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer a ORing General purpose timer OR circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer Ea XORing General purpose timer XOR circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer Set priority flip flop General purpose Set priority flip flop with 2 inputs and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer Reset priority flip flop General purpose Reset priority flip flop with 2 inputs and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer 7 Rising edge detector General purpose Rising edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer This detects the rising edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 2 ms Falling edge detector General purpose Falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer This detects the falling edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 2 ms Rising and falling edge detector Rising and falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus General purpose timer general purpose timer This detects the falling and rising edges both of an input signal and outputs the ON signa
426. ol and the speed control e g dancer control If PID control is enabled JO1 1 2 or 3 the frequency control of the inverter is switched from the drive frequency command generator block to the PID command generator block E Mode Selection J01 Daa for 0 Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control OQ J Ql Manual speed command O O Frequency command PID process command PID processor SAdOO9 NOILONNA PID feedback PID process control block diagram Fixed roll Fixed roll Rotation speed control Upper limit position Dancer roll Reference position Position data m Inverter ex 0 Vto 10 V Potentiometer Speed command Primary command ATN Lower limit PID dancer control block diagram Using JO1 enables switching between normal and inverse operations against the PID control output so you can specify an increase decrease of the motor rotating speed to the difference error component between the commanded input and feedback amounts making it possible to apply the inverter to air conditioners The terminal command JVS can also switch operation between normal and inverse PID feedback Dancer position feedback LL For details about the switching of normal inverse operation refer to the description of Switch normal inverse operation IVS E01 to E07 data 21 5 120
427. oltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 5 Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in VT mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters 8 2 Common Specifications Maximum frequency 25 to 500 Hz 120 Hz for inverters in MT VT mode 120 Hz under vector control without speed sensor 200 Hz under V f control with speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor Base frequency 25 to 500 Hz in conjunction with the maximum frequency Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 0 Hz under vector control with without speed sensor Carrier frequency e 0 75 to 16 kHz CT mode 0 4 to 55 kW VT mode 5 5 to 18 5 kW e 0 75 to 10 kHz CT mode 75 to 400 kW VT mode 22 to 55 kW e 0 75 to6kHz CT mode 500 and 630 kW VT mode 75 to 500 kW e 0 75to4kHz VT mode 630 kW e 0 75 to2kHz MT mode 90 to 400 kW Note The carrier frequency may automatically drop depending upon the surrounding temperature or output current to protect the inverter T
428. oltage input for 2 42 30B Alarm output ps frequency setting amp o 30 30A for any alarm 0 to 10 VDC ae oi m 0 to 10 VDC ia a A E j Voltage input for a i i v2 Y5C i3 AX terminal frequency setting l S sl al Y5A l basta Oto 10vDC ee ie i eee 0 a a Transistor outputs 9 Current input for m CA O Y4 ie frequency setting i Wy ie 13 J Motor overload early warning 4 to 20 mA DC TT 3 PTC NTC KT v F Frequency speed detected sw5 11 V1 Frequency speed arrival o Inverter running 24 voe ov momy Common terminal s I JPL a 12 4 IX EN Enable input po O to 10 Safety switch i VDC a JFMIL yo 4 to 20 z MADE Sw 11 Analog frequency SINK 11 meter PLC ose 0 to 10 SW1 VDC FM2 ees L Wes 4 to 20 x A DC I Digital input SOURCE l m sw6 11 Analog frequency 11 meter FWD gt f Run forward command a gt e E iL I REV DX Run reverse command M a 7 gt I DX J Data transmission Digital input common terminal er a it ne cere _ Select multi frequency 0 to 1 step os z i i Tz a SD pie ee o fhe F a ae RS 485 COM port 2 elect multi frequency 0 to 7 step a E Select multi frequency 0 to 15 step IA on i ta Select ACC DEC time 2 steps HH C EN Select ACC DEC time 4 steps A ie i Reset alarm 7 L TCM
429. omizable logic signal via Y terminals include on or off delay timers in the customizable logic Otherwise short ON or OFF signals may not be reflected on those terminals Paie au Name Data setting range Derun code setting Customizable logic output signal 1 Disable Output selection Step 1 output S001 Step 2 output SO02 Step 3 output S003 Step 4 output S004 Step 5 output S005 Step 6 output S006 Step 7 output SO07 Step 8 output SO08 9 Step 9 output S009 10 Step 10 output 010 Customizable logic output signal 1 0 to 100 1000 to 1081 Function selection Same as data of E98 E99 except the Customizable logic output signal 2 Output selection Customizable logic output signal 3 Output selection Customizable logic output signal 4 Output selection WN BWN OS oO Customizable logic output signal 5 Output selection Customizable logic output signal 2 following Function selection 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad Customizable logic output signal 3 data can be modified Function selection 80 1080 Cancel customizable logic Customizable logic output signal 4 Function selection Customizable logic output signal 5 Function selection 9 145 E Notes for using a customizable logic A customizable logic performs processing every 2 ms in the following sequence 1 At the start of processing the customizable logic latches all of the external input signals entered to steps 1 to
430. ommand ON holds the integral components of the PID processor H Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 5 73 E Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz and 60 Hz SW50 and ISW60 Function code data 40 and 41 With the terminal command SW50 or ISW60 assigned the inverter controls the magnetic contactor that switches the motor drive source between the commercial power and the inverter output according to the integrated sequence This control is effective when not only SW50 or ISW60 has been assigned to the input terminal but also the SW88 and SW52 2 signals have been assigned to the output terminals It is not essential to assign the SW52 signal The ISW50 or SW60 should be selected depending upon the frequency of the commercial power the former for 50 Hz and the latter for 60 Hz For details of these commands refer to the circuit diagrams and timing schemes given below Terminal command assigned in Operation Switching from commercial power to inverter ISW50 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz Start at 50 Hz ISW60 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz Start at 60 Hz Note Do not assign both ISW50 and ISW60 at the same time Doing so cannot guarantee the result Circuit Diagram and Configuration Commercial power Thermal relay 88 49 R Main power S T Motor Inverter primary Inverter secondar
431. ommand function codes Maximum wiring length 20 m Maximum input pulse 30 kHz When connected to a pulse generator with open collector transistor output Needs a pull up or pull down resistor See notes on page 2 20 100 kHz When connected to a pulse generator with complementary transistor output For the settings of the function codes refer to JAGUAR VXG User s Manual REV Run reverse command Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Digital input circuit specifications lt Control circuit gt 24 VDC PLC oud Operating voltage ON level SINK OFF Tevel Operating voltage ON level Operating current at ON O SOUREE Input voltage is at 0 V ome Qe X1 to X7 For X7 9 7mA 16 mA FWD REV 1 6kQ for X7 O Allowable leakage current at 0 5 mA CM OFF Figure 2 13 Digital Input Circuit 2 19 Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued EN Enable input 1 Safety stop function that is compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 This terminal allows the hardware circuit to stop the inserter s output transistor and coast the motor to a stop 2 This terminal is exclusively used for the source mode input When it is short circuited with terminal PLC the Enable input is ON ready for inverter run when it is opened the inverter coasts the motor to a stop This terminal is not interlocked with the slide switch SW1 3 By factory default terminals EN and PLC
432. ommunications error port 2 connection to terminal block in decimal COM port 2 For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to A port as a Option s ROM version 1 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to B port as a Option s ROM version 2 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to C port as a Option s ROM version 3 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 1 Counter range 0 to 99 990 hours Display range Oto 9999 The x10 LED turns ON Cumulative run time of motor 1 Actual cumulative motor run time hours Displayed value x 10 When the count exceeds 99 990 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Temperature inside the inverter Shows the current temperature inside the inverter real time value Unit C Temperature of heat sink Shows the current temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter real time value Unit C mi M mi a E mi a gt M a BQ BQ BN BN BQ BN BN X Ra x z oS N 3 24 25 b Shows the cumulative time during which a voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor When the ma
433. on printed circuit board to the PTC NTC side Feedback input 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase Pulse input format shift a DUASe Feedback input Encoder pulse resolution 0400 1024 Vannes 200 V class series 400 V class series Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 607 Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer 08 Deceleration time than your machinery design values If 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly Electric thermal overload f 11 protection for motor 1 0 00 Disable Depending upon the inverter capacity Overload detection level After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the data of the function codes F04 F05 P01 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Note When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes F04 F05 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 4 11 OQ F D ies KR YOLOW JHL ONINNOAY 4 1 10 Function code basic settings lt 5 gt Select standard motors with the function code P99 Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values
434. on codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting Z _ through y__ in Programming mode allows you to set up all function codes To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation The basic key operation in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display the desired function code group from the choices Z __ through y_ 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of function codes for the selected function code group 4 Use the N and V keys to display the desired function code then press the amp 9 key The data of this function code appears 5 Change the function code data using the N and keys 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code Pressing the amp key instead of the amp key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the o
435. on the keypad e g switching from the reverse rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode the inverter automatically stops The transition paths between remote and local modes depend on the current mode and the value ON OFF of LOC as shown in the status transition diagram given below Also refer to above table for details LOC OFF Local Mode LOC ON Remote Mode LOC OFF LOC ON Transition between Remote and Local Modes by LOC 4 2 3 External run frequency command By factory default run and frequency commands are sourced from the keypad This section provides other external command source samples an external frequency command potentiometer variable resistor as a frequency command source and external run switches as run forward reverse command sources Set up those external sources using the following procedure 1 Configure the function codes as listed below Frequency command 1 1 Analog voltage input to terminal 12 PO Operation method 1 External digital input signal Terminal FWD function 98 Run forward command FWD O B Terminal REV function 99 Run reverse command REV E If terminal FWD and REV are ON the F02 data cannot be changed First turn those terminals OFF and then change the F02 data Note 2 Wire the external frequency command potentiometer to terminals across 13 12 and 11 3 Connect the run forward switch between terminals FWD and
436. on width Servo lock This function servo locks the inverter to hold the motor within the positioning completion range specified by J99 for the period specified by J98 even if an external force applies to the load C Note When the inverter is servo locked it keeps the output frequency low therefore use the inverter under the following specified thermal restriction Output current within the range of 150 of the rated current for 3 seconds and 80 for continuous operation Note that under the restriction the inverter automatically limits the carrier frequency under 5 kHz Servo lock starting conditions Servo lock control starts when the following conditions are met F38 0 Use detected speed as a decision criteria F38 1 Use reference speed as a decision criteria 1 Run command OFF or Reference frequency lt Stop frequency F25 LOCK Servo lock command ON Assignment of LOCK Function code data 47 The detected speed is less than stop frequency F25 The reference speed is less than stop frequency F25 5 131 Operation examples Detected speed F38 0 Reference speed F38 1 sua haces Stop frequency F25 a 8 t a 8 6 alaa FWDIREV LOCK OFF OFF O Z td ee ee ea ae ee te eee ae ea a Control status Not defined Speed control Not defined Gate Typical Control Sequence of Servo lock WARNING When the servo lock command is ON the in
437. on will be aborted with the function code in disagreement displayed blinking Pressing the key again causes the verification to continue from the next function code pror Enable Data Enables the Data protection of data stored in the keypad s memory protection In this state you cannot read any data stored in the inverter s memory but can write data into the memory and verify data in the memory Upon pressing the amp key the inverter immediately displays err chec Read inverter Reads out inverter s current running status information that can be checked by JAGUAR running Loader such as information of I O system alarm and running status excluding function information code data Use this command when the function code data saved in the PC should not be overwritten and it is necessary to keep the previous data Pressing the amp key during a read operation chec blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays err blinking Gip To get out of the error state indicated by a blinking err or cper press the amp key 3 21 2 5 D 2 oO QVdAA AHL ONISN NOILVH3dO m Data protection You can protect data saved in the keypad from unexpected modifications Enabling the data protection that was disabled changes the display read on the Data Copying function list to proT and disables to read data from the inverter To enable or disable the data protection follow the next steps 1 Select the Dat
438. onal DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals 6G Otherwise an electric shock or a fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise an electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident In general sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage 1 e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure tha
439. ons operation will resume automatically Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur E Running forward FRUN Function code data 52 Running reverse RRUN Function code data 53 Output signal Assigned data Running forward Inverter stopped FRUN RRUN E In remote operation RMT Function code data 54 This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode LH For details of switching between remote and local modes refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 2 Remote and local modes E Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF Function code data 59 This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects that the input current to terminal C1 drops below 2 mA interpreting it as the terminal C1 wire broken E Speed valid DNZS Function code data 70 This output signal comes ON when the reference speed or detected one exceeds the stop frequency specified by function code F25 It goes OFF when the speed is below the stop frequency for 100 ms or longer Under vector control with speed sensor F38 switches the decision criteria between the reference speed and detected one Under vector control without speed sensor the reference speed is used as a decision criteria H Refer to the descriptions of F25 and F38 Reference Detected speed specified by F38 Stop frequency F25 Speed vaild E a gt DNZS 100 ms Alarm output for any
440. onstant Data setting range 0 0 to 5 0 s 5 85 E43 LED Monitor Item selection E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item E43 specifies the running status item to be monitored and displayed on the LED monitor Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed monitoring formats selectable with E48 LED Monitor Display sample on LED indicator Function code data for E43 Monitor item Unit Meaning of displayed value the LED E on O off monitor Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED Pp amor indicators Output frequency 5 00 HHz OA OkW Hz Frequency actually being output E48 0 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 5 00 HHz OA OkW Hz Frequency actually being output E48 1 MHzOAUkW Hz Reference frequency being set E48 2 120 MHz MA OkW r min Output frequency Hz x mai E48 3 after slip compensation Reference frequency 5 00 2 J Ql E 30x0 MHz MA OkW Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 SOKO OHz WA kW Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 5 Output frequency 100 SAdO9 NOILONNA Display speed 3 0 OHz OA OkW 7a Bic WA w Output voltage 200u QOHz OA OkWw Calculated torque 50 QOHz OA OkWw 7925 Onza mW PID command 1 0 PID feedback amount O OHz OA Okw PID output LO OHz OA OkW Jas Biz A mW Analog input 8 00 command OHz OA OkW E48
441. or Insulation 4 transformer SSS 100 VAJ Or Magnetic comactor Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 9 Connection Example of PWM Converter Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped with terminals R1 and T1 Only if the inverter works with the DC linked power input whose source is a PWM converter these terminals are used to feed AC power to the fans while they are not used in any power system of ordinary configuration In this case set up the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W Terminal rating 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 380 to 440 VAC S50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 400 V class series with 75 kW to 400 kW 380 to 440 VAC 50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 2 0 A 400 V class series with 500 kW and 630 kW 2 3 5 Wiring for control circuit terminals A WARNING In general the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage 1 e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact
442. or more H46 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 Refer to HO9 H47 H48 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards Refer to H42 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage Refer to F04 H49 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 1 Refer to HO9 H54 H55 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Jogging H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop H57 to H60 1st 2nd S curve Acceleration Deceleration Range Refer to F07 H61 UP DOWN Control Initial frequency setting Refer to F01 H63 Low Limiter Mode selection Refer to F15 H64 Low Limiter Lower limiting frequency H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control is activated Normally it is not necessary to change this data Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz H65 H66 Non linear V f Pattern 3 Frequency and Voltage Refer to F04 H67 Auto Energy Saving Operation Mode selection Refer to F37 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions Refer to F42 H69 Automatic Deceleration Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit if the regenerative energy returned exce
443. or i S ai oE i o emae Ce 014 Overioad ofmoors o ar Heatsink overe Table 5 2 Light Alarm Selection 2 H82 Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors wsp e a ma e o Heersink overheat early warning Cis ea invenerit Number ofstamups 07 Motor overload early warning Inverter life pi rte Cumulative motor run time pt pemes DC fan locked 11 pe PTC thermistor activated PTC thermistor activated arahe a E a Reference command loss detected Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation Table 5 3 Display of Light Alarm Factor Example Light alarm factors RS 485 communications error COM port 2 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Option communications error Overload of motor 1 and Heat sink overheat are selected by H81 s fs u o elufols s 7 s s 4 s 2 ilo coe er ert ord Pore oral ors oz ori aon ona ane on Binney o o 1 1 of 1 ofofolfo ifol ofo o i Hexa decimal See Table 5 4 Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 decimal on the LED monitor E Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit The table below shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 5 4 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion When the H26 data is set to 1 PTC The inverter immediately trips with 0 4 displayed if the PTC Not
444. or 2 startup counter 1 e the number of run Number of startups 2 commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_08 above Shows the content of the motor 4 startup counter 1 e the number of run Number of startups 4 commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_08 above Shows the startup times remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the number of startups from the preset startup count for maintenance specified by H79 This function applies to motor 1 only The display method is the same as for 5_08 above EE atest Shows the factor of the latest light alarm as an alarm code E For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Shows the factor of the last light alarm as an alarm code Light al factor Last i i For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Shows the factor of the 2nd last light alarm as an alarm code Remaining startup times before the next maintenance 1 QVdAA AHL NISN NOILvVH3dO Shows the content of the motor 3 startup counter 1 e the number of run care Number of startups 3 commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_08 above Light alarm factor 2nd last i i sen alari tator 2nd Tasi For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions E aed Shows the factor of the 3rd last light alarm as an alarm code E For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Func
445. or MC on AX primary side 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 IOL 5 G 1025 Cooling fan in operation H06 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning 7 31 1031 Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 E32 E36 aN N pe J11 to J13 J01 J08 J09 EAN Y Y 45 46 47 E78 to E81 fafi fskj s j a e f fs eea E a e e a he aeaa R E e a oe e eal ae E E eae a al aie 2 J Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m Function code data Related Functions assigned Symbol PG w o w Torque a Active ON Active OFF V f quej codes signals V PG PG control data s C 57 i 58 59 70 7 72 76 82 Y ES 1070 EA ry pw eso n3 1113 Customizable ogie ouput signals cros v y y UUs Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with Note Active OFF column d21 to d23 J97 to J99 H44 H78 H79 aS a ae aS Y 84 MT 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM H26 H27 MNT LM AEREE A Fe a lt lt lt lt lt lt 2 lt lt lt v fog vod od lt in the E Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 These output signals tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher If assigned in negative logic Active OFF these signals can be used to te
446. or above 2 7 2 Arrangement of control circuit terminals common to all inverter types Reinforce insulation Max 250 VAC Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 Recommended wire size 0 65 to 0 82 mm2 AWG 19 or 18 Using wires exceeding the recommended sizes may lift the front cover depending upon the number of wires used impeding keypad s normal operation 2 3 3 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other After removing a screw from the main circuit terminal block be sure to restore the screw even if no wire is connected Use the wiring guide to separate wiring For inverters with a capacity of 3 7
447. or details refer to the description of ISW50 and ISW60 E Cancel PID control Hz PID Function code data 20 Turning this terminal command ON disables the PID control If the PID control is disabled with this command the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multi frequency keypad analog input etc Terminal command Hz PID Function Enable PID control Disable PID control Enable manual frequency settings LL Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 E Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the input value and inverse in analog frequency setting or under PID process control To select the inverse operation turn the IVS ON Output frequency Inverse Normal 0 OV 10V Analog input voltage 4mA 20 mA Analog input current Giip The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require switching between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter is increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This switching is realized by this ZVS terminal command 5 72 e When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 Switching normal inverse operation can apply o
448. or energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque ooo o Cote This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is a braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 in the torque limit control mode disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 5 110 H72 Main Power Down Detection Mode selection H72 monitors the inverter alternate current input power source and disables the inverter operation if it is not established e OSOSOS SSC SsSSSSC In cases where the power is supplied via a PWM converter or the inverter is connected via the DC link bus there is no alternate current input In such cases set H72 data to 0 otherwise the inverter cannot operate Note If you use a single phase power supply contact your IMO representative H73 to H75 Torque Limiter Operating conditions Control target and Target quadrants Refer to F40 H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Refer to H69 H77 Service Life of DC Link Bus Capacitor Remaining time H77 displays the remaining time before the service life of DC link bus capacitor expires in units of ten hours At the time of a printed circuit board replacement transfer the service life data of the DC link bus capacitor to the new board Data setting range 0 to 8760 in units of ten hours 0 to 87 600 hours H78 H79 Mainte
449. or overheats and the temperature exceeds the protection level the inverter issues the Motor protection alarm Oh4 and stops the motor If H26 data is set to 1 or 2 PTC thermistor the inverter monitors the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor and protect the motor even when any of the 2nd to 4th motors is selected If H26 data is set to 3 NTC thermistor and any of the 2nd to 4th motors is selected the inverter does not perform these functions mE Thermistor for motor Level H27 Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 V H27 specifies the detection level expressed in voltage for the temperature sensed by the PTC thermistor The alarm temperature at which the overheat protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature The detection level voltage is specified based on the change of the internal resistance PTC thermistor internal resistance Rp2 Temperature Alarm temperature Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp the detection level voltage Vv is calculated by the expression below Set the result V to function code H27 Rp Vo E 2 727000 Rp x10 5 V 5 104 Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below The voltage obtained by dividing the input voltage on terminal V2 with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection
450. or port 2 y01 or y11 specifies the station address for the RS 485 communications link The table below lists the protocols and the station address setting ranges Broadcast address Modbus RTU protocol 1 to 247 a JAGUAR Loader protocol 1 to 255 General purpose inverter protocol test 8 If any wrong address beyond the above range is specified no response is returned since the inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries except the broadcast message To use JAGUAR Loader via the RS 485 communications link port 1 set the station address that matches the connected computer E Communications error processing y02 for port 1 and y12 for port 2 y02 or y12 specifies the error processing to be performed if an RS 485 communications error occurs RS 485 communications errors include logical errors such as address error parity error framing error transmission protocol error and physical errors such as no response error specified by y08 and y18 The inverter can recognize such an error only when it is configured with a run or frequency command sourced through the RS 485 communications link and it is running If none of run and frequency commands is sourced through the RS 485 communications link or the inverter is not running the inverter does not recognize any error occurrence Immediately trip displaying an RS 485 communications error er amp for y02 and erp for y12 The inverter stops with alarm issue Run during the per
451. or torque command drops below the level specified by E80 Low torque detection Level for the period specified by E81 Low torque detection Timer The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque exceeds the level specified by E80 plus 5 of the motor rated torque The minimum ON duration is 100 ms 5 91 Calculated torque or torque comand anes as ONS PROS et Sas ahee ene reer e a aes LeyeltoG In the inverter s low frequency operation as a substantial error in torque calculation occurs no low torque can be detected within the operation range at less than 20 of the base frequency F04 In this case the result of recognition before entering this operation range 1s retained The U TL signal goes off when the inverter is stopped Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque it is recommended that auto tuning be applied by function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy QO J Ql E98 E99 Terminal FWD Function Terminal REV Function Refer to E01 to E07 5 2 3 C codes Control functions C01 to C03 Jump Frequency 1 2 and 3 C04 Jump Frequency Hysteresis width T C Z O O Z O O J m These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output frequency in order to skip resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery load While you are increasing the reference frequency the moment the referen
452. oring Monitored ar Related function code and LED monitor display X90 Customizable logic Timer monitor Timer or counter value specified by Keypad I O checking 4 24 U91 dedicated to monitoring E Cancel customizable logic CLC E01 to E07 data 80 This terminal command can disable the customizable logic temporarily This terminal command is used to run the inverter without using the customizable logic circuit or timers for maintenance or other purposes Enable customizable logic Depends on the U00 setting Disable customizable logic Note Before changing the setting of CLC ensure safety Turning CLC ON disables the sequence of the customizable logic causing a sudden motor start depending upon the settings E Clear all customizable logic timers CLTC E01 to E07 data 81 Assigning CLTC to any of the general purpose digital input terminals and turning it ON resets all of the general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic This terminal command is used when the timings between the external sequence and the internal customizable logic do not match due to a momentary power failure or other reasons so that resetting and restarting the system is required Ordinary operation Reset all of the general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic To operate the timers and counters again revert CLTC to OFF 5 146 2 J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA 5 2 10 y codes Link Functions y01 to
453. orque boost torque vector Non linear V f pattern 2 control vector control without speed sensor or vector Non linear V f pattern 1 control with speed sensor is selected 5 36 Examples E Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 E V f pattern with three non linear points Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear V f pattern 3 Voltage H66 Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage H53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 i Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Non linear Base Maximum Vif pattern 1 V f pattern 2 V f pattern 3 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 H65 E Base Frequency 1 F04 Data setting range 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F05 Data setting range 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage The Automatic Voltage Regulator AVR is disabled 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If FOS 0 the rated voltage at base frequency is determine
454. orque command m Torque Commands Torque commands can be given as analog voltage input via terminals 12 and V2 or analog current input via terminal C1 or via the communications link communication dedicated function codes S02 and S03 To use analog voltage current inputs it is necessary to set E61 for terminal 12 E62 for terminal C1 or E63 for terminal V2 data to 10 or 11 Terminal 12 Motor rated torque 200 10 V 10 V to 10 V Terminal V2 C10 V to 10 V Terminal C1 4 to 20 mA Motor rated torque current 200 20 mA S02 S03 327 68 to 327 67 Torque current command Motor rated torque current 100 00 m Polarity of Torque Commands The polarity of a torque command switches according to the combination of the polarity of an external torque command and a run command on terminal FWD or REV as listed below Bodice SS WD Positive argue Forward arving Reverse bring REV __ Negative torque Forward braking Reverse driving __ we E Cancel torque control Hz TRQ E01 to E07 data 23 When the torque control is enabled H18 2 or 3 assigning the terminal command Hz TRQ Cancel torque control to any of the general purpose digital input terminals data 23 enables switching between the speed control and the torque control Cancel torque contol sienai TRO Cancel torque control Enable speed control FF re toga onto E Torque Control Speed limits 1 and 2
455. orrection factor 1 0 to 300 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 vector control Erce Eenkeer lt 38 SECURE E En E UE Ceea 2 J Ql J codes Application Functions 1 _ J01 PID Control Mode selection 0 Disable Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control N keys on keypad PID omen 1 Analog input terminals 12 C1 and V2 UP DOWN Command via communications link Drive control Default og mrt i setting oo ooo o0 o 100 a EA oo 299 E i running Change when So Mo En SAdOO0 NOILONNA J02 Remote command SV J03 P Gain 0 000 to 30 000 times ae 5 124 J04 Integral time 0 0 to 3600 0 s J05 D Differential time 0 00 to 600 00 s HH J06 Feedback filter 0 0 to 900 0 s J08 Pressurization starting frequency 0 0 to 500 0 Hz N 5 126 J09 Pressurizing time 0 to 60 s J10 Anti reset windup 0 to 200 N 5 127 J11 Select alarm output 0 Absolute value alarm YJ N 1 Absolute value alarm with Hold 2 Absolute value alarm with Latch 3 Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch 4 Deviation alarm 5 Deviation alarm with Hold 6 Deviation alarm with Latch 7 Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch li F codes 12 Upper level alarm AH J
456. ose motor provided that the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long or a reactor is connected Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them L For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 4 12 Function Factory default d Name Function code data cone VXGxxx 2E VXGxxx 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series a aa 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz x Rated voltage l 200 V class series 400 V class series at base frequency 1 ae 220 V 400 V printed on the nameplate of the ma a ty motor Nominal applied motor capacity p 03 Motor 1 Rated current Rated current of nominal applied motor 200 V class series 400 V class series f Ua Maximum frequency 1 60 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Acceleration time 1 Machinery design values 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer Deceleration time 1 than your machinery design values If 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note the specified time is short the inverter 30 kW or above 20 00 s may not run the motor properly T OF Feedback input Pulse count of the target motor d 15 Encoder pulse encoder 040
457. ot pulse whose length is specified by the timer If an input signal is turned ON again during the preceding one shot pulse length however the logic circuit issues another one shot pulse 5 Pulse train output If an input signal turns ON the logic circuit issues the ON and OFF pulses whose lengths are specified by the timer alternately and repeatedly This function is used to flash a luminescent device The operation schemes for individual timers are shown below 1 On delay timer 2 Off delay timer OFF ON FF ON OFF inva O ON ja OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF FF FF N Output ON Output O O O O Timer Timer Timer period Timer period 3 Pulses 1 shot 4 Retriggerable timer ipui OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF put OFF 7 OFF ore ON _OFF OFF Output jae OFF OFF Timer Timer c _ gt Timer period Less than Timer period Timer period timer period 5 Pulse train output OFF OFF ON Input oi E OFF OFF Timer T A Timer period m Timer U05 etc U05 and other related function codes specify the general purpose timer period or the increment decrement counter value Timer Timer period Timer period The period is specified by seconds 0 00 to 600 00 Counter value The specified value is multiplied by 100 times If 0 01 is specified it is converted to 1 5 144 G deyo T C Z O Z O O J m Output signals In a customizable logic output
458. otection 77_ Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 7n 9 115 Cnote In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Output phase loss protection 0p Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm Op Note Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor the factory default level or user setup level aa Ifthe multi function keypad is mounted the inverter does not perform automatic capacitance measurement of Note i io the DC link bus capacitor using the factory default level since the inverter s conditions are different from the ones applied at shipment It is therefore necessary to select the user setup level Using the user setu
459. otor to a stop When a mechanical brake is used to stop or hold the motor for the sake of the product safety system of whole system do not use the inverter s control signals such as output from terminal Y Using control signals does not satisfy the safety standards because of software intervention Use safety components complying with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher to activate mechanical brakes The safety shutdown circuit between terminal EN input section and inverter s output shutdown section is dual configured redundant circuit so that an occurrence of a single fault does not detract the safety stop function If a single fault is detected in the safety shutdown circuit the inverter coasts the motor to a stop even with the terminal EN PLC state being ON as well as outputting an alarm to external equipment Note that the alarm output function is not guaranteed to all of single faults This safety stop function may not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically Before performing wiring or maintenance jobs be sure to disconnect isolate the input power to the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes for 22 kW or below of inverters and at least 10 minutes for 30 kW or above High Performance Multifunction Inverter Jaguar VXG Instruction Manual First Edition December 2009 IMO Precision Controls Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of
460. ounting them necessarily one above the other be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the surrounding temperature is 40 C or lower inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below can be mounted side by side without any clearance between them Table 2 3 Clearances mm Inverter capacity A B C 0 4 to 1 5 kW o Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and 2 2 to 22 kW 100 Required Clearances 280 to 630 kW C Space required in front of the inverter unit 2 1 E When employing external cooling External heat radiation 70 T Cooling fans Internal heat radiation 30 In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the panel The external cooling therefore significantly reduces heat radiating inside the equipment or panel To employ external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below use the external cooling attachment option for those with a capacity of 30 kW or above Internal gt 73 D z NO simply change the positions of the mounting bases a Heat ACAUTION mere r Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials Internal External from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink air intake _
461. overload prevention control H70 Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 won Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL Problem The motor rotates in an excessive speed Motor speed gt F03 data x d32 data d33 data x 1 2 Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data 2 Insufficient gain of the speed controller What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor parameter Number of poles P0O1 gt Specify the P01 data in accordance with the motor to be used Check the maximum frequency setting F03 gt Specify the F03 data in accordance with the output frequency Check the setting of speed limit function d32 and d33 gt Disable the speed limit function d32 and d33 Check whether the actual speed overshoots the commanded one in higher speed operation gt Increase the speed controller gain d03 Depending on the situations reconsider the setting of the filter constant or the integral time 6 15 J O C W a m
462. ower Failure Restart time H14 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s 999 Follow the current limit command H15 Continuous running level 200 to 300 V for 200 V class series 400 to 600 V for 400 V class series H16 Allowable momentary power failure time H18 Torque Limiter Mode selection 0 Disable Speed control 3 lt N E oO Enable Torque current command Enable Torque command H26 Thermistor for motor Disable Mode selection 4 PTC The inverter immediately trips with 044 displayed PTC The inverter issues output signal THM and continues to run NTC When connected H27 wsoy vf fom ee H28 pepe Poo Pe Py fe yf nfo H30 Communications Link Function T command Run command Y XO Y Mode selection 0 F01 C30 F02 RS 485 Port 1 F02 F01 C30 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 2 F02 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 1 F01 C30 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 2 H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus T for bee i of DC link bus capacitor 5 107 Capacitor 0000 to FFFF hex H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication for replacement of cooling fan in units of 10 hours H44 Startup Counter for Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N YIYIYIJ Y Y 5 108 0000 to FFFF hex H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable Y Y 5 109 1 Enable Once a m
463. owing pages Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either For details of copying operation refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 8 m Using negative logic for programmable O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the programmable digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system Active ON signals can be switched to active OFF signals and vice versa with the function code data setting except some signals To set the negative logic system for an input or output terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 using any of function codes E01 through E07 Function code data Turning BX ON ca
464. own above the base frequency to maintain a 3 certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates or decelerates the motor in both the starting and ending zones of acceleration or deceleration Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration rates are available applying 5 weak of the maximum frequency to all of the four inflection zones and specifying arbitrary rate for each of the four zones with function codes H57 to H60 The reference acceleration deceleration time determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time 5 39 Output frequency 4 Acceleration time Deceleration time a Reference Reference acceleration time deceleration time Maximum G frequency oe Time Acceleration Deceleration Starting zone Ending zone Starting zone Ending zone S curve Weak H57 H58 H59 H60 S curve Arbitrary Setting range 0 to 100 Acceleration rate Acceleration rate Deceleration rate Deceleration rate for the 1st S curve for the 2nd S curve for the Ist S curve for the 2nd S curv
465. p with a stop command received This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast to stop command or when an alarm occurs L1 R to L3 T U V W Run command FWD AX 52 1 ON i l l l L i T l l l l LI I I Preparation for running E g Charging of capacitor i Motor speed E Universal DO U DO Function code data 27 Assigning this output signal to an inverter s output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment via the RS 485 communications link or the fieldbus allows the inverter to send commands to the peripheral equipment The universal DO can also be used as an output signal independent of the inverter operation L For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS 485 communications link or fieldbus refer to the respective instruction manual m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip OAZ actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip temperature minus 8 C This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200 V class series or 75 kW or above for 400 V class series has locked E Lifeti
466. p 9 key The data of this function code appears 5 Change the function code data using the N and keys 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code Pressing the amp key instead of the amp key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the amp key to return to the menu from the function code list 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 2 5 D 2 oO QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The dis
467. p compensation amount in for driving and braking individually and adjust the slip amount from internal calculation Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause hunting undesirable oscillation of the system so carefully check the operation on the actual machine For motors exclusively designed for vector control the rated slip of the motor for driving or braking is compensated by P09 or P11 respectively to improve output torque accuracy P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your IMO representatives Function codes Operation Slip compensation Slip compensation gain for driving Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving Slip compensation amount for driving Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation gain for braking Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking Slip compensation amount for braking Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for braking P10 Slip compensation response time Specify the slip compensation response time Basically there is no need to modify the default setting LL For details about the slip compensation control refer to the description of F42 5 97 P12 Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P12 specifies rated slip frequency Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the
468. p level requires performing the setup procedure for the user ordinary operation beforehand LL Refer to the description of H42 Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power OFF The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Even if it is disabled the judgment based on the ON time counting while the voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor is continued For details refer to the description of H42 Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones e Auxiliary input for control power is used e An option card or multi function keypad is used e Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to terminals of the DC link bus DC fan lock detection Bit 5 200 V clas
469. particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes oO a O lt d codes U codes Ss C D S Drive control zc Code Data setting range oc 8 c2 gt 8 Vit PG w o w Torque 5 A Vif PG PG control J68 Brake Signal Brake OFF current 0 to 300 100 J69 Brake OFF frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz J70 Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s 1 0 Jri Brake ON frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz J72 Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s J95 Brake OFF torque 0 to 300 100 J96 Speed selection 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed Py y o NIN J97 Servo lock Gain 0 00 to 10 00 times 0 10 J98 Completion timer 0 000 to 1 000 s oO oo ojo O 0 to 9999 pulses J99 Completion range d codes Application Functions 2 Drive control to PG w o w Torque page V f PG PG control Code Name Data setting range 0 000 to 5 000 s running Vit Change when d01 Speed Control 1 Speed command filter d02 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s 0o05 N YIY Y N d03 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times F100 N Y Y fy N d04 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s 0o10 NJ YIYJYI N d06 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 002 ea eee ae d07 Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz 200 N N IN Y N 5 134 dos Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB E eae d09 Speed Control Jogging 0 000 to 5 000 s 0 020 Y 5 133 d10 Speed detect
470. pecified by F22 LL Refer to E01 through E07 data 13 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates the DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque under V f control DC braking current When vector control without with speed sensor is selected use the pre exciting feature for establishing the magnetic flux LL For details refer to H84 In general DC braking is used to prevent the motor from running by inertia during the stopping process Under vector control with speed sensor however zero speed control will be more effective for applications where load is applied to the motor even in a stopped state If the zero speed control continues for a long time the motor may slightly rotate due to a control error To fix the motor shaft use the servo lock function H For details refer to J97 Cote In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor If you set it on atan extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases A WARNING Even if the motor is stopped by DC braking voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur 5 50 OQ F
471. perating conditions lt _ lt N N N O ECE e E R R A a a reee e e a E T ae ee b43 Speed Control 3 Speed command filter b44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 005 b45 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times 10 0 b46 001 to 9 999 s b48 b49 b50 b51 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz Notch filter attenuation level O to 20 dB Cumulative Motor Run Time 3 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of 10 hours o o o o o gt ro ro n a on ro ro o Integral time 2 o N b52 Indication of cumulative startup count 0000 to FFFF hex b53 Motor 3 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Y1 Y2 b54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y 1 b55 Torque current under vector control N 7 b56 Induced voltage factor under N 85 vector control Resev pooo 20 000 7 SRR R R a e T ae a ARR Se eh eee ojo viol S S s s l N O b57 r codes Motor 4 Parameters Code Data setting range hange when running Data copying r01 r02 r03 O Maximum Frequency 4 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Base Frequency 4 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 4 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 80 to 240 Output an A
472. peration is enabled or disabled V f pattern and torque boost are disabled Data for F37 Auto energy saving operation OFF Auto energy saving operation ON e Under the vector control without speed sensor both F37 and F09 are disabled The auto energy saving operation is also disabled E V f characteristics The JAGUAR VXG series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps and for constant torque load including special pumps requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boosts are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V Rated volt 100 Rated voltage 100 Rated voltage Torque Output Torque Output boost a frequency boost lo frequency Base Base Hz requency frequency 1 FUA F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Linear V f pattern F37 1 5 55 Ciip When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low at a low frequency zone resulting in insufficient output torque depending on the characteristics of the motor and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f patte
473. play items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 6 Figure 3 3 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring List of monitoring items Running status info 49 50 Output frequency AO LI LI a Output current wn nnn n nnn nnn e nnn oe mann Position deviation i g 4 multiplied Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring f_ Se Basic key operation To monitor the running status in Drive monitoring set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example Ofn is displayed 2 Use the and keys to display Drive Monitoring ope 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 3_00 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the 9 key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of monitoring items Press the amp key again to return to the menu 3 8 Table 3 6 Drive Monitoring Display Items shows 306 Rotational direction N A Potationa direction being Sunes f forward z reverse stop Running status in 4 digit hexadecimal format aur Running status Ref
474. prediction function can also issue early warning signals if the lifetime alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals by any of E20 through E24 and E27 L For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION code Displays the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor measured value Capacitance of DC link e Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under ordinary operating bus capacitor conditions 0000 e Measurement failure 0001 Cumulative run time of Displays the cumulative run time of cooling fan in units of ten hours H43 i cooling fan e Data setting range 0 to 9999 Displays the initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor measured o value Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor e Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under ordinary operating conditions 0000 e Measurement failure 0001 Cumulative run time of Displays the cumulative run time of capacitor on the printed circuit capacitors on printed board in units of ten hours circuit boards e Data setting range 0 to 9999 When replacing the cooling fan or capacitors on printed circuit boards it is necessary to clear or modify the data of the function codes listed above For details refer to the documentation for maintenance 5 107 H44 H78 Startup Counter for Motor 1 Maintenance Interval M1 H79 H94 Preset Startup Count for Maintenance M1 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 E Cumulative motor run time 1 H94
475. protection is activated to detect an alarm condition alarm code 077 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the specified value taking into account the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics Motor overload detection time min am i a es E 0 5 0 50 100 150 200 Actual output current Overload detection level x 100 5 42 gt Ql T C Z O O Z O O m F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate H15 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Continuous running level H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time H92 Continuity of running P H93 Continuity of running I F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 e Under V f control pare r aA Auto search disable
476. que page V f_ PG PG control y01 RS 485 Communication 1 1 to 255 5 147 Station address y02 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm er8 YY Trip with alarm er8 after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm ers If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run E mmen fo mews ve Pe Peo fv fv ve y04 Baud rate 0 2400 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 30490 bps yo paano TI e fv fv fe yO6 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits Y 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 3 pene 1 stop a 07 cee wiv te PRP PT Code Data setting range Change when running Data copying 5 23 to V f_ PG PG control Code Name y08 RS 485 Communication 1 0 No detection 1 to 60 s No response error detection time yO9 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 JAGUAR Loader protocol 2 General purpose inverter protocol y11 RS 485 Communication 2 1 to 255 Station address y12 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm erp Trip with alarm erp after running for the period specified by timer y13 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alarm erp If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run Data setting range D 5 c 10 0 D
477. que limiter B Torque limiter B Third quadrant Fourth quadrant Reverse driving Forward braking 2 J D Ql 1 Same for all Torque limiter A applies to all four quadrants that is the same torque limit applies to both driving four quadrants and braking in the forward and reverse rotations Second quadrant First quadrant Reverse braking Forward driving T C Z a O Z O O J m Third quadrant Fourth quadrant Reverse driving Forward braking 2 Upper lower Torque limiter A applies to the upper limit and torque limiter B to the lower limit limits Depending upon the polarity of torque limiters A and B the following patterns are available Torque limiterA Torque limiterB Second quadrant First quadrant Second quadrant First quadrant Reverse braking A A Forward driving Reverse braking Ar Forward driving Torque limiter A Torque limiter A Torque limiter B Torque limiter B F codes Third quadrant Fourth quadrant Third ue N ou quadrant Reverse driving i Forward braking Reverse driving Forward braking Y Y Pattern 2 Pattern 1 Second quadrant First quadrant Reverse braking Forward driving Torque limiter A Torque iter B Third quadrant Fourth quadrant Reverse driving Forward braking Pattern 3 Cnote e If the value of torque limiter A is less than that of torque limiter B torque limiter A applies to both the upper and lower limi
478. quency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 accordingly e Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control FIS gt F16 F15 gt F23 andF15 gt F25 F03 gt F16 where F23 and F25 specify the starting and stop frequencies respectively If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to F01 F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level and Braking time H95 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency goes down to the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking E Braking starting frequency F20 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state E Braking level F21 Data setting range 0 to 100 0 to 80 for MT VT mode inverters F21 specifies the output current level to be applied w
479. quency saved when speed and restarts running the motor at the undervoltage was detected frequency calculated based on the searched speed As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state SAdO9 NOILONNA If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverterat power performs auto search for idling motor the starting frequency specified by speed and restarts running the motor at the function code F23 frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Auto search is enabled by turning ON the digital terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting or setting the d67 data to 1 or 2 For details about the digital terminal command STM and auto search refer to the description of d67 Starting Mode Auto search e Under vector control with speed sensor Data for F14 0 Trip immediately Trip after recovery from power failure Trip after decelerate to stop Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Restart at the frequency at which
480. r f 44 ae Mode selection during acceleration or deceleration increase the operation level Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking For excessive slip compensation during driving decrease the gain for insufficient one increase the gain For excessive slip compensation during braking decrease the gain for insufficient one increase the gain Output current fluctuation damping gain For motor 1 If the motor vibrates due to current fluctuation increase the suppression gain Y Modification effective N Modification ineffective If any problem persists under V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor or vector control with without speed sensor modify the following function code data The drive controls mentioned above use a PI controller for speed control The PI constants are sometimes required to be modified because of the load inertia The table below lists the main modification items For details see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING J 01 Speed control 1 If an excessive overshoot occurs for a speed command change increase the filter Speed command filter constant J 02 Speed control 1 If ripples are superimposed on the speed detection signal so that the speed control Speed detection filter gain cannot be increased increase the filter constant to obtain a larger gain J 03 Speed control 1 If
481. r from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated preventing a failure or accident from causing secondary disasters Note To drive the inverter with single phase input power consult your IMO representative Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO for inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or above In general the inverter runs normally without power supplied to the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO If the inverter main power is shut down however no power is supplied to the control circuit so that the inverter cannot issue a variety of output signals or display on the keypad To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO to the power supply lines If a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the inverter s primary circuit connect the primary circuit of the MC to these terminals RO and TO Terminal rating 200 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 22 kW or below 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 30 kW or above 380 to 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 0 5 A 400 V class series fNote When introducing a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB connect its output second
482. r cable length and other externally determined events Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 a Normal deceleration Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of the motor and machinery load and their kinetic energy losses Cnote When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection Refer to F43 H13 H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time Frequency fall rate H15 H16 Continuous running level and Allowable momentary power failure time Refer to F14 5 102 2 J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA H18 Torque Limiter Mode selection d32 d33 Torque Control Speed limits 1 and 2 When Vector control without speed sensor or Vector control with speed sensor is selected the inverter can limit the motor generating torque according to a torque command sent from external sources m Torque Limiter Mode selection H18 H18 specifies whether to enable or disable the torque limiter When the torque limiter is enabled a torque current command or torque command can be selected Data for H18 Available control i Disable Speed control Enable Torque control with torque current command Enable Torque control with t
483. r drive source from the commercial line to the inverter be sure to turn BX OFF before the Switch to commercial power signal is turned OFF e When switching the motor drive source from the inverter to commercial power adjust the inverter s reference frequency at or slightly higher than that of the commercial power frequency beforehand taking into consideration the motor speed down during the coast to stop period produced by switching e Note that when the motor drive source is switched from the inverter to the commercial power a high inrush current will be generated because the phase of the commercial power usually does not match the motor speed at the switching Make sure that the power supply and all the peripheral equipment are capable of withstanding this inrush current e If you have enabled Restart after momentary power failure F14 3 4 or 5 keep BX ON during commercial power driven operation to prevent the inverter from restarting after a momentary power failure 5 70 Example of Sequence Circuit Main power supply Operation mode switch R Commer forward _ cial line Coast to stop INV Commercial command T2 BX Run ides 35 43 To cl anf i 3 Normal Emergency Stop Inverter 9S 44 30A 30C 43 Note 1 og O AA Note 2 A Emergency Normal Emer a E 7ss 6 Commercial we 7 yey Stop INV a OPX OPX E A Run OPX Control power T3 MC2 THR supply MC3 MC2 T1 RUN 0PX aPX
484. r input power factor for suppressing harmonics To correct the inverter input power factor to suppress harmonics use an optional DCR Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and correct the power factor of the inverter 1 4 B a Q EN dJLHYJANI 3HL NISN 34340444 DCR models Input power factor Approx 90 to 95 The last letter identifies the capacitance Consult IMO Approx 86 t0900 Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor of 37 kW ai or above Note Select a DCR matching not the inverter but the nominal applied motor Applicable reactors differ depending upon the selected CT MT or VT mode even on the same type of inverters 4 PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor Using a PWM converter High power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series corrects the inverter power factor up to nearly 100 When combining an inverter with a PWM converter disable the main power loss detection by setting the function code H72 to 0 If the main power loss detection is enabled H72 1 by factory default the inverter interprets the main power as being shut down ignoring an entry of a run command 5 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB Install a recommended MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection in the prim
485. r supply voltage exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within the specified range 6 10 Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 2 A surge current entered the In the same power line if a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON OFF or a input power supply thyristor converter is activated a surge momentary large increase in the voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor 3 The deceleration time was too Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia for the load and short for the moment of inertia the deceleration time for load Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 E15 and H56 Enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 or deceleration characteristics H71 Enable torque limiter F40 F41 E16 E17 and H73 Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve the braking capability Consider the use of a braking resistor Y yy vy 4 The acceleration time was too Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration short gt Increase the acceleration time F07 E10 E12 and E14 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 gt Consider the use of a braking resistor 5 Braking load was too heavy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated vo
486. r to F01 C51 C52 Bias PID command 1 Bias value and Bias base point These function codes and the gain related function codes specify the gain and bias of the analog PID command 1 enabling it to define arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID commands LL The actual setting is the same as that of F18 For details refer to F18 given in the description of F01 Note Gain related function codes C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 are shared by frequency commands E Bias value C51 Data setting range 100 00 to 100 00 E Bias base point C52 Data setting range 0 00 to 100 00 C53 Selection of Normal Inverse Operation Frequency command 1 Refer to E01 to E07 5 2 4 P codes Motor 1 Parameters The JAGUAR VXG drives the motor under V f control dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor which can be selected with function codes To use the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control and overload stop it is necessary to build a motor model in the inverter by specifying proper motor parameters including the motor capacity and rated current
487. rch delay time 2 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H46 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied LU For details refer to H09 and d67 SAdO9 NOILONNA Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage Motor speed Output frequency eS ee i s Output frequency vote e To use auto search for idling motor speed it is necessary to tune the inverter beforehand a When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency whichever is lower e During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto e Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below e Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events E Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time which the machine system and facility can tolerate If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 I
488. re manufacturing gypsum manufacturing metal processing and a particular process in textile factories Wiredrawing machines metal processing extruding machines printing presses combustors and industrial waste treatment Textile manufacturing and paper manufacturing Outdoor installation Film manufacturing line pumps and food processing Installation of an inverter panel on a carrier or self propelled machine Ventilating fan at a construction site or a press machine Exporting E Storage environment The storage environment in which the inverter is stored after purchase is different from the operation environment For details refer to the VXG MANUAL 1 3 E Wiring precautions 1 Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions 2 Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 3 If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors 4 Precautions for high frequency leakage currents If the wiring distance between an inverter and a motor is long high frequency currents flowing through stray capacitance across wires of phases may cause an inverter overheat overcurrent trip increase of leakage curre
489. rent value of 1 to 200 of the inverter Y Y1 Y2 YIYI IYJY Y 5 83 Low Current Detection Level rated current E36 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 s E40 PID Display Coefficient A 999 to 0 00 to 9990 y Yy 100 5 84 E41 PID Display Coefficient B 999 to 0 00 to 9990 Y Y ooofy y fyfy Nn E42 LED Display Filter 0 0 to 5 0 s Y Y 5 85 lt lt lt lt E43 LED Monitor Item selection py jy os fy 0 Speed monitor select by E48 Y Y Y 5 86 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power 10 PID command 12 PID feedback amount 14 PID output 15 Load factor 16 Motor output 17 Analog input 23 Torque current 24 Magnetic flux command 25 Input watt hour E44 Display when stopped 0 Specified value T Oulputvae v v o vivr y se E45 LCD Monitor Item selection 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide Y Y YY y 1 Y 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque Multi function keypad option Y Y 1 YIYIYJ JY Y 5 88 Type OP KP LCD 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 aa Ea Ea7 Contrast controlo Low to TO Hish virs rr e E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item 0 Sn a 1 Before slip compensation Y Y YIYIYJ JY y 5 86 Output frequency 2 After slip compensation 5 88 Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min Display speed in E60 Sosa Spetin
490. rential PID RST xy YIN JO1 to J19 components J56 to J62 a i04 Hold PID integral component PID HED_ V v N_ 1035 Select local keypad operation roc yjxyjy y y o 36 1036 Selectmotor3 _ _ _ _ M3 _ Y Y Y Y Y A 2 See eee eT Enable integrated sequence to switch to ISwso NIN commercial power 50 Hz 2 Enable integrated sequence to switch to ISW60 NIN commercial power 60 Hz 1047 Servo lock command LOCK papas Pulse train input available only on terminal X7 Pulse train sign aiid available on terminals except X7 pac x 1070 Cancel constant peripheral speed control 1071 Hold the constant peripheral speed LSC HLD y control frequency in the memory 1072 Count the run time of commercial CRUN M1 power driven motor 1 1073 Count the run time of commercial CRUN M2 power driven motor 2 1074 Count the run time of commercial CRUN M3 power driven motor 3 1075 Count the run time of commercial CRUN M4 power driven motor 4 1076 Select droop control DROOP 1077 Cancel PG alarm PG CCL 1080 Cancel customizable logic Aee 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and Y REV terminals by E98 and E99 F02 Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and YY bY oe REV terminals by E98 and E99 No function assigned NONE Y LY LY Y U81 to U85_ J97 to J99 G deyo F01 C30 d62 d63 el SAdO9 NOILONNA Se to E07
491. reparations for a test run as described above start running the inverter for motor operation check using the following procedure ACAUTION If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and investigate the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 14 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency 000 Hz is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Set a low reference frequency such as 5 Hz using N VY keys Check that the frequency is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the reference frequency is displayed on the LED monitor 4 To stop the motor press the key lt Check points during a test run gt e Check that the motor is running in the forward direction e Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the Fu key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference frequency using N V keys Check the above points again If any problem is found modify the function code data again as described below Depending on the settings of function codes the motor speed may rise to an unexpectedly high and dangerous level particularly under vector control with without speed sensor To avoid such an event the speed limiting function is provided Tip If the user is unfamiliar
492. residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD ELCB when necessary Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter The RO and TO terminals are provided for inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or above To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect these terminals to the power supply lines Without power supply to these terminals the inverter can run Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thy
493. resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 F51 and F52 is also required Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the load currently applied based on a moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 E15 and H56 gt Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 F51 and F52 is also required Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor gt Review data of function codes F50 F51 and F52 then modify them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature When the braking resistor is frequently used so as to exceed the settings made by function codes F50 F51 and F52 therefore the inverter issues an overheat alarm even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor configure function codes F50 F51 and F52 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor 12 fus Fuse blown Problem The fuse inside the inverter blew Possible Causes 1 The fuse blew due to short circuiting inside the inverter 13 vf Charger circuit fault What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether there has
494. resonance points enabling a quicker speed response as a whole The following four types of notch filters can be specified Speed control 1 Nocik Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 otch filter d08 Speed control 1 0 to 20 0 Disable Notch filter attenuation level Speed control 2 OE Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 otch filter A50 Speed control 2 0 to 20 0 Disable Notch filter attenuation level Speed control 3 Kear Notch filter resonance frequency HISAON ch filter i b50 Speed control 3 0 to 20 0 Disable Notch filter attenuation level Speed control 4 orttira Notch filter resonance frequency 110200 otch filter r50 Speed control 4 0 to 20 0 Disable Notch filter attenuation level Setting the notch filter attenuation level to 0 dB disables the corresponding notch filter It is possible to apply all of the four notch filters to the Ist motor or apply each notch filter to each of the Ist to 4th motors Notch filter 1 Notch filter 2 Notch filter 3 Notch filter 4 Requisite for use of notch filters d07 and d08 A49 and A50 b49 and b50 r49 and r50 M2 M3 and M4 Select motor 2 3 and 4 are not in use E01 to E07 E98 E99 12 36 37 All of the three Motor Parameter Switching items are set to Parameter A42 b42 r42 1 Other than the above To the 2nd motor To the 3rd motor To the 4th motor d10 Speed Control Jogging Speed command filter and Speed detection filter A
495. responsibility of the machinery manufacturer to guarantee that a short circuiting or other fault does not occur in wiring of external safety components between terminals EN and PLC Fault examples e Terminals EN and PLC are short circuited due to the wiring being caught in the door of the control panel so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN although the safety component is OFF and therefore the safety function will may NOT operate e The wiring is in contact with any other wire so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN and therefore the safety function will may NOT operate 2 Other notes When configuring the product safety system with this safety stop function make a risk assessment of not only the external equipment and wiring connected to terminal EN but also the whole system including other equipment devices and wiring against the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer under the manufacturer s responsibility in order to confirm that the whole system conforms to the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer In addition as preventive maintenance the machinery manufacturer must perform periodical inspections to check that the product safety system properly functions To make the inverter compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 it is necessary to install the inverter on a control panel with the enclosure rating of IP54 or above This safety stop function coasts the m
496. riginal function code reappears 7 Press the amp key to return to the menu from the function code list 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 2 5 D 2 oO QVdAAd AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 6 Figure 3 3 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring List of monitoring items Running status info 49 50 Output frequency AO LI LI a Output current wn nnn n nnn nnn e nnn oe mann Position deviation i g 4 multiplied Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring f_ Se Basic key operation To monitor the
497. ring see Sections 2 3 2 through 2 3 6 put the wiring guide and the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal While pressing the Front cover fixing screw Front cover Wiring guide wiring guide upward pull it out toward you Figure 2 4 Removing the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide VXG30A5L 4E 2 For inverters with a capacity of 30 to 630 kW D Loosen the four front cover fixing screws hold the cover with both hands slide it upward slightly and pull it toward you as shown below After carrying out wiring see Sections 2 3 2 through 2 3 6 align the screw holes provided in the front cover with the screws on the inverter case then put the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal Tip To expose the control printed circuit board control PCB open the keypad enclosure Front cover fixing screws Keypad enclosure Front cover Front cover fixing screws Tightening torque 1 8 Nem M4 3 5 Nem M5 Figure 2 5 Removing the Front Cover VXG75AL 4E 2 4 2 gt 73 D z NO dJLHJANI JHL ONIYIM ANY ONILNNOW 2 3 2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes 1 Arrangement of main circuit terminals The tables and figures given below show the screw specifications and wire sizes Note that the terminal arrangements differ depending on the inverter types In each of the figures two grounding terminals G
498. ristor driven loads in the same power supply line Inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below have a built in braking resistor DBR between the terminals P and DB When connecting an external braking resistor DBR be sure to disconnect the built in one A grounding terminal for a motor Use this terminal if needed For control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of them to the common terminals of the control circuit To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV transistor output terminals Y1 to Y4 and relay contact output terminals Y5A C and 30A B C Switching connectors in the main circuits For details refer to Switching connectors later in this section Slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Use these switches to customize the inverter operations For details refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches When using the Enable input function be sure to remove the jumper wire from terminals EN and PLC For opening and closing the hardware circuit between
499. rked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 1 To display the light alarm factor and escape from the light alarm state follow the instructions below E Displaying the light alarm factor 1 Press the key to enter Programming mode 2 Check the light alarm factor in 5_36 Light alarm factor latest under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode The light alarm factor is displayed in alarm codes For details about the alarm codes see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy alarm and Light alarm objects J For details about the menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is possible to display the factors of most recent 3 light alarms in 5_37 Light alarm factor last to 5_39 Light alarm factor 3rd last E Switching the LED monitor from the light alarm to normal display If it is necessary to return the LED monitor to the normal display state showing the running status such as reference frequency before the light alarm factor is removed e g when it takes a long time to remove the light alarm factor follow the steps below 1 Press the amp key to return the LED monitor to the light alarm indication a 2 With a being displayed press the amp key The LED monitor returns to the normal display state while the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking E Releasing the light alar
500. rmal time Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic Nominal applied e S for setting the motor characteristic factor factor motor kW Factory default thermal time P ty constant Imax G 021022 M OOD Allowable Aa 30 to 45 continuous current K aed 10 min x 150 Cs 85 90 If F10 is set to 2 changes of the output frequency do not affect the cooling effect Therefore the overload detection level F11 remains constant 5 41 E Overload detection level F11 Data setting range 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the inverter In general set the F11 data to the allowable continuous current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 times of the rated current of the motor To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set the F11 data to 0 00 E Thermal time constant F12 Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes for motors of 22 kW or below and 10 minutes for motors of 30 kW or above by factory default Example When the F12 data is set at 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload
501. rn Rated voltage at base frequency 1 FO5 Variable torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern Vif pattern 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency 0 Non linear Vif pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 m Torque boost Data setting range 0 0 to 20 0 100 Rated voltage at base frequency e Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation at no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that assures approx 100 of starting torque Cote e Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level e When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point O
502. rning it OFF decelerates it to stop Tip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 m Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop C ip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E10 to E15 Acceleration Time 2 to 4 Deceleration Time 2 to 4 Refer to F07 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 2 1 2 2 Refer to F40 E20 to E23 Terminal Y1 to Y4 Function E24 E27 Terminal Y5A C and 30A B C Function Relay output E20 through E24 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5A C and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 are transistor outputs and terminals Y5A C and 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems Cote e When a negative log
503. rolled as 0 through 100 For the given feedback input determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment Example When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V e Use terminal 12 since the connection terminal is for voltage input e Set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 200 in order to make the maximum value 5 V of the external sensor s output correspond to 100 Note that the input specification for terminal 12 is 0 to 10 V corresponding to 0 to 100 thus a gain factor of 200 10 V 5 V x 100 should be specified Note also that any bias setting does not apply to feedback control Feedback A 100 0 Input at terminal 12 OV DV 10 V Application examples Dancer control for winders Example 1 When the output level of the external sensor is 7 VDC e Use terminal 12 since the voltage input is of bipolar e When the external sensor s output is of bipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 100 To convert the output 7 VDC to 100 set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 143 as calculated below _10V_ o 7y 143 Feedback Input at terminal 12 Example 2 When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC e Use terminal 12 since the connection terminal is for voltage input e When the external sensor s output is of unipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 0 to 100
504. rter D2 1X 52 2X 88X 44 Emergency switch lt Note gt Control power supply Run command Inverter operation Commercial power operation 5 76 3 Sequence with an emergency switching function Part 2 Automatic switching by the alarm output issued by the inverter Main power Commercial power selection Operation selection switch switch 43X INV Com ON when the inverter is Run selected FWD 3S 43 Inverter Normal Emergency SW52 1 SW52 2 swee amp Stop Y2 Y DS 44 Note This switch is provided for manually switching the run command source to a 88X 30 commercial power line when the automatic switching sequence fails due to a critical failure of the inverter 52 1X 52 2X Emergency fq E 7 99 switch 7 sto O 43 lt Note gt n Pa Normal Emer i Inverter Q Commercial Sener 30 i 38 i OPX E 88X E run 30 Control power OPX supply 52 1X 52 2X THR 88 52 2 OPX 43x 52 1 52 2 88 Run command Inverter operation Commercial power operation E Cancel PG alarm PG CCL Function code data 77 When this terminal command is ON the PG wire break alarm is ignored Use this terminal command when switching PG wires for switching motors for example to prevent it from being detected as PG wire break E Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction tu
505. rter again 1 ie eee Setting the speed command at below the starting and stop frequencies k and turning a run command ON enables the zero speed control The table below shows the conditions for zero speed control to be enabled or disabled Speed command Data for d24 Stop Gate OFF At startup PE SE and oe Stop Gate OFF stop frequencies a ae Zero speed control Aisop Below he wop hequeney ON Zero speed onto sto elow the stop frequenc i POOS j o oF Stop Gate OFF QO J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA Speed command lt Starting frequency and Stoo frequenc Speed command lt Stop frequency pees Speed command 2 Starting frequency and Stop frequency Speed command Starting frequency 1 Holding time F24 Zero speed control Zero speed control d24 0 or 1 d24 1 a K Speed ON Gate ON k W Gate OFF Gate OFF Run command E Stop Frequency Detection mode F38 Under vector control with speed sensor Data setting range 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed F38 specifies whether the inverter judges when to shutdown its output by the detected speed or reference speed Although the inverter generally judges it by the detected speed if a load exceeding the inverter capability such as external excess load is applied the inverter may not stop because the motor may not stop normally and the detected speed may not reach the stop frequency level If F38 data is set to 1 referenc
506. running status in Drive monitoring set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example Ofn is displayed 2 Use the and keys to display Drive Monitoring ope 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 3_00 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the 9 key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of monitoring items Press the amp key again to return to the menu 3 8 Table 3 6 Drive Monitoring Display Items shows 306 Rotational direction N A Potationa direction being Sunes f forward z reverse stop Running status in 4 digit hexadecimal format aur Running status Refer to E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 3_23 on the next page 120 No of poles If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value Display value Output frequency Hz x 3_08 Motor speed Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for speed indication If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value 3_09 Load shaft speed Virtual physica
507. s Electrical thermal and energy EN61800 5 1 2003 A WARNINGA 1 The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection 2 To prevent the risk of hazardous accidents that could be caused by damage of the inverter install the specified fuses in the supply side primary side according to the following tables Breaking capacity Min 10 kA Rated voltage Min 500 V applied a Fuse ratin vie applied Fuse rating wee Inverter type A 8 supply motor Inverter type n A at vonage kW mode kW VXG1A5 4E 3 IEC60269 1 VXG3A 2 A VXG2A5 4E 6 IEC60269 1 CT Nominal CT VXG5A 2 15 1EC60269 1 H 1 VXG4A 4E 10 IEC60269 1 2 2 VXG5 5A 4E 15 IEC60269 1 VXG8A 2 CT 20 EC60269 1 eee cmon AO A 22 VXGI1A 2 30 IEC60269 1 aa VXG16A5L 4E 80 IEC60269 4 VXGI8A 2 Ee 40 IEC60269 1 a CT 155 TEC60269 4 re VXG23AL 4E lt 80 IEC60269 4 ris VXG30A5L 4E a 125 IEC60269 4 C 160 qEC60269 4 Ea VXG37AL 4E 125 IEC60269 4 C 00 qEC60269 4 ES VXG45AL 4E EA 160 IEC60269 4 VXG88AL 2 yr 250 0EC60269 4 Oe howe fe po VXGIISAL 2 HOI 250 EC60269 4 VXGTISALME Fp 250 1EC60269 4 VXGI46AL 2 jp 350 IEC60269 4 Ve ae ee
508. s 7 3 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main T a aoa tation E A E E A E 7 5 Taa Insulation TeSt wv castaacheanssonserstoout aed ne aoe eorna 7 6 7 6 IMO Inverter Warranty Statement cccee 7 7 7 6 1 Terms of IMO 5 year Warranty c000000 7 7 7 6 2 Warranty Restrictions cecciecececseectasscevcazsaceseese 7 7 E E a E I E E E 7 7 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS ssooooooeoooososnnsssseerrerrereerenne 8 1 8 1 Standard Model With integral EMC Filter 8 1 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series 00000000000000 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series 0000000000000 8 2 8 2 Common Specifications ccccccsseccccceeccesereseeeees 8 5 8 3 External TMSMSIONS s55hoenscwsenesdoaveseteonwaveneanstenasowntes 8 7 Chapter 9 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDG 9 1 9 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL CertiliCatiOn cccccsietsassiedsanseverevasevae 9 1 Dill SGCWETON siccrencrscusanssnasnerariaonionnrincinnturneceeuducinais 9 1 9 1 2 Considerations when using JAGUAR VXG in systems to be certified by UL and cUL 9 1 9 2 Compliance with European Standards 9 1 9 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 9 1 Sh COCCI e E as 9 1 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure 9 2 9 3 3 Leakage current of EMC filter built in type of n Mie 05 aE E 9 3 9 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 9 4 9 4 1 General COMME NUS scicci
509. s control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted For details about input commands sent through the communications link refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual and the instruction manual of communication related options as well m Displaying control I O signal terminals on options The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional digital input and output interface cards just like the signal status of the control circuit terminals Table 3 14 lists the assignment of digital I O signals to the LED segments Table 3 14 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 A a l IAA mows oo o o o o oeae o e e e e a e o ESEE P be b L L for or 06 0s os os or or 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Sche contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information is just like that in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring
510. s detected Analog frequency command was lost Warning related to PID control absolute value alarm or PID alarm ae deviation alarm Output torque drops below the low torque detection level my Wena a ym for the specified period PTC thermistor activated The PTC thermistor on the motor detected a temperature Inverter life Cumulative run time The motor cumulative run time reached the specified level Inverter life Number of startups Number of startups reached the specified level Lifetime alarm Set data for selecting light alarms in hexadecimal For details on how to select the codes refer to the next page Data setting range 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal E Selecting light alarm factors To set and display the light alarm factors in hexadecimal format each light alarm factor has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 5 1 and 5 2 Set the bit that corresponds to the desired light alarm factor to 1 Table 5 3 shows the relationship between each of the light alarm factor assignments and the LED monitor display Table 5 4 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal 9 112 Table 5 1 Light Alarm Selection 1 H81 Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors ss Ta SOS ate Overtoad of motor RS 485 communications error o em COM port 2 os oon Overload of motor 1 RS 485 communications error n es COM port 1 4 a eieo Braking resistor overheated 11 erS Optionerror Option err
511. s from steps 1 to 10 are issued to SOO1 to SO10 respectively Those outputs SO01 to SO10 differ in configuration depending upon the connection destination as listed below To relay those outputs to any function other than the customizable logic route them via customizable logic outputs CLO1 to CL05 Customizable logic input Select one of the internal step output signals SOO to S010 U01 U02 et in customizable logic input setting i m Input to the inverter s sequence Select one of the internal step output signals SOO to S010 processor to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to5 U71 to U75 e g Select multi frequency SSI CLOI to CLOS Run forward FWD Select an inverter s sequence processor input function to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 5 U81 to U85 CLOI to CLOS is to be connected Same as in E01 General purpose digital output Select one of the internal step output signals SOO to SO10 Y terminals to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to5 U71 to U75 CLOI to CLOS To specify a general purpose digital output function on Y terminals to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 5 CLOI to CLOS is to be connected select E20 to E24 E27 one of CLOI to CLOS by specifying the general purpose digital output function on any Y terminal Note General purpose digital outputs on Y terminals are updated every 5 ms To securely output a cust
512. s on the LED monitor Programming This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the mode inverter status and maintenance If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode in which you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm mode Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition For details first see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects in Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective and then read the troubleshooting of each alarm Running mode Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON Configuration of function code data and monitor of maintenance alarm info and various status Detection of m Release of a light alarm paty a light alarm f I 1 I 4 I f f I 7 J I OTS Press this key if i an alarm has H occurred I 4 S Release of Fi Occurrence of a heavy alarm N N a heavy alarm i Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes B Tip Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression keys stands
513. s regarded as 0 V 5 121 E Gain and bias PID command Gain a a aa C32 C37 or C42 Point B Bias D A C51 Point A Lio i E a Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C52 C34 C39 or C44 Example Mapping the range of through 5 V at terminal 12 to 0 through 100 Process command Gain C32 100 Gain base point C34 50 Bias value C51 0 Bias base point C52 10 0 Input at terminal 12 OViV 5V 10V 3 PID command with UP DOWN control J02 3 When the UP DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command turning the terminal command UP or DOWN ON causes the PID speed command to change within the range from 0 to 100 The PID speed command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities such as temperature or pressure with the PID display coefficients E40 E41 To select the UP DOWN control as a PID speed command the UP and DOWN should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X7 HH E01 to E07 data 17 18 Function Retain PID speed command value Increase PID speed command value at a rate between 0 1 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Decrease PID speed command value at a rate between 0 1 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Retain PID speed command value The inverter internally holds the PID command value set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held value at the next restart including powering ON Note 4 PID command via communications link J02 4 Use f
514. s series 45 kW or above 400 V class series 75 kW or above An inverter of 45 kW or above 200 V class series or of 75 kW or above 400 V class series 1s equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan When the inverter detects that the DC fan is locked by a failure or other cause you can select either continuing the inverter operation or entering into alarm state Entering alarm state The inverter issues the alarm 0 and coasts to stop the motor Continuing operation The inverter does not enter the alarm mode and continues operation of the motor Note that however the inverter turns ON the OH and LIFE signals on the transistor output terminals whenever the DC fan lock is detected regardless of your selection Cote If the ON OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled H06 1 the cooling fan may stop depending on operating condition of the inverter In this case the DC fan lock detection feature is considered normal e g the cooling fan is normally stopped by the stop fan command so that the inverter may turn OFF the LIFE or OH signal output or enable to cancel the alarm OAZ even if the internal air circulation DC fan is locked due to a failure etc When you start the inverter in this state it automatically issues the run fan command then the inverter detects the DC fan lock state and turn ON the LIFE or OH output or enters the alarm 0 state Note that operating the inverter under the condition that the DC fan is locked
515. s the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm u and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm lu The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm 7u is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure decelerate to shop control 1s invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm Zuis issued As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state 2 J Ql Even if the F14 data is set to 3 the Continue to run function is disabled If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverterat power performs auto search for idling motor the output fre
516. s the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuation and the motor speed control accuracy Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation since this control is an open loop V f control that does not perform the current control unlike the vector control The advantages of this control include larger maximum torque per output current than that the vector control E V f control with speed sensor Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation Under V f control with speed sensor the inverter detects the motor rotation using the encoder mounted on the motor shaft and compensates for the decrease in slip frequency by the PI control to match the motor rotation with the commanded speed This improves the motor speed control accuracy m Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor The difference from the V f control with speed sensor stated above is to calculate the motor torque for the load applied and use it to optimize the voltage and current vector output for getting the maximal torque out of a motor This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances su
517. scriptions are in principle arranged in the numerical order of assigned data However highly relevant signals are collectively described where one of them first appears Refer to the function codes in the Related function codes column if any The JAGUAR VXG runs under V f control dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which 1s indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the table given below Refer to page 5 2 ACAUTION e Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings Run commands e g Run forward FWD stop commands e g Coast to a stop BX and frequency change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals modifying the function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or frequency command sources with the related terminal commands e g SS1 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result Function Function code data data Drive Drivecontrl Related Terminal commands assigned Sym
518. scsicsercnaiesennsarernatenseniccnenes 9 4 9 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component TOOUNAUIOM oxc48scp0ieuasestaaueientaasaaan nes ani 9 4 9 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive HM ANS EU erana E 9 4 AEE a e E E A TE A A 9 4 9 5 2 Points for consideration when using the JAGUAR VXG series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 4 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 00 9 5 Do meral iisen bene dtenaansvasnsestbeentenewens 9 5 96 2 ENISA l snieni ana 9 5 T NO a eae 9 6 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and instruction manual this book are contained in the package CNote e The inverter is not equipped with a keypad when it is shipped Mount a separately ordered keypad on the inverter This manual describes the inverter with a remote keypad For inverters with a multi function keypad read the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual in conjunction with this manual e Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in VT mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DC reactor DCR to be connected Be sure to connect a separately ordered DCR to those inverters 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the type you ordered You can check the type and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub namepl
519. se of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Symbol Name Functions 2 gt 73 D z NO 13 Power supply Power supply 10 VDC for an external frequency command potentiometer for the Variable resistor 1 to 5kQ potentiometer The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected 12 Analog setting 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external voltage input voltage input e 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation e 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal 3 Hardware specifications e Input impedance 22kQ e The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC e Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 C1 Analog setting 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external current input current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation e 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can
520. see Figures 2 6 and 2 7 a VXGI80AL 2 to VXG350AL 2 VXG176AL 4E to VXG253AL 4E CN R red A CNW white CNW awae d a a CN R red Connector configuration When using terminals R1 and T1 e Feeding the DC linked power e Combined with a PWM converter NO When not using terminal R1 or T1 Use conditions Factory default b VXG400AL 2E VXG304AL 4E to VXG1370AL 4E Connector configuration CN W ili 1 oh tte Aa E na white white c l U diti When not using terminal R1 or T1 eg o and T1 se conditions Factory defauli eeding the DC linked power e Combined with a PWM converter Note By factory default the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W are set on the and positions respectively Do not exchange them unless you drive the inverter with a DC linked power supply Wrong configuration of these switching connectors cannot drive the cooling fans causing a heat sink overheat alarm Ohi or a charger circuit alarm pof E Location of the switching connectors The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board power PCB as shown below Keypad enclosure Power switching connectors CN UX Fan power o supply switching Bees E connectors CN R and veers Auxiliary fan eS power input aa termina
521. segments Table 3 14 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 A a l IAA mows oo o o o o oeae o e e e e a e o ESEE P be b L L for or 06 0s os os or or 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Sche contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information is just like that in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Refer to Section 3 4 4 Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the G key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the N and keys to display Maintenance Information Sche 3 Press the G amp key to proceed to the list of maintenance items e g 5_00 4 Use the N and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the amp 9 key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of maintenance items Press the amp key again to return to the menu 3 14 Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information shows Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Counter range 0 to 65 535 hours Display Upper 2 digits an
522. sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which is indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the tables Refer to page 5 2 Explanations of each function are given in normal logic system Active ON Functions assigned M ae V f PG PG control data 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power IPF y Y F14 failure 1007 Motor overload early warning OL ES o F10 Function code data Active ON Active OFF x Y lt 33 5 36 37 38 39 41 42 3 4 1033 Reference oss detected REF OFF 1037 _ Cument detected ID 1038 Curent detected m 1039 Curent detected 3 ms 1041 Low current detected Inr 1042 PID ALM 1044 Motor stopped due to slow flowrate PID STP under PID control 1045 Low output torque detected U TL 1046 Torque detected 1 TDI 1047 Torque detected 2 TD2 5 78 i ON N Uo UN 0 T Y Switch motor drive source between ipl commercial power and inverter output SW88s For MC on commercial line E01 to E07 Switch motor drive source between ISW50 40 12 commercial power and inverter output SW52 2 ISW60 41 For secondary side 12 Switch motor drive source between 13 commercial power and inverter output SW52 1 For primary side 15 1015 Select AX terminal function F
523. series of inverters Drive control Default pew settin ing PG w o w Torque Eos V f V f PG PG control F codes Fundamental Functions Code Name Data setting range Change when FOO Data Protection Disable both data protection and digital reference protection Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection Enable both data protection and digital reference ee Frequency Command 1 W amp keys on keypad ia input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 Voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control N amp keys on keypad balanceless bumpless switching available Digital input interface card option Pulse train input 0 RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse 2 Maximum Frequency 1 5 0 to 500 0 Hz Base Frequency 1 25 0 to 500 Hz Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage
524. shown in Figure 2 12 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded Wire lt Control Circuit gt External Analog N Capacitor lt Control Circuit gt Output Device 12 11 Ferrite Core 1kto5k Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 11 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 12 Example of Electric Noise Reduction X1 Digital input 1 1 Various signals such as Coast to a stop Enable external alarm trip and Select ae multi frequency can be assigned to terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV by Digital input 2 setting function codes E01 to E07 E98 and E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Digital input 3 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes m 5 at mis 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the slide switch SW1 is Bed ed ic de Refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches The factory default for a X5 Digital input 5 VXGxxx 2E is SINK and for VXGxxx 4E SOURCE 5 X6 Digital input 6 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X7 FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Run forward 4 Digital input terminal X7 can be defined as a pulse train input terminal with the c
525. shown in this column are output signals not function codes E Inputs 1 and 2 U01 U02 etc The following signals are available as input signals Selectable Signals 0000 1000 General purpose output signals Same as the ones specified by E20 RUN Inverter running FAR Frequency speed arrival signal FDT Frequency speed detected LU Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped B D Torque polarity detected and other signals Note 27 Universal DO is not available Terminal input signal Terminal Terminal X6 ae aan Terminal FWD input signal FWD Terminal REV input signal EV 6000 7000 Final run command FL_RUN ON when frequency command 0 and a run command is given 6001 7001 Final FWD run command FL_FWD ON when frequency command 0 and a run forward command is given 6002 7002 Final REV run command FL_REV ON when frequency command 0 and a run reverse command is given 6003 7003 During acceleration DACC ON during acceleration 6004 7004 During deceleration DDEC ON during deceleration 6005 7005 Under anti regenerative control REGA ON under anti regenerative control 6006 7006 Within dancer reference position DR_REF ON when the dancer roll position is within the reference range 6007 7007 Alarm factor presence ALM_ACT ON when there is no alarm factor 5 141 0105 1105 l e Se X5 input signal a E a l E a Logic circuit U03 etc Any
526. slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic N b17 Rated current b18 Auto tuning saturation extension factors a to c Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled b20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A b21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 b22 X 10 00 to 50 00 0 to 200 0 01 to 10 00 s 0 to 200 0 00 to 15 00 Hz 00 to 20 00 O b23 Slip compensation gain for driving b24 Slip compensation response time O b25 Slip compensation gain for braking O b26 Rated slip frequency b27 Iron loss factor 1 b28 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 y y1 2 0 00 p29 Iron loss factor 3 _ vry2 0 00 b30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 y y1Y2 b31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 y W1yY2 b32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 y ly1Y2 b33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y M SEER E ES a e a E E E E O b34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 to 300 0 Y The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity Se
527. son with the initial capacitance measured at shipment If the multi function keypad is mounted the inverter does not measure the discharging time automatically since the inverter s conditions are different from the ones applied at shipment It is therefore necessary to perform the setup procedure mentioned in above to enable the measurement under ordinary operating conditions To make an accurate judgment on the service life of the DC ink bus capacitor accurate measurement of the capacitance select the judgment procedure according to the keypad type and the measuring conditions following the flowchart given on the next page 1 3 2 gt 73 D gt N NOILOAdSNI ANY JONYNALNIYN Selection of life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor What keypad type is mounted on the inverter See Multi function keypad Remote keypad YES Setting up the load conditions in ordinary operation See Modify the measuring conditions applied at NO shipment Measuring under the conditions applied at shipment See Measurement under Comparison with the initial ordinary operating Capacitance at shipment conditions when the power peoe IE is turned OFF See 2 Inamachine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down the inverter does not measure the discharging time For such an inverter the ON time counting is provided The ON time counting resul
528. st F09 Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 gt Enable the current limiter F43 and torque limiter F40 F41 E16 and E17 gt Increase the inverter capacity Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise Problem A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter Possible Causes 1 Inverter output terminal s grounded ground fault 3 lun Overvoltage What to Check and Suggested Measures Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor Problem The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage Oul Overvoltage occurred during acceleration Ou2 Overvoltage occurred during deceleration Ous Overvoltage occurred during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The powe
529. switches Note For inputting a pulse train through the digital input terminal X7 e Inputting from a pulse generator with an open collector transistor output Stray capacity on the wiring between the pulse generator and the inverter may disable transmission of the pulse train As a countermeasure against this problem insert a pull up resistor between the open collector output signal terminal X7 and the power source terminal terminal PLC if the switch selects the SINK mode input insert a pull down resistor between the output signal and the digital common terminal terminal CM if the switch selects the SOURCE mode input A recommended pull up down resistor is 1kQ 2 W Check if the pulse train is correctly transmitted because stray capacity is significantly affected by the wire types and wiring conditions Analog Both terminals output monitor signals for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC monitor current 4 to 20 mA The output form VO IO for each of FM1 and FM2 can be switched with the slide switches on the control PCB and the function codes as listed below Terminal function is Output form Content is Terminal specified by Analog DC voltage Analog DC current specified by Slide switch SW4 Function cod FM1 Function codeF29 o i m Slide switch SW eye FM2 l Function codeF32 o i Ps The signal content can be selected from the following with function codes F31 and F35 e Output freque
530. t reverse _ gt signal signal A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference eupneseiptt M La Le B phase input 90 degree B phase advanced B phase delayed E Feedback Input Encoder pulse resolution d15 Data setting range 0014 to EA60 in hex d15 specifies the pulse resolution P R of the speed feedback encoder 20 to 60000 P R in decimal E Feedback Input Pulse count factor 1 d16 and Pulse count factor 2 d17 Data setting range 1 to 9999 d16 and d17 specify the factors to convert the speed feedback input pulse rate into the motor shaft speed r min Specify the data according to the transmission ratios of the pulley and gear train as shown below Ke y j j l l NS NS y Transmission ratio a b S We Noof Pulley Dia a H Fol T teeth b No of Transmission A N Lf gTa teeth a ratio c d Ca i O JE K A ee No of A a wA o E 6 tay teeth a aed Sy SN Radius d ra ah sy PEN Radius c wa FA YA YB Inverter AAL Jaguar VXG Power LAR L2 S L3 T supply CY An Example of a Closed Loop Speed Control System Conveyor Listed below are expressions for conversion between a speed feedback input pulse rate and motor shaft speed Pulse count factor 2 d17 Motor shaft speed pulse count aslo dio x Encoder shaft speed Pulse count factor 2 d17 _ b 9 d Pulse count factor 1 d16 a c Pulse count factor
531. t can be represented as elapsed time 5_26 and time remaining before the end of life 4_27 as shown in Table 7 3 On the LED monitor Cnote When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input the load conditions widely differ so that the discharging time cannot be accurately measured To prevent unintended measuring the discharging time measurement can be disabled with the function code H98 Bit 4 0 1 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment When bit 3 of H98 data is 0 the measuring procedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF The measuring result can be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance Jessener rennene een Capacitance measuring procedure 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e In case another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit RO TO e Mount the remote keypad on the inverter e Turn OFF all the digital input signals
532. t circuited with CMY ON and 0 when it is open OFF The status of the relay contact output terminal Y5A C is assigned to bit 4 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals Y5A and Y5C is closed The status of the relay contact output terminals 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is ON Y2 through Y4 are OFF the circuit between Y5A and Y5C is open and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 0707 is displayed on the LED4 through LED1 Table 3 13 presents bit assignment and an example of corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Table 3 13 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Example LED No LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 ME ae AREA TENE UE AREAL SENECA RAC NEZER Finputtemsinal smmfaerpfoxre en xr x6 xs xe oa oa xr Rev rwo SSRs Bi ff peed wef va Binwy 0 ololotoftofo tofofofo tofolilo LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page 5 D 2 oO QVdAA AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communication
533. t four alarm codes You can refer to the running Section Information information at the time when the alarm occurred 3 4 7 Allows you to read or write function code data as well as verifying it Data Copying 7cpy Saving the function code data of the currently running inverter into the Section keypad and connecting it to a PC running JAGUAR Loader enables 3 4 8 data checking on the PC Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option E Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only three menus Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 1 Data Setting and Menu 7 Data Copying allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 5 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Menu 0 Quick Setup Function code data editing mode factory default Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 2 Data Checking Function code data check mode Menu 7 Data Copying Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 Tip Press the amp key to enter Programming mode and display menus While cycling through the menus with the W O key select the desired menu item with the key Once the entire menu has been cycled
534. t have been changed from their Section 8 R factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data 3 4 3 3 Drive Displays the running information required for maintenance or test Section Monitoring running 3 4 4 I O Checking otio Displays external interface information era 5 Maintenance Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time Section Information 3 4 6 la ib Ir l id lu ly _ o codes Optional functions Note Jope 4i o che 6al Alarm Displays the recent four alarm codes You can refer to the running Section Information information at the time when the alarm occurred 3 4 7 Allows you to read or write function code data as well as verifying it Data Copying 7cpy Saving the function code data of the currently running inverter into the Section keypad and connecting it to a PC running JAGUAR Loader enables 3 4 8 data checking on the PC Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option E Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only three menus Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 1 Data Setting and Menu 7 Data Copying allowing no switching
535. t malfunctioned or power circuit malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect the connection was incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections 5 Any other loads connected to Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation the same power supply has gt Reconsider the power supply system configuration required a large starting current causing a temporary voltage drop 6 Inverter s inrush current caused Check if the alarm occurs when a molded case circuit breaker MCCB the power voltage drop because residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker the power supply transformer ELCB with overcurrent protection or magnetic contactor MC is turned ON capacity was insufficient gt Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer 5 Zin Input phase loss Problem Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Breaks in wiring to the main Measure the input voltage power input terminals gt Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices MCCB MC etc 6 11 Possible Causes 2 The screws on the main power input terminals are loosely tightened 3 Interphase voltage unbalance between three phases was too large 4 Overload cyclically occurred 5 Single phase voltage was input to the three ph
536. t sink overheat early warning E01 through E07 or the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload prevention control H70 6 12 8 042 External alarm Problem External alarm was inputted THR when the Enable external alarm trip THR has been assigned to any of digital input terminals Possible Causes 1 2 3 9 043 Inverter internal overheat An alarm function of external equipment was activated Wrong connection or poor contact in external alarm signal wiring Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the operation of external equipment gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to the terminal to which the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned Any of E01 through E07 E98 and E99 should be set to 9 gt Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly Check whether the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned to an unavailable terminal with E01 through E07 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the normal negative logic of the external signal matches that of the THR command specified by any of E01 through E07 E98 and E99 gt Ensure the matching of the norm
537. t that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher 6 Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment 7 Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them 8 When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m you should apply basic insulation for the control circuits of the inverter The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m 9 Use wires listed in EN60204 Appendix C Recommended wire size mm Main circuit MCCBon 7 Main power RCD ELCB 1 input 2 Rated current L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s wy We SG E3 a a EJ DSD w VXG30AL 2 rE VXG46AL 2 VXGSI9AL 2 Inverter type CT VT mode supply RO TO Aux fan power supply R1 T1 Power supply voltage Control circuit Nominal applied motor Inverter outputs DC reactor P1 P 2 Braking resistor P DB 2 Aux control power VXG74AL 2 VXG88AL 2 VXGIISAL 2 Three phase 200 V VXGI146AL 2 VXGI180AL 2 EEEE VXG215AL 2 Soe VXG283AL 2 VXG350AL 2 400 wa VXG400AL 2 oe 150x2 The
538. t the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock A WARNINGA e Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur ACAUTION e The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent them from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur e The leakage current of the EMC filter built in type of inverters is comparatively large Be sure to perform protective grounding Otherwise an electric shock could occur Operation A WARNING Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON Otherwise an electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatical
539. t the motor is separated from mechanical equipment c LR WS 3T U 5 Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF Powering on the inverter with any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation 6 Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment e g a defense to prevent people from access to the equipment Figure 4 2 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals 4 1 3 Powering ON and checking A WARNING e Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON e Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise an electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points The following is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory defaults 1 Check that the LED monitor displays 00 indicating that the reference frequency is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 3 If the LED monitor displays any number except 00 press 6 V key to set 00 2 Check that the built in cooling fans rotate Inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or below are not equipped with a cooling fan Figure 4 3 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 1 4 Switching between CT MT and VT drive modes The JAGUAR VXG series of inverters is applicable to three ratings high duty CT for heavy load applications medium duty MT for medium load ones and low duty VT for l
540. tage for 400 V class series Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 Y Y 73 Y Y NIN N percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Protection for Motor 2 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan 0 00 Disable Overload detection level 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of DE motor Thermal time constant 0 pv ty ts ty ty ty iy ty DC Braking 2 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking starting frequency Braking level 0 to 100 CT mode 0 to 80 MT VT mode Y_ Y o Y Y y N aean 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00s CY CY 00 TY YN At2 Starting Frequency2 0 0to60 0HZ ET YP OS TV TV TV YON A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 Load Selection 0 TT torque load N Y 1 Yo ONE OY N Auto Torque Boost Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC Drive Control Selection 2 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y ye OF Y Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torq
541. tating cannot be selected If the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 cannot be selected due to restrictions on the machinery perform the tuning with the motor stops P04 1 by following the procedure below Compared to the former tuning the latter may show rather inferior performance in the speed control accuracy or stability perform sufficient tests beforehand by connecting the motor with the machinery 1 For motors whose motor ratings are unknown such as ones made by other manufacturers Specify the F04 FOS PO2 and P03 data according to the motor rated values printed on the motor s nameplate Specify motor parameters the data of P06 P16 to P23 by obtaining the appropriate values on the datasheet issued from the motor manufacturer For details of conversion from data on the datasheet into ones to be entered as function code data contact your IMO representative Perform the tuning with the motor stops P04 1 2 Tuning Tune while the motor stops Set function code P04 to 1 and press the amp key The blinking of Z on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is u key on the keypad for forward rotation To select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 o The moment a run command is entered the display of lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Appro
542. tch motor drive source between IPF OL KP RDY commercial power and inverter output For MC on commercial line SW88 commercial power and inverter output For secondary side SW52 2 commercial power and inverter output For primary side Select AX terminal function ee Se Se S ies eC N x x SN Ne i x x Low output torque detected Torque detected 1 Torque detected 2 Motor 1 selected Motor 2 selected Motor 3 selected Motor 4 selected Running forward Running reverse In remote operation Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM Brake signal Frequency speed detected 3 eee eee OC CT TT TS OTe eC N For MC on primary side Inverter output limiting with delay Cooling fan in operation Auto resetting Heat sink overheat early warning Lifetime alarm Frequency speed detected 2 Reference loss detected Inverter output on Overload prevention control Current detected Current detected 2 Current detected 3 Low current detected PID alarm Under PID control Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control SW52 1 AX IOL2 FAN TRY OH LIFE FDT2 REF OFF PID ALM PID CTL PID STP U TL TD1 TD2 SWM1 SWM2 SWM3 SWM4 FRUN RRUN RMT BRKS FDT3 Ki lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ix lt lt lt lt lt
543. tches between the Ist 2nd 3rd and 4th motors as listed below Function codes E01 through E07 data 12 36 or 37 When the motor is switched the function code group with which the inverter drives the motor is also switched to the corresponding one At the same time the inverter outputs the corresponding signal from the Motor 1 selected signal SWMI1 through the Motor 4 selected signal SWM4 Function codes E20 through E27 data 48 49 50 or 51 in order to switch the external switch to that selected motor Inverter driven motor selected Output signals Function code group enabled SWMI SWM 2 SWM3 SWM4 Ist motor Default codes ON 2ndmotor Acodes OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 3rdmotor b codes OFF OFF ON OFF A42 b42 or r42 selects whether the combination of terminal commands M2 M3 and M4 switches the actual motors to the 2nd 3rd and 4th motors or the particular parameters A codes b codes or r codes Only when the inverter is stopped o Motor Switch to the 2nd 3rd or 4th motor Gil ii command are OFF Parameter Switch to particular A codes b codes or r codes Even when the inverter is running Note From the point of view of signal timing a combination of M2 M3 and M4 must be determined at least 2 ms before the signal of a run command is established 5 117 If A42 b42 or r42 is set to 0 Motor Switch to the 2nd 3rd or 4th motor the combination of M2 M3 and M4 sw
544. tection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability Allowable average loss and Resistance These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance to F50 F51 and F52 respectively These values are determined by the inverter and braking resistor models For the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance refer to JAGUAR VXG User s Manual Chapter 4 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT The values listed in the manual are for standard models and 10 ED models of the braking resistors which IMO can supply If you use a braking resistor of other manufacturer confirm the corresponding values with the manufacturer and set the function codes accordingly 5 64 Cote Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm db even if the actual temperature rise is not large enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes Grip The standard models of braking resistor can output temperature detection signal for overheat Assign an P Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to
545. ter abnormally has increased Estimated temperature of the coil in the braking resistor Braking resistor overheat exceeded the allowable level OLI to 014 Overload oF motor 1 iirougir Motor temperature calculated with the inverter output current reached the trip level Option communications error Communications error between the inverter and an option Option error An option judged that an error occurred RS 485 communications error COM port 1 RS 485 communications error between the COM ports 1 RS 485 communications error and 2 COM port 2 2 J Ql T C Z O Z O O m The deviation of the automatic speed regulator between the reference speed and the detected one is out of the specified range d21 for the period specified by d22 Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation Failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the inverter DC fan locked 200 V class 45 kW or above 400 V class 75 kW or above Motor overload early warning Early warning before a motor overload ers erp Heat sink overheat early warning Early warning before a heat sink overheat trip It is judged that the service life of any one of the capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the lif printed circuit boards and cooling fan has expired Or failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the inverter 200 V class 45 kW or above 400 V class 75 kW or above Reference command los
546. ter momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that the restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Power Failure Recovery DC Link Bus Voltage eo ae Undervoltage Level State of the Inverter Operation 1 Running Ready to Run Run Command ON ON State of the Inverter l Start Running Operation 2 Gate Signal ON Gate tumed OFF Gate turned ON Restart Factory default By factory default H13 is set to the value suitable for the standard motor see Table B in Section 5 1 Function Code Tables Basically it is not necessary to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs Note Function code H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time also applies to the switc
547. tes the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode shows Ani r Section Eg Quick Setup Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation F codes Fundamental functions f Extension terminal functions T H codes ai High performance functions Selecting each of these l Ola A CoO Molor 2 Parameters function codes enables its data ni T a b codes Motor 3 parameters to be displayed changed _ O O r codes Motor 4 parameters Ca J codes Application functions 1 5 D 2 oO Data Setting QVdAA AHL ONISN NOILVasAdO d codes Application functions 2 U codes Application functions 3 y codes Link functions Mala heels ee Displays only function codes that have been changed from their Section 8 R factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data 3 4 3 3 Drive Displays the running information required for maintenance or test Section Monitoring running 3 4 4 I O Checking otio Displays external interface information era 5 Maintenance Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time Section Information 3 4 6 la ib Ir l id lu ly _ o codes Optional functions Note Jope 4i o che 6al Alarm Displays the recen
548. th without speed sensor use motor Cote parameters the following conditions should be satisfied otherwise full control performance may not be obtained e A single motor should be controlled per inverter e Motor parameters P02 P03 PO6 to P23 P55 and P56 should be properly configured or auto tuning P04 should be performed e The capacity of the motor to be controlled should be two or more ranks lower than that of the inverter under the dynamic torque vector control it should be the same as that of the inverter under the vector control with without speed sensor Otherwise the inverter may not control the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution e The wiring distance between the inverter and motor should be 50 m or less If it is longer the inverter may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing through stray capacitance to the ground or between wires Especially small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may be unable to control the motor correctly even when the wiring is less than 50 m In that case make the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance e g loosely bundled cable to minimize the stray capacitance 4 4 E Performance comparison for drive controls summary Each drive control has advantages and disadvantages The table below compares the drive controls showing their relative performance in each characteristic Select the one that shows h
549. the JAGUAR V XG series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will IMO Precision Controls Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual IMO Precision Controls Ltd 1000 North Circular Road Staples Corner London NW2 7JP United Kingdom Phone 44 0 20 8452 6444 Fax 44 0 20 8450 2274 URL http www imopconline com 2009 12 S Mc Issue 1
550. the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to Terminal input signal status E Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5 Checking in hexadecimal I O signal status for details Terminal output signal status 6_14 in hexadecimal No of consecutive occurrences Shows the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively Simultaneously occurring alarm code 1 6_16 Multiple alarm 1 _ is displayed if no alarm has occurred mes Multiple alarm 2 gt mulangousiy ogcauirmig alarm code 2 is displayed if no alarm has occurred Terminal I O signal status under communications control displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 Terminal input signal status under communications control Refer to E Displaying control I O signal 6 19 communications control terminals under communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O in hexadecimal signal status for details Terminal output signal status under communications control in hexadecimal Secondary error code for the alarm 3 19 Table 3 16 Display Items in Alarm Information Continued LED monitor shows Description item No Running status 2 as four hexadecimal digits Running status 2 Refer to E Displaying running status 3_07 and running status 2 5_25 in Section 3 4 4 Speed detected value Speed dete
551. the PID control facility integrated in the inverter the IVS is used to switch the PID processor output reference frequency between normal and inverse and has no effect on any normal inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 E Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS 485 communications link or a fieldbus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter LL For an access to universal DI via the RS 485 or fieldbus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals m Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm er6 displayed LL Refer to the description of F07 m Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Function code data 33 Turning this terminal command ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor H Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 m Hold PID integral component PID HLD Function code data 34 Turning this terminal c
552. the inverter was shut down so that the voltage to the control PCB has dropped 2 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise when writing data especially initializing or copying data 3 The control PCB failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Initialize the function code data with H03 1 After initialization check if pressing the G key releases the alarm gt Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Implement noise control measures Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your IMO representative 19 er Keypad communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the remote keypad or the multi function keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Broken communications cable or poor contact 2 Connecting many control wires hinders the front cover from being mounted lifting the keypad 3 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise 4 A keypad failure occurr
553. timer ANDing General purpose timer ORing General purpose timer XORing General purpose timer Set priority flip flop General purpose timer Reset priority flip flop General purpose timer Rising edge detector General purpose timer Failing edge detector General purpose timer Rising and failing edge detector General purpose Input hold General purpose timer Increment counter Decrement counter Timer with reset input No timer On delay timer Off delay timer Pulses 1 2 3 4 5 0 Retriggerable timer Pulse train output 00 to 600 00 5 21 Driv ntrol eee Refer to va PS wo wi Torque page Vif PG PG control Default setting Data copying Change when lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt _ _ a E e E C E E e E See U01 See U02 ERE Bee REE Bae See U01 See U02 sak BE BE kag See U01 See U02 E Rek EEE ae See U01 See U02 Bia Rem RR Rie Cc ab i Code Name Data setting range D to 5 Vi PG w o w Torque page 5 V f PG PG control U26 Customizable
554. tion 2 lt N Motor characteristics 0 Standard motors Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 2 Not used Motor characteristics 3 Not used Other motors Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above A41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Gain for Motor 2 A42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 0 Motor Switch to the 2nd motor Mode selection 14 Parameter Switch to particular A codes A40 Slip Compensation 2 Operating conditions Speed command filter A44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s 0 005 A45 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times y 10 0 A46 0 001 to 9 999 s A48 A49 A50 A51 O Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of 10 hours Startup Counter for Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup count 0000 to FFFF hex Motor 2 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y 0 00 to 2000 A N 7 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y 1Y2 85 N vector control a87 Resen oowoo OOOO i 7 The motor parameters are automat
555. tion hee Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times e Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one F09 Torque Boost 1 Refer to F37 5 40 gt Ql T C Z O O Z O O J m F10 to F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level and Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor Upon detection of overload conditions of the motor the inverter shuts down its output and issues a motor overload alarm 0 to protect motor 1 Cote e Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning oe Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes Refer to the description of E34 For motors with PTC thermistor connecting the PTC thermistor to the terminal V2 enables the motor overheat protective function For details refer to the description of H26 E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered
556. tion and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Never modify the inverter Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries Disposal ACAUTION e Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Chote This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Gp This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations QQ This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Compliance with European Standards Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems PDS Part 5 1 Safety requirement
557. tions 5 40 Opioneror koori Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the A port Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the B port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the C port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 5 44 Option error factor 3 Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the C port 3 17 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 5 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 16 lists the details of the alarm information Programming I l l l l l l l i mode I l I l l l l rt Pe I i Ui mc List of alarm codes Running status info at the time A 7 o an alarm occurred At erne l l L 3 b i SA m Item Switching at approx Output frequency l Chi IL LL i lag _ 1 second intervals BLGU T gt SUG Wee ee ee oe i ltem Switching at approx Output current 1 second intervals
558. to any other menu Table 3 5 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Menu 0 Quick Setup Function code data editing mode factory default Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 2 Data Checking Function code data check mode Menu 7 Data Copying Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 Tip Press the amp key to enter Programming mode and display menus While cycling through the menus with the W O key select the desired menu item with the key Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display returns to the first menu item 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and function code data changing procedure Programming mode Function code data Save data and go to the next function code Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and Function Code Data Changing Procedure Basic key operation This section g
559. to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 Check the PTC thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Modify the data of function code H27 Check the setting of the thermistor mode selection H26 and the slider position of terminal C1 property switch SWS gt Change the H26 data in accordance with the thermistor used and set the SWS to the PTC NTC position Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt Ifno stall occurs decrease the F09 data Check if the base frequency F04 and the rated voltage at base frequency F05 match the values on the motor s nameplate Match the function code data with the values on the motor s nameplate Although no PTC NTC thermistor is used the thermistor mode is enabled H26 gt Set the H26 data to 0 Disable 6 13 J O W a m T O O Z Q 11 b4 Braking resistor overheated Problem The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated Possible Causes 1 Braking load is too heavy 2 Specified deceleration time is too short 3 Incorrect setting of function code data F50 F51 and F52 What to Check and Suggested Measures Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the real load gt Lower the real braking load gt Review the selection of the braking
560. to terminals FM1 and FM2 respectively You need to set the slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Refer to Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter os Terminal FM 1 Terminal FM2 Position of slide switch Position of slide switch Data for F29 SW4 on the control PCB Data for F32 SW6 on the control PCB Voltage 0to 10 VDO 0 vwa O 0 Y V amp R O Current 4 to 120 mA DO The output current is not isolated from analog input and does not have an isolated power supply Therefore if Note i i i i i i i an electrical potential relationship between the inverter and peripheral equipment has been established e g by connecting an analog cascade connection of a current output device is not available 2 J Ql Keep the connection wire length as short as possible E Voltage adjustment F30 and F34 F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage within the range of 0 to 300 s3dOO NOILONNA F30 300 F30 200 F3 10 V F30 50 on lt Terminals FM1 and FM2 output voltage OV 0 33 50 100 Meter scale E Function F31 and F35 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminals FM1 and FM2 Data for Function Meter scale LTS lene ee Output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output frequency of the inverter Equivalent to the motor synchronous Maximum frequency F03 speed Output frequency after slip
561. tor characteristics 8 The output frequency does not increase due to the current limiter operation 9 The output frequency does not increase due to the torque limiter operation 10 Bias and gain incorrectly specified What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake If auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is specified check whether the data of P02 P03 P06 PO7 and P08 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for the motor to be used Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 and check the data of F44 Current limiter Level gt Correct the F44 data Or if the current limiter operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disabled Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 H52 H53 H65 and H66 to ensure that the V f pattern setting is right gt Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the Select torque limiter level terminal command TL2 TL1 is correct gt Correct data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 or reset them
562. tor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 e Under the vector control without speed sensor the auto energy saving operation is disabled F38 F39 Stop frequency Detection mode Holding time Refer to F23 F40 F41 Torque Limiter 1 1 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 2 1 Torque Limiter 2 2 Torque Limiter 1 2 H73 Torque Limiter Operating conditions H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Under V f control If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters F40 F41 E16 E17 and E61 to E63 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall To use the torque limiters it is necessary to configure the function codes listed in the table below Note In braking the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque Depending on the conditions during operation the output frequency could dangerously increase H76 Frequency increment limit for braking is provided to limit the increasing frequency component Related function codes Name V f control Vector control Torque Limiter 1 1 Torque Limiter 1 2 Torque Limiter 2 1 Torque Limiter 2 2 Y ee a Torque Limiter Operating conditions T a a Torque Limiter Control target Torque Limiter Target quadrants Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Terminal 12 Extended Function is E61 to E63 Terminal C1 Extended Funct
563. tor control is enabled BN fed ies 9 FP a Z Data copying NO NM DO S Asks ie eves 2 Sieleslelel Se ES eee eee pele len S S A le lee 2 ee a eee el eleie a Slee ees T ee eee ee A20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A 7 A21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 7 A22 X 0 00 to 50 00 7 A23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 A24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00s Y1 Y2 0 12 A25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz Y1Y2 A27 Iron loss factor 1 0 00 to 20 00 Y1 Y2 A28 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 A29 Iron loss factor 3 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 A30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 0 to 300 0 Y 7 A31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y T A32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 0 to 300 0 Y T A33 A34 A35 O 0 to 300 0 0 to 300 0 0 0 to 300 0 Y T 7 T Magnetic saturation factor 4 O lt lt N an eyes lt lt lt z zIl lt lt lt lt lt Magnetic saturation factor 5 Magnetic saturation extension factor a Magnetic saturation extension factor b Magnetic saturation extension factor c ie oe EIAN E lt lt lt lt lt lt NPT MTR PT NM RD A36 0 0 to 300 0 a lt N N Oo M ol N Ni sIn fo A37 0 0 to 300 0 A39 Motor 2 Selec
564. tor should be applied Magnetic saturation factors to 5 running at 50 of the base during tuning Tuning Magnetic saturation extension factors frequency with load applied a to c P16 to P23 Tuning the rated slip decreases the tuning X correction factor and 2 P53 and P54 frequency with the motor accuracy stopped The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices 4 13 2 F ba P YOLOW AHL ONINNOAY 3 Tuning Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the G5 key The blinking of Z or 2 on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is u key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 D The moment a run command is entered the display of Z or 2 lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s If P04 2 after the tuning in above the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measure
565. ts e Selecting the Upper lower torque limits may cause reciprocating oscillation between the upper and lower limit values depending upon a small difference between the upper and lower limits a slow response from the speed control sequence and other conditions 5 60 mM Torque limiter 1 1 1 2 2 1 and 2 2 F40 F41 E16 and E17 Data setting range 300 to 300 999 Disable These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque limiters become activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque F40 Torque limiter 1 1 F41 Torque limiter 1 2 E16 Torque limiter 2 1 E17 Torque limiter 2 2 Cote Although the data setting range for F40 F41 E16 and E17 is from positive to negative values 300 to mh 300 specify positive values in practice except when the Upper lower torque limits H75 2 is selected If a negative value is specified the inverter interprets it as an absolute value The torque limiter determined depending on the overload current actually limits the torque current output Therefore the torque current output is automatically limited at a value lower than 300 the maximum setting value E Analog torque limit values E61 to E63 The torque limit values can be specified by analog inputs through terminals 12 C1 and V2 voltage or current Set E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function and Terminal V2 Extended Function as listed
566. ty of your system Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate For details see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Constant Torque CT mode designed for heavy duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min 200 for 3 s Continuous ratings Inverter ratings Medium Torque MT mode designed for medium duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank higher capacity of inverters Variable Torque VT mode designed for light duty load applications Overload capability 120 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank or two ranks higher capacity of inverters SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH input voltage input frequency input current each for CT MT and VT modes OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output voltage output frequency range rated output capacity rated output current overload capability each for CT MT and VT modes SCCR Short circuit capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram 30 kW or above SER No Product number 81A123A0001Z Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your IMO representative 1 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Warning plate
567. ual load conditions are so different from the ones at which the initial reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level required then the inverter does not perform measuring The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are extremely restricted e g with the remote keypad mounted and all input terminals being OFF in order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately Those conditions are therefore different from the actual operating conditions in almost all cases If the actual operating conditions are the same as those at shipment shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time however if they are different no automatic measurement is performed To perform it put those conditions back to the factory default ones and shut down the inverter For the measuring procedure see 1 given on the next page To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference capacitance initial setting when the inverter is introduced For the reference capacitance setup procedure see 2 given on page 7 5 Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring conditions of the DC link bus capacitor Setting bit 3 of H98 data to 0 restores the inverter to the measurement in compari
568. ue vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Motor 2 No of poles 2 to 22 poles PN Nivel a vjr Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when A39 0 2 3 or 4 N W iv2 7 YIYIYIY Y 0 01 to 1000 HP when A39 1 Rated current 0 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 5 13 ai oe Drive control G ab 3 Default efau Code Name Data setting range os setting S PG w o w Torque 6 V f_ PG PG control A18 Motor 2 Auto tuning 0 Disable Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vec
569. uency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic ae extension factors a to c P16 to P23 X ion factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic eee extension factors a to c P16 to P23 X satan factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 cannot be selected due to restrictions on the V f V f control w o PG vector control without speed sensor and w PG vector control with speed sensor Tuning with the motor stopped Tuning the R1 and X with the motor stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency Tuning the rated slip frequency again with the motor stopped Tuning the R1 X and rated slip frequency with the motor stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency twice Select under the Sina a following conditions Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied YININ during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied Niyly during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy Cannot rotate the motor
570. unction Terminal Y5A C Function Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output 300 to 300 999 Disable 300 to 300 999 Disable Data setting range Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y1 to Y5A C and 30A B C as listed below Inverter running Frequency speed detected Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped Torque polarity detected Inverter output limiting Auto restarting after momentary power failure Motor overload early warning Keypad operation enabled Inverter ready to run Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For MC on commercial line Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For secondary side Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For primary side w Torque PG control Change when setting Vit PG wo Vif PG lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 15 1015 22 1022 25 1025 26 1026 27 1027 28 1028 Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side Inverter output limiting with delay Cooling fan in operation Auto resetting Universal DO Heat sink overheat early warning Lifetime alarm Frequency speed detected 2 Reference loss detected Inverter output on Current detected Current detected 2 Current detected 3 Low current detected Under PID control wWeeeeeeeneeeeeeee
571. unction code S13 that specifies the communications linked PID command The transmission data of 20000 decimal is equal to 100 maximum frequency of the PID command For details of the communications format refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual e Other than the remote command selection by J02 the multi frequency 4 8 or 12 specified by C08 C12 or rote C16 respectively specified by terminal commands SS4 and SS8 can also be selected as a preset value for the PID command Calculate the setting data of the PID command using the expression below Preset multi frequency PID command data x 100 Maximum frequency e In dancer control JO1 3 the setting from the keypad interlocks with data of J57 PID control Dancer reference position and is saved as function code data selecting Feedback Terminals For feedback control determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output e Ifthe sensor is a current output type use the current input terminal C1 of the inverter e If the sensor is a voltage output type use the voltage input terminal 12 of the inverter or switch over the terminal V2 to the voltage input terminal and use it LL For details refer to the descriptions of E61 through E63 9 122 2 J Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA Application example Process control for air conditioners fans and pumps The operating range for PID process control is internally cont
572. unning the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem recurs gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem per recurs 2 The desired menu is not displayed Possible Causes 1 The menu display mode is not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the E52 data so that the desired menu appears 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 2 3 4 5 6 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running The data of the function codes is protected The WE KP terminal command Enable data change with keypad is not entered though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal The key was not pressed The data of function codes F02 E01 through E07 E98 and E99 cannot be changed The function code s to be changed does not appear What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes Check the data
573. uses the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF E Drive control The JAGUAR VXG runs under any of the following drive controls Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which is indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the function code tables given on the following pages Abbreviation in Drive control column TN T Control target H18 Drive control F42 Vif V f control Dynamic torque vector control PG V f Speed V f control with speed sensor Frequency for V f Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor and PG V f w o PG Vector control without speed sensor w PG Vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Torque control Torque Vector control with speed sensor For details about the drive control refer to Function code F42 Drive Control Selection 1 2 F Ql Note The JAGUAR VXG is a general purpose inverter whose operation is customized by frequency basis function codes like conventional inverters Under the speed basis drive control however the control target is a motor speed not a frequency so convert the frequency to the motor speed according to the following expression Motor speed r min 120 x Frequency Hz Number of poles SAdO9 NOILONNA The following tables list the function codes available for the JAGUAR VXG
574. utput voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 7 toot ttt F05 Increased output voltage using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torgue boost 1 F09 Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 e Auto torque boost If the auto torque boost is selected the inverter automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load the inverter decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase the output torque of the motor e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated rote voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 e When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 E Auto energy saving operation H67 If the auto energy saving operation is enabled the inverter automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be eff
575. uty mode inverters for medium load 90 to 400 kW Type VXG 4E 210AL 253AL S04AL S77AL 475AL S20AL OS0AL 740AL e40AL SG0AL J _ o applied roar 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450 A rating eooo a re o or ow me oe me fom oe TT TT Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function Rated current A 210 263 304 377 415 46e ses eso 740 eo 1 Overload capability _ a 150 4 min 1 150 4 min 380 to 440 V 50 H Voltage frequency 380 ie 480 V 60 Hz er anes er anes Required o man DER fava s 140 165 1 ase ar aoe sa ase aeo f ser f S S TLE 6 7to12 Braking transistor Built in braking resistor Braking time s Duty cycle ED EMC filter omplien with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DOR 7 Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Enclosure IEC60529 IPOO UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling Fan cooing O S O Weight Mass kg 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 1 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage
576. verter keeps on outputting voltage on output terminals U V and W even if a run command is OFF and the motor seems to stop An electric shock may occur Specifying servo lock control E Positioning completion signal PSET Function code data 82 Servo lock Completion timer J98 and Servo lock Completion range J99 This output signal comes ON when the inverter has been servo locked so that the motor is held within the positioning completion range specified by J99 for the period specified by J98 M Servo lock Gain J97 J97 specifies the gain of the servo lock positioning device to adjust the stop behavior and shaft holding torque Stop behavior Response slow but smooth lt gt Response quick but hunting large Shaft holding torque Small lt gt Large Monitor for servo lock control Operation monitor 5_26 Current position pulse Oily wher thepostonme dvie i Current position The upper and lower digits Upper digit Z90 in operation positioning control is appear alternately Lower digit Z91 active the LED monitor displays Operation monitor 3_28 Positioning error pulse these data When it is not in Positioning error The upper and lower digits Upper digit Z94 operation the monitor is zero cleared appear alternately Lower digit Z95 The values on the LED monitor appear based on PG pulses 4 multiplied Under servo lock no current positioning pulses or positioning error pulses are displayed o
577. verter that meets the following condition Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current 1 3 2 Precautions in running inverters Precautions for running inverters to drive motors or motor driven machinery are described below E Motor temperature When an inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the motor temperature becomes higher than when it is operated with a commercial power supply In the low speed range the motor cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor when running the inverter in the low speed range E Motor noise When a general purpose motor is driven by an inverter the noise level is higher than that when it is driven by a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level E Machine vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the motor driven machinery Driving a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration If it happens do any of the following Consider the use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Use the vibration suppression related function codes that may be effective For details refer to the description of H80 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 1 7 1 3 3 Precautions in using spe
578. w normal operation restarts in the 4 th retry Protective function Tripped state 2 J D Ql HO5 HOS H05 HOS Reset command Ast 2nd 3rd th Inverter output frequency SAdOO9 NOILONNA Auto reset signal TRY 0 Time e In the figure below the inverter failed to restart normal operation within the number of reset times specified by H04 in this case 3 times H04 3 and issued the alarm output for any alarm ALM Protective function Tripped state Reset command Inverter output frequency Auto reset signal TRY Alarm output for any alarm ALM 0 Time m Auto resetting TRY E20 to E24 and E27 data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting resetting alarms automatically is in progress H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control Hcodes To prolong the service life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its service life the cooling fan keeps running for 10 minutes once started H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF S ae Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable Cooling fan in operation FAN E20 to E24 and E27 data 25 With th
579. warning OL Current detected ID Current detected 2 JD2 Current detected 3 JD3 and Low current detected IDL output signals __Operation level _ _Motor characteristics Thermal time constant_ Range See below Range 0 01 to 600 00 s Range See below Range 0 5 to 75 0 min Data setting range Operation level 0 00 Disable 1 to 200 of inverter rated current Motor characteristics 1 Enable For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 2 Enable For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan E Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code 0 of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant E Current detected Current detected 2 and Current detected 3 ID ID2 and ID3 When the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34 E37 or E55 for the period specified by E35 E38 or E56 the ZD D2 or ID3 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90
580. wer e The sequence operates normally even if an alarm occurs in the inverter except when the inverter itself is broken Therefore for a critical facility be sure to install an emergency switching circuit outside the inverter e Turning ON both the magnetic contactor MC 88 at the commercial power side and the MC 52 2 at the inverter output side at the same time supplies main power mistakenly from the output secondary side of the inverter which may damage the inverter To prevent it be sure to set up an interlocking logic outside the inverter 9 75 Examples of Sequence Circuits 1 Standard sequence Main power Commercial power selection switch Operation selection switch 43 Inverter ON when the INV Commercial inverter is selected Run Se X1 SW52 1 SW52 2 Swea Y3 Y2 Yl 30C O 52 1X 52 2X 88X 88X 2 THR 4 O 52 2 Z Control 5 power O source m Cp Inverter operation Commercial power operation 2 Sequence with an emergency switching function Main power Commercial power Operation selection switch selection switch 43 INV Com ON when the inverter is selected Run 2 CM FWD XI 3S A3 ISW50 Inverter Normal Emergency SW52 1 SW52 2 SW88 ALM Stop 3 Y2 Y1 30A 30C 5S 44 Note This switch is provided for manually switching the run command source to a commercial power line when the automatic switching sequence fails due to a critical failure of the inve
581. winter the load tends to increase Check whether any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake if any Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 H52 H53 H65 and H66 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal selecting motor 1 2 3 or 4 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify the function code data to match the connected motor Check whether the reference frequency is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the reference frequency so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor Check the wiring Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in VT mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Without a DCR these inverters cannot run gt Connect the DCR correctly Repair or replace DCR wires 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low 2 The data of frequency limiter High currently specified was too low 3 The reference frequency currently specified was too low 4 A frequency command e g multi frequency or via
582. x 40 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 end appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning 6 Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad E Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays er and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to Sequence error a Stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other
583. y Main Circuit Motor operation control by inverter Inverter primary 52 1 Need not be assigned Run command Inverter secondary 52 2 Commercial Inverter Commercial Inverter Switch sequence Y3 Commercial power line command swe 88 X2 SW50 ON means the inverter Commercial side thermal relay 49 During commercial power operation an overcurrent flow opens this relay Configuration of Control Circuit Summary of Operation P Status signal and magnetic contactor Inverter SW52 1 SW52 2 SW88 operation OFF Commercial power i ON ON ON OFF 5 74 2 F Ql SAdO9 NOILONNA Timing Scheme Switching from inverter operation to commercial power operation ISW50 ISW60 ON gt OFF 1 The inverter output is shut OFF immediately Power gate IGBT OFF 2 The inverter primary circuit SW52 and the inverter secondary side SW52 2 are turned OFF immediately 3 If a run command is present after an elapse of tl 0 2 sec time specified by H13 the commercial power circuit SW88 is turned ON Switching from commercial power operation to inverter operation SW50 TSW60 OFF gt ON 1 The inverter primary circuit SW52 is turned ON immediately 2 The commercial power circuit SW88 is turned OFF immediately 3 After an elapse of t2 0 2 sec time required for the main circuit to get ready from when SW52 is turned ON the inverter secondary circuit SW52 2 is turned ON
584. y circuit causes an overcurrent trip disabling operation An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is assumed to be due to surge current generated by open close of phase advancing capacitors in the power system An optional DC AC reactor DCR ACR is recommended as a measure to be taken at the inverter side Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and phase advancing capacitors on the same power supply line If the harmonic component causes any problems connect an optional DCR ACR to the inverter In some cases it is necessary to insert a reactor in series with the phase advancing capacitors 2 Power supply lines Application of a DC AC reactor Use an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500 kVA or more and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads If no DCR is used the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitors If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 3 DC reactor DCR for correcting the inverte
585. y and or run commands Since the data to be set in the function code of the inverter is automatically set by Loader no keypad operation is required While Loader is selected as the source of the run command if the computer runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop command sent from Loader disconnect the RS 485 communications cable from the port 1 or the USB cable connect a keypad instead and reset the y99 data to 0 This setting 0 in y99 means that the run and frequency command source specified by function code H30 takes place instead of JAGUAR Loader Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99 When power is turned off the data in y99 is lost y99 is reset to 0 0 Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data 5 149 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Protective Functions The JAGUAR VXG series of inverters has various protective functions as listed below to prevent the system from going down and reduce system downtime The protective functions marked with an asterisk in the table are disabled by default Enable them according to your needs The protective functions include for example the heavy alarm detection function which upon detection of an abnormal state displays the alarm code on the LED monitor and causes the inverter to trip the light alarm detection function which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current operation and other warning signal output functions If
586. y command input The reference frequency was below the starting or stop frequency What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary gt Ifonly the auxiliary control power input is supplied also supply the main power to the inverter Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad Input a run command Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted Correct the run command source Set F02 data to 1 Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV with function codes E98 and E99 Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly Make sure that the sink source slide switch SW1 on the control printed circuit board control PCB is properly configured Check the input status of terminal EN with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Correct the external circuit wiring to control circuit terminal EN Y y yy vy Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using th
587. y is set at 0 0 Hz the inverter starts at 0 1 Hz E Starting frequency 1 Holding time F24 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 mM Stop frequency F25 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter Under V f control even if the stop frequency is set at 0 0 Hz the inverter stops at 0 1 Hz E Stop frequency Holding time F39 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency Note f the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency nder v r control with with nsor At the startup the inverter first starts at the 0 speed and accelerates to the starting frequency according to the specified acceleration time After holding the starting frequency for the specified period the inverter again accelerates to the reference speed according to the specified acceleration time The inverter stops its output when the detected speed or reference one specified by F38 reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed
588. y20 RS 485 Communication 1 and 2 Up to two ports of RS 485 communications link are available as listed below Applicable equipment man Standard keypad RS 4 link IP Port 1 A a clea y01 through y10 JAGUAR Loader via the RJ 45 connector prepared for keypad connection Host equipment Port 2 a A 11 through y20 Host equipment via terminals DX DX and SD on the control PCB i Ba qH To connect any of the applicable devices follow the procedures shown below 1 Standard keypad The standard keypad allows you to run and monitor the inverter There is no need to set the y codes 2 JAGUAR Loader Connecting your computer running JAGUAR Loader to the inverter via RS 485 communication port 1 you can monitor the inverter s running status information edit function codes and test run the inverters For the setting of y codes refer to the descriptions of y01 to y10 Note JAGUAR VXG series of inverters has a USB port on the keypad To use the JAGUAR Loader via the USB port simply set the station address y01 to 1 factory default 3 Host equipment The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting host equipment such as a PC and PLC to the inverter Modbus RTU and general purpose inverter protocol are available for communications protocols Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon Inc LU For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual E Station address y01 for port 1 and y11 f
589. ying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this function is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy Function code Rated slip frequency Specify the rated slip frequency Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation amount for driving Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for driving Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking Slip compensation gain for braking Slip compensation amount for braking Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for braking Specify the slip compensation response time PeO aO TE OES Basically there is no need to modify the default setting To improve the accuracy of slip compensation perform auto tuning H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function according to the motor driving conditions Daor Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone ata for Accel Decel Base frequency or below Above the base frequency of e Enabte O Enable O Enae 5 62 m Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculate

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

IAN 75715 - Lidl Service Website  Philips MultiLife SCB4355CB 200 minutes Battery charger  JVC UX-T550 User's Manual  INST. - LOGISTY  Gastroback 42325  UNIÓN INTERNACIONAL PARA LA PROTECCIÓN DE LAS  Samsung 204TS Bruksanvisning  入札説明書 - 国立水俣病総合研究センター  USbib-1.0.  RelayFax SMTP Client v7.1 - User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file